Home

TR0105 TSK51x/TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference

1. Table 1 6 Register usage for parameter passing AN If a register corresponding to a parameter number is already in use the next register is used 1 19 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Example with three arguments funcl int a int b int c e a first parameter is passed in registers R67 e b second parameter is passed in registers R45 e c third parameter is passed in registers R23 Example with two long float arguments func2 long d longe e qd first parameter is passed in registers R4567 e e second parameter cannot be passed through registers anymore and is passed via the stack Example with one long float and one other argument func3 float f char g e f first parameter is passed in registers R4567 e g second parameter is passed in register R3 1 11 3 Function Return Types The C compiler uses registers to store C function return values depending on the function return types Return type Register Description __bit Bool C carry char A accumulator short int R67 R6 high byte R7 low byte long R4567 R45 high word R67 low word float floating point stack 8 bit pointer A accumulator 16 bit pointer R67 R6 high byte R7 low byte structure return buffer R67 R6 high byte R7 low byte pointer16 bit Table 1 7 Register usage for function return types 1 11 4 Inlining Functions inline __noinline With the C
2. unistd h The file unistd h contains standard UNIX I O functions These functions are all implemented using the debugger s file system simulation Except for lstat and fstat which are not implemented This header file is not defined in ISO C99 access name mode Use the file system simulation of the debugger to check the permissions of a file on the host mode specifies the type of access and is a bit pattern constructed by a logical OR of the following values R_OK Checks read permission W_OK Checks write permission X_OK Checks execute search permission F_OK Checks to see if the file exists FSS implementation chdir path Use the file system simulation feature of the debugger to change the current directory on the host to the directory indicated by path FSS implementation close fd File close function The given file descriptor should be properly closed This function calls _close FSS implementation getcwd buf size Use the file system simulation feature of the debugger to retrieve the current directory on the host Returns the directory name FSS implementation lseek fd offset Moves read write file offset Calls _1seek whence FSS implementation read fd buff cnt Reads a sequence of characters from a file This function calls read FSS implementation stat name buff Use the file system simulation feature of the debugger to stat a file on the host platform 2 22 FSS
3. These are the arithmetic operators for addition subtraction multiplication and division The result is an integer For division the result is undefined if operand2 equals zero The result of a division rounds toward zero gt These are operators for the following logical relations less than greater than equals is unequal The result is true or false 6 1 3 4 MUFOM Variables The meaning of the MUFOM variable is explained in section 6 1 3 The following syntax rules apply for the MUFOM variables MUFOM_variable MUFOM_var G MUFOM_var_num A 1 PN W X hex_number L P R S hex_number MUFOM_var MUFOM_var_num MUFOM_var_optnum MUFOM_var_optnum 6 1 3 5 INS and EXT Operator The INS operator inserts a bit string four_operand_function 2S operandi operand2 operand3 operand4 INS operand2 is inserted in operand1 starting at position operand3 and ending at position operand4 The EXT operator extracts a bit string three_operand_function operandi operand2 operand3 EXT A bit string is extracted from operand starting at position operand2 and ending at position operand3 6 1 3 6 Conditional Expressions conditional_expr err_expr if_else_expr err_expr value condition err_num ERR value i expression condition expression err_num us expres
4. STR_MAC MACRO STRING MESSAGE I This is a LONG STRING MESSAGE I This is a LONG STRING ENDM If the macro is called as follows STR_MAC sentence it expands as MESSAGE I This is a LONG STRING MESSAGE I This is a short sentence Macro Local Label Override Operator If you use labels in macros the assembler normally generates another unique name for the labels such as LOCAL M L000001 The macro operator prevents name mangling on macro local labels Consider the following macro definition INIT MACRO addr LOCAL mov A addr ENDM The macro is called as follows LOCAL INIT LOCAL The macro expands as LOCAL M _L000001 mov A LOCAL If you would not have used the operator the macro preprocessor would choose another name for LOCAL because the label already exists The macro would expand like LOCAL M L000001 mov A LOCAL_M L000001 3 9 4 Using the FOR and REPEAT Directives as Macros The FOR and REPEAT directives are specialized macro forms to repeat a block of source statements You can think of them as a simultaneous definition and call of an unnamed macro The source statements between the FOR and ENDFOR directives and REPEAT and ENDREP directives follow the same rules as macro definitions d gt For a detailed description of these directives see section 3 8 Assembler Directives 3 48 Assembly Language 3 9 5 Conditional Assembly With the conditional assemb
5. cstart obj stack_xdata _ start 0x00000000 0x0000001d hello obj stack_xdata _main 0x00000000 0x0000001d stack _xdata printf 0x00000008 Ox0000001d FEI II III ICICI ISIC ICICI Locate Part Task entry address code 0x00000003 0x00000000 0x00000000 start 0x00000019 0x00000003 0x00000003 xdata 0x00000004 0x0000001c 0x0000001c ml __fss_buffer 0x00000053 system sw xdata _errno 0x0000004c _main 0x000001e1 system sw code Name Address Space l l l l fern nnn nnn nnn nn nnn nnn 5 4 IKK K KKK KKK IK RIKKI KKK IKK IKI A IKI IK KIRK IKARIA R IH RIK KR IKK KIRK IK IKK IKK AKAIKE KR IKK IKI IAI IKK IBA II IIIA RE IKK IK KKK KKK IK KIKI KKK IKK IKK K KIKI KIB IKK IKI K IRA List File Formats Symbol translation sorted on address Address Name Space 0x0000004c _errno system sw xdata 0x00000053 __fss buffer 0x000001e1 _main system sw code a EAER E AE A K E AE e E A R e A E E A K E A E A R E A A R A AE R k Memory Part 2A A A A k e A e A R e e R A R A A A R e A R k A e AE E E e A E A R A R A E R Address range usage at space level system sw code 0x00010000 0x00002008 13 0x0000dff8 87 Ox0000dff8 87 system sw data 0x00000080 0x0000002b 34 0x00000055 66 0x00000055 66 system sw idata 0x00000100 0x0000002b 17 0x000000d5 83 0x000000d5 83 system sw pdat
6. Table 4 1 Overview of librarian options and suboptions 4 177 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Librarian Command line syntax Description Displays an overview of all command line options Example The following invocations display a list of the available command line options tlb tlb Related information i 4 178 Tool Options Librarian Librarian d Command line syntax d v Description Delete the specified object modules from a library With the suboption v the librarian shows which files are removed V Verbose the librarian shows which files are removed Example tlb d mylib lib objl obj obj2 obj The librarian deletes obj1 obj and obj2 obj from the library mylib lib tlb d v mylib lib objl obj obj2 o0bj The librarian deletes obj1 obj and obj2 obj from the library mylib 1ib and displays which files are removed Related information J 4 179 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Librarian f Command line syntax f file Description Instead of typing all options on the command line you can create an option file which contains all options and flags you want to specify With this option you specify the option file to the librarian tlb Use an option file when the command line would exceed the limits of the operating system or just to store options and save typing Option files can also be generated on the fly for example by the make utility You can specify
7. Expand the Assembler entry and select Preprocessing Click on User macro click on the down arrow in the right pane to expand macro input Click on an empty Macro field and enter a macro name Then click outside the cell to confirm a FF Ye DN Optionally click in the Value field and enter a definition Then click outside the cell to confirm Command line syntax define macro_name macro_definition Dmacro_name macro_definition Description With this option you can define a macro and specify it to the assembler preprocessor If you only specify a macro name no macro definition the macro expands as 1 You can specify as many macros as you like On the command line you can use the option define D multiple times If the command line exceeds the limit of the operating system you can define the macros in an option file which you then must specify to the assembler with the option option file file f Defining macros with this option instead of in the assembly source is for example useful in combination with conditional assembly as shown in the example below aN This option has the same effect as defining symbols via the DEFINE SET and EQU directives similar to define in the C language With the MACRO directive you can define more complex macros Example Consider the following assembly program with conditional code to assemble a demo program and a real program IF DEMO ere instructions
8. Menu entry Command line syntax incremental r Description Normally the linker links and locates the specified object files With this option you tell the linker only to link the specified files The linker creates a linker output file out You then can link this file again with other object files until you have reached the final linker output file that is ready for locating In the last pass you call the linker without this option with the final linker output file out The linker will now locate the file Example In this example the files test1 obj test2 obj and test3 obj are incrementally linked 1 1k51 incremental testl obj test2 obj otest out test1 obj and test2 obj are linked 2 1k51 incremental test3 obj test out test3 obj and test out are linked task1 out is created 3 1k51 taskl out task1 out is located Related information dE Section 4 5 Incremental Linking in chapter Using the Linker of the user s manual 4 92 Tool Options Linker Linker keep output files k Menu entry Altium Designer always removes the output files when errors occurred Command line syntax keep output files k Description If an error occurs during linking the resulting output file may be incomplete or incorrect With this option you keep the generated output files when an error occurs By default the linker removes the generated output file when an error occurs This is useful when you use the make uti
9. Related information Gb Dallas reference Dallas DS80C390 erratum 6 revision B3 01 19 00 4 4 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler check Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option check to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax check Description With this option you can check the source code for syntax errors without generating code This saves time in developing your application because the code will not actually be compiled The compiler reports any warnings and or errors Related information d gt Assembler option check Check syntax 4 5 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler cpu C Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Processor entry and select Processor Definition 3 Select a processor from the Select processor box Command line syntax cpu tsk51altsk52a tsk52b C tsk51a tsk52a tsk52b Description With this option you define the CPU core for which you create your application The TSK51x TSK52x target has more than one processor type and therefore you need to specify for which processor type the compiler should compile The effect of this option is that the compiler includes the appropriate special function register file
10. TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Control Program preprocess E Command line syntax preprocess flags Efflags You can set the following flags when you specify E without flags the default is ECMP comments c C Keep comments from the C source in the preprocessed output make m M Generate dependency lines that can be used for the makefile noline p P Strip line source position info lines starting with line Description With this option you tell the control program to preprocess the C source The C compiler sends the preprocessed output to the file name pre where name is the name of the C source file being compiled Altium Designer also compiles the C source On the command line the control program stops after preprocessing If you also want to compile the C source you can specify the option no preprocessing only In this case the control program calls the compiler twice once with option preprocess and once for a regular compilation Example cc51 preprocess comments make noline no preprocessing only test c The compiler preprocesses the file test c and sends the output to the file test pre Comments are included but no dependencies are generated and the line source position information is not stripped from the output file Next the control program calls the compiler assembler and linker to create the final object file test abs Related information d gt Control program o
11. The TASKING TSK51x TSK52x C compiler recognizes the following intrinsic functions __ alloc void volatile _alloc _ size_t size Allocate memory Same as library function malloc Returns a pointer to space in external memory of size bytes length NULL if there is not enough space left __dotdotdot__ char _ dotdotdot_ void Variable argument operator Used in library function va_start Returns the stack offset to the variable argument list 1 21 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference __free void volatile _free void p Deallocates the memory pointed to by p p must point to memory earlier allocated by a callto ___alloc Same as library function free Returns nothing __getbit _ bit _ getbit bitaddressable bitoffset Get the value of a bit bitoffset must be an integral constant expression Returns the bit at bitoffset range 0 7 for a char 0 15 for an int or 0 31 for a long of the bitaddressable operand for use in bit expressions Example __bdata unsigned char byte int i if __getbit byte 3 i 1 _ putbit void _ putbit _ bit value bitaddressable bitoffset Assign a value to the bit at bitoffset range 0 7 for a char 0 15 for an int or 0 31 for a long of the bitaddressable operand bitoffset must be an integral constant expression Returns nothing Example __bdata unsigned int word __putbit 1 word 11 __putbit 0 word 10 For compat
12. Tool Options Linker Linker chip output c Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Output Format 3 Enable the options Intel HEX records and or Motorola S records Command line syntax chip output basename format adar_size c basename format adar_size You can specify the following formats IHEX Intel Hex SREC Motorola S records The addr_size specifies the size of the addresses in bytes record length For Intel Hex you can use the values 1 2 or 4 bytes default For Motorola S you can specify 2 S1 records 3 S2 records or 4 bytes S3 records default In Altium Designer you cannot specify the address size because Altium Designer always uses the default values Description With this option you specify the Intel Hex or Motorola S record output format for loading into a PROM programmer The linker generates a file for each ROM memory defined in the LSL file where sections are located memory memname type rom The name of the file is the name of the Altium Designer project or on the command line the name of the memory device that was emitted with extension hex or sre Optionally you can specify a basename which prepends the generated file name AN The linker always outputs a debugging file in IEEE 695 format and optionally an absolute object file in Intel Hex format and or Motorol
13. a section with type CODE the symbol gets type CODE END You cannot redefine the used symbols Related information d gt SET Set temporary value to a symbol 3 22 Assembly Language EXTERN Syntax EXTERN symbol type symbol type Description With the EXTERN directive you define an external symbol It means that the symbol is referenced in the current module while it is defined outside the current module You must define the symbols either outside any module or declare it as globally accessible within another module with the GLOBAL directive The type of the global symbol which is referenced with the EXTERN directive is determined from its definition The assembler then uses the type information of the EXTERN directive to check the symbol s use if the symbol does not fit the instruction s operand the assembler issues a warning If you do not specify type the assembler does not check the use of the specified symbol Each target has a specific set of types as described in the SECTION Start a new section directive If you do not use the EXTERN directive and the symbol is not defined within the current module the assembler issues a warning and inserts the EXTERN directive Example EXTERN AA CC DD defined elsewhere EXTERN AA DATA assembler checks for type Related information Gls GLOBAL Declare global section symbol 3 23 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference
14. 3 Enable the option Put strings in ROM only Command line syntax romstrings S Description By default constant strings are copied from ROM to RAM at program startup With this option you tell the compiler to keep constant strings in ROM If you use this option you can access these strings only with the rom keyword With this option enabled strings are not copied to RAM at startup to save RAM memory Strings in ROM cannot be modified and access is slower than access to strings in RAM Related information i 4 44 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler signed bitfields Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Language 3 Enable the option Treat int bit fields as signed Command line syntax signed bitfields Description For bit fields it depends on the implementation whether a plain int is treated as signed int orunsigned int By default an int bit field is treated as unsigned int This offers the best performance With this option you tell the compiler to treat int bit fields as signed int In this case you can still add the keyword unsigned to treat a particular int bit field as unsigned Related information i 4 45 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler source s Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box a
15. 4 150 Tool Options Make Utility 4 5 Make Utility Options When you build a project in Altium Designer Altium Designer generates a makefile and uses the make utility tmk to build all your files However you can also use the make utility directly from the command line to build your project The invocation syntax is tmk option target macro def This section describes all options for the make utility The make utility is a command line tool so there are no equivalent options in Altium Designer 4 151 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Defining Macros Command line syntax macro definition Description With this argument you can define a macro and specify it to the make utility A macro definition remains in existence during the execution of the makefile even when the makefile recursively calls the make utility again In the recursive call the macro acts as an environment variable This means that it is overruled by definitions in the recursive call Use the option e to prevent this You can specify as many macros as you like If the command line exceeds the limit of the operating system you can define the macros in an option file which you then must specify to the make utility with the option m file Defining macros on the command line is for example useful in combination with conditional processing as shown in the example below Example Consider the following makefile with conditional rules to
16. IDENTIFIER mem_name IDENTIFIER proc_name IDENTIFIER section_name DQSTRING space_name IDENTIFIER stack_name section_name symbol_name DOSTRING 7 3 4 Expressions The expressions and operators in this section work the same as in ISO C number OCT_NUM DEC_NUM HEX NUM expr number symbol name unary_op expr expr binary_op expr expr expr expr expr function_call unary_op r logical NOT a bitwise complement negative value binary_op penn exclusive OR multiplication division modulus addition subtraction gt gt right shift lt lt left shift equal to not equal to gt greater than lt less than gt greater than or equal to lt less than or equal to amp bitwise AND bitwise OR amp amp logical AND logical OR 7 4 Linker Script Language 7 3 5 Built in Functions function_call absolute expr addressof addr_id exists section_name max expr expr min expr expr sizeof size_id addr_id sect section_name group group_name size_id 3 sect section_name group group_name mem mem_name e Every space bus memory section or group your refer to must be defined in the LSL file e The addressof and sizeof functions with the group or sect argument can only be used in the right hand side of an assignment The sizeof function with th
17. This rule is really a documentation issue The compiler will flag all pragma directives as violations defined shall only be used in one of the two standard forms Pointer arithmetic should not be used TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 x 116 x 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 A pu po Rees Ee e 33 R R R III IDDI IDIIDDII R R R No more than 2 levels of pointer indirection should be used A violation is reported when a pointer with three or more levels of indirection is declared No relational operators between pointers to different objects In general checking whether two pointers point to the same object is impossible The compiler will only report a violation for a relational operation with incompatible pointer types Non constant pointers to functions shall not be used Functions assigned to the same pointer shall be of identical type Automatic address may not be assigned to a longer lived object The null pointer shall not be de referenced A violation is reported for every pointer dereference that is not guarded by a NULL pointer test All struct union members shall be fully specified Overlapping variable storage shall not be used A violation is reported for every union de
18. arg vsprintf s format arg swscanf s format vfwscanf stream format arg vwscanf format arg vswscanf s format arg fwprintf stream format wprintf format swprintf s n format vfwprintf stream format arg vwprintf format arg vswprintf s format arg of items converted succesfully FSS implementation Performs a formatted read from the string s Returns the number of items converted succesfully Same as fscanf fwscanf but extra arguments are given as variable argument list arg See section 2 2 18 stdarg h Same as scanf wscanf but extra arguments are given as variable ar gument list arg See section 2 2 18 stdarg h Same as scanf wscanf but extra arguments are given as variable ar gument list arg See section 2 2 18 stdarg h Performs a formatted write to the given stream Returns EOF WEOF on error FSS implementation Performs a formatted write to the stream stdout Returns EOF WEOF on error FSS implementation Performs a formatted write to string s Returns EOF WEOF on error Same as sprintf but n specifies the maximum number of characters including the terminating null character to be written Same as fprintf fwprintf but extra arguments are given as variable argument list arg See section 2 2 18 stdarg h FSS implementation Same as print f wprintf but extra arguments are given as variable argument list arg See section 2 2 18
19. no processor name section_setup core _def core core name lt core_ descr gt gt 0 e Acore_def defines a core with the given core_name as a unique name e Atleast one core_def must be present in a derivative_definition 7 9 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference core_descr architecture arch_name lt argument_list gt l1 endianness endianness_ type lt endianness_type gt e An arch_name refers to a defined core architecture e Exactly one architecture statement must be present in a core_def 7 3 10 Processor Definition and Board Specification board_spec proc_def bus_def mem_def proc_def processor proc_name proc_descr proc_descr derivative derivative_name lt argument_list gt l1 e A proc_def defines a processor with the proc_name as a unique name e If you do not explicitly define a processor for a derivative in an LSL file the linker defines a processor with the same name as that derivative e Aderivative_name refers to a defined derivative e Aproc_def contains exactly one derivative statement 7 3 11 Section Layout Definition and Section Setup section definition section_layout lt space ref gt 1 lt locate direction gt 9 1 lt section_statement gt gt e A section definition inside a space definition does not have a space_ref e All global section definitions have a space_ref space_ref lt proc_name gt 1 lt core_name g
20. 2 2 20 stddefihi a eseon sitaaa a Peed odes tae dae ie IM athe E baad edad tke 2 11 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 2 2 21 SIdING As on3 Bocaire I E aa A ole eee Fae Reece E E wees deed Ramee oaglsee 2 11 2 2 22 Stdio h and Whar h accra see Seok odd gsi eA nnd Caeser bk id nee NE ee dels 2 11 2 2 23 Stdlib hand wechat h cerere dae bad ad E E E aaa eave ea de seen ba 2 17 2 2 24 string hand wWeharh cceicdese chacddegeludpawaderbiedlawaGeteiades sud seed ady sed 2 19 2 2 25 time h and weharh o ss ccs2e4 cee ed ec cane cae esia dane de ewes NETRE aad ERDE ee Eee Eai 2 20 2 2 26 Unista J 2S4 c05e he eee ede de veka die ga eek Away Aaa hee el Moe dw eine EER 2 22 2 2 27 WChARD jog voted heeds ekg EET E EE eE Hadad ey Gamage dakaw dee ee Da ede yeas 2 23 2 2 28 WEDE vente a thek na daped iata cede G eee aud rate beg haba Pee eee awtes 2 24 Assembly Language 3 1 3 1 Assembly Syntax 2cc siecwiaguet acre tea eae E E Gah ned coho RE gees 3 1 3 2 Assembler Significant Characters 0000s cece teen eee eens 3 2 3 3 Operands of an Assembly Instruction 000 cc cece eee eee eens 3 2 3 4 Symbol Names ens stenas a eee ae a ie teeta e R 3 2 3 5 REGISTOS ara kanis ner n ET er A E E E en E E E E E a desis bas 3 3 3 6 Assembly Expressions 0 0 0 cect eenn ee ee EE ee a 3 3 3 6 1 Numeric Constants ics cpiaiveisantadivactewee bi EE E E E dtad hxaaks 3 4 3 6 2 SWINGS 5 23 he a e ites ects eaten as te eases etait ater r coated aa
21. C compiler option optimize compact Optimization code compaction C compiler option compact max size Maximum size of a match for code compaction 4 24 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler mdptr m Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option mdptr to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax mdptr Amtel Dallas Infineon Philips m a d i p Description The standard TSK51x TSK52x architecture provides just one 16 bit pointer for indirect addressing of external memory DPTR At this moment however there are several architectures supporting more than just one data pointer You can use the following suboptions to use multiple data pointers a Amiel AT8x53 AT89S53 AT89S4D1 2 AT89S8252 supports two 16 bit data pointers d Dallas 80C320 520 530 and AMD 80C521 supports eight 16 bit data pointers i Infineon Technologies C500 C800 family supports two 16 bit data pointers p Philips 51 family supports eight 16 bit data pointers By default this option is not set and just one data pointer is supported Related information J 4 25 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler misrac Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select MISRA C 3 Select a M
22. Control Program keep temporary files t Menu Entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Select Build Options 3 Enable the option Keep temporary files that are generated during a compile Command line syntax keep temporary files t Description By default the control program removes intermediate files like the src file result of the compiler phase and the obj file result of the assembler phase With this option you tell the control program to keep temporary files it generates during the creation of the absolute object file Related information J 4 131 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Control Program library l Command line syntax library name Iname Description With this option you tell the linker via the control program to use system library name Lib where name is a string The linker first searches for system libraries in any directories specified with library directory then in the directories specified with the environment variable LIBC51 unless you used the option ignore default library path Example To search in the system library c511s 1ib C library cc51 test obj mylib lib library c51lls The linker links the file test obj and first looks in mylib 1ib in the current directory only then in the system library c511s 1ib to resolve unresolved symbols Related information d gt Linker option l
23. ELSE directive is optional ENDIF Description With the IF ENDIF directives you can create a part of conditional assembly code The assembler assembles only the code that matches a specified condition The expression must evaluate to an integer and cannot contain forward references If expression evaluates to zero the IF condition is considered FALSE any non zero result of expression is considered as TRUE You can nest IF directives to any level The ELSE and ELIF directive always refer to the nearest previous IF directive Example Suppose you have an assemble source file with specific code for a test version for a demo version and for the final version Within the assembly source you define this code conditionally as follows IF TEST code for the test version ELIF DEMO code for the demo version ELSE code for the final version ENDIF Before assembling the file you can set the values of the symbols TEST and DEMO in the assembly source before the IF directive is reached For example to assemble the demo version TEST SET 0 DEMO SET 1 You can also define the symbols in Altium Designer as preprocessor macros in dialog Project Project Options Assembler Preprocessing assembler option define Related information Gb Assembler option define Define preprocessor macro in Section 4 2 Assembler Options of Chapter Tool Options 3 26 Assembly Language INCLUDE Syntax INCLUDE
24. FOR ENDFOR Syntax label FOR var IN expression expression ENDFOR or label FOR var IN start TO end STEP step ENDFOR Description With the FOR ENDFOR directive you can repeat a sequence of assembly source lines with an iterator As shown by the syntax you can use the FOR ENDFOR in two ways 1 Inthe first mehod the loop is repeated as many times as the number of arguments following IN If you use the symbol var in the assembly lines between FOR and ENDFOR for each repetition the symbol var is substituted by a subsequent expression from the argument list If the argument is a null then the loop is repeated with each occurrence of the symbol var removed 2 Inthe second method the loop is repeated using the symbol var as a counter The counter passes all integer values from start to end with a step If you do not specify step the counter is increased by one for every repetition If you specify label it gets the value of the location counter at the start of the directive processing Example In the following example the loop is repeated 4 times there are four arguments With the DB directive you allocate and initialize a byte of memory for each repetition of the loop a word for the Dw directive Effectively the preprocessor duplicates the DB and DW directives four times in the assembly source FOR VAR1 IN 1 2 3 4 12 DB VARI DW VAR1 VAR1 ENDFOR In the following example the loop is
25. In case of single and multiple character strings each character is stored in consecutive bytes whose lower seven bits represent the ASCII value of the character The standard C escape sequences are allowed DB R 0x52 DB AB D 0x41420043 second argument is empty When you use the DB directive in a bit type section each argument initializes 8 bits and the location counter of the current section is incremented with 8 bits Example TABLE DB 14 253 0x62 ABCD CHARS DB A B C D Related information Gb BS Block Storage DS Define Storage DBIT Define Bit DH Define Half Word DW Define Word DL Define Long 3 14 Assembly Language DBIT Syntax label DBIT argument argument Description With the DBIT directive Define Bit you allocate and initialize memory in bit units for each argument You can use the DBIT directive only within sections of the type bit An argument is 0 or 1 If you specify label it gets the value of the location counter at the start of the directive processing Example NBITS DBIT 1 0 1 1 allocate and initialize four bits Related information d gt BS Block Storage DS Define Storage DB_ Define Byte DH Define Half Word DW Define Word DL Define Long SECTION Start a new section 3 15 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference DEFINE Syntax DEFINE symbol string Description With t
26. Linker output o Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Output Format 3 Enable one or more output formats Command line syntax output filename format addr_size offilename format adar_size You can specify the following formats IEEE IEEE 695 ELF ELF DWARF IHEX Intel Hex SREC Motorola S records Description By default the linker generates an output file in IEEE 695 format named after the first input file with extension abs With this option you can specify an alternative filename and an alternative output format The default output format is the format of the first input file You can use the output option multiple times This is useful to generate multiple output formats With the first occurrence of the output option you specify the basename the filename without extension which is used for subsequent output options with no filename specified If you do not specify a filename or you do not specify the output option at all the linker uses the default basename taskn IHEX and SREC formats If you specify the Intel Hex format or the Motorola S records format you can use the argument addr_size to specify the size of addresses in bytes record length For Intel Hex you can use the values 1 2 and 4 default For Motorola S records you can specify 2 S1 records 3 S2 records or 4
27. The next phase in the translation process is linking several object modules into one new object module A relocatable object uses relocation expressions at places where the absolute values are not yet known An expression evaluator in the linker transforms the relocation expressions into absolute values Finally the object is ready for loading into memory Since an object file is transformed by several processes MUFOM implements an object file as a sequence of commands which steers this transformation process These commands are created executed or copied by one of five processes which act on a MUFOM object file 1 Creation process Creation of the object file by an assembler or compiler The assembler or compiler tells other MUFOM processes what to do by emitting commands generated from assembly source text or a high level language 2 Linkage process Linking of several object modules into one module resolving external references by renaming X variables into variables and by generating new commands assigning of R variables 3 Relocation process Relocation giving all sections an absolute address by assigning their L variable 4 Expression evaluation process Evaluation of loader expressions generated in one of the three previously mentioned MUFOM processes 5 Loader process Loading the absolute memory image TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference The last four processes are in fact command interpreters the assembler writ
28. _ data Direct addressable on chip RAM _ sfr Defines a special function register Special optimizations are performed on this type of variables __bsfr Bit addressable special function register __idata Indirect addressable on chip RAM __bdata Bit addressable on chip RAM __xdata External RAM __pdata One 256 bytes page within external RAM _ rom Data defined with this qualifier is placed in ROM This section is excluded from automatic initialization by the startup code __rom always implies the type qualifier const Table 1 2 Memory Type Qualifiers for the TSK51x TSK52x If you do not specify a memory type qualifier for the TSK51x TSK52x the memory type for the variable depends on the default of the selected TSK51x TSK52x memory model see section 1 4 Memory Models for the TSK51x TSK52x See also the assembler directive SECTION Start or continue section in section 3 8 2 Assembler Directives in Chapter Assembly Language Examples using explicit memory types __ data char c _ rom char text No smoking __xdata int array 10 4 __idata long 1 The memory type qualifiers are treated like any other data type specifier such as unsigned This means the examples above can also be declared as TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference char _ data Cc char _ rom text No smoking int _ xdata array 10 4 long _ idata 1 Pointers with memory type qualifiers Pointers for the TSK51x TSK52x can hav
29. copy_unit dest page vector table vector _size size id_symbol_ prefix run_addr template template_symbol vector_prefix ill no_inline copy vector id 211 loop reserved start_address run_addr symbol map 7 14 Linker Script Language map dest bus space dest_dbits dest offset size sre_dbits src_offset 7 5 1 Defining an Architecture With the keyword architecture you define an architecture and assign a unique name to it The name is used to refer to it at other places in the LSL file architecture name definitions If you are defining multiple core architectures that show great resemblance you can define the common features in a parent core architecture and extend this with a child core architecture that contains specific features The child inherits all features of the parent With the keyword extends you create a child core architecture architecture name_child_arch extends name_parent_arch definitions A core architecture can have any number of parameters These are identifiers which get values assigned on instantiation or extension of the architecture You can use them in any expression within the core architecture Parameters can have default values which are used when the core architecture is instantiated with less arguments than there are parameters defined for it When you extend a core architecture you can pass arguments to the parent architecture Arguments are expressions that set
30. g test c c51 g s test c Not valid is c51 g According to the syntax description you have to specify a filename Icons The following illustrations are used in this manual AN Note notes give you extra information A Warning read the information carefully It prevents you from making serious mistakes or from loosing information Q This illustration indicates actions you can perform with the mouse Such as Altium Designer menu entries and dialogs E Command line type your input on the command line d gt Reference follow this reference to find related topics TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Related Publications C Standards e ISO IEC 9899 1999 E Programming languages C ISO IEC More information on the standards can be found at http www ansi org e DSP C An Extension to ISO IEC 9899 1999 E Programming languages C TASKING TK0071 14 MISRA C e Guidelines for the Use of the C Language in Vehicle Based Software MIRA limited 1998 See also http www misra org uk e MISRA C 2004 Guidelines for the use of the C Language in critical systems MIRA limited 2004 See also http www misra c com TASKING Tools e Using the TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Altium GU0107 e TSK51x MCU Core Reference Altium CRO115 e TSK52x MCU Core Reference Altium CRO116 Summary 1 C Language 1 1 Introduction The TASKING C compiler fully supports the ISO C standard but adds possibilities to
31. islessgreater Returns the value of x lt y x gt y isunordered Returns 1 if its arguments are unordered 0 otherwise Classification macros The next are implemented as macros These macros are type generic and therefor do not have a parallel function in tgmath h All arguments must be expressions of real floating type math h tgmath h Description fpclassify Returns the class of its argument FP_INFINITE FP_NAN FP_NORMAL FP_SUBNORMAL or FP_ZERO isfinite Returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has a finite value isinf Returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has an infinit value isnan Returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has NaN value isnormal Returns a nonzero value if an only if its argument has a normal value signbit Returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument value is negative 2 9 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 2 2 16 setjmp h The set jmp and longjmp in this header file implement a primitive form of nonlocal jumps which may be used to handle exceptional situations This facility is traditionally considered more portable than signal h int setjmp jmp buf env Records its caller s environment in env and returns 0 void longjmp jmp_buf env Restores the environment previously saved with a call to set jmp int status 2 2 17 signal h Signals are possible asynchronous events that may require special processing Each signal is named b
32. preprocessing 7 3 processor definition 7 2 section layout definition 7 2 specifying 4 99 4 135 structure 7 1 List file 4 68 4 69 list nolist 3 29 llabs 2 19 IIdiv 2 19 llrint functions 2 8 llround functions 2 8 Local label override operator 3 48 localeconv 2 6 localtime 2 21 log functions 2 7 log10 functions 2 7 log1p functions 2 7 log2 functions 2 7 logb functions 2 7 longjmp 2 10 Irint functions 2 8 lround functions 2 8 Isb 3 7 Iseek 2 22 LSL expression evaluation 7 13 LSL functions absolute 7 5 addressof 7 5 exists 7 5 max 7 5 min 7 6 sizeof 7 6 LSL keywords align 7 16 7 27 alloc_allowed 7 31 allow_cross_references 7 28 architecture 7 15 7 20 attributes 7 26 7 27 blocksize 7 32 bus 7 15 7 18 7 23 clustered 7 28 contiguous 7 28 copy 7 17 7 27 copy_unit 7 16 copytable 7 16 7 32 core 7 20 derivative 7 20 7 22 dest 7 16 7 18 dest_dbits 7 18 dest_offset 7 18 direction 7 26 7 28 else 7 33 extends 7 15 7 20 fill 7 17 7 28 7 31 fixed 7 16 7 30 group 7 26 7 27 grows 7 16 heap 7 16 7 30 high_to_low 7 16 7 26 id 7 15 7 16 id_symbol_prefix 7 17 if 7 33 load_adadr 7 29 low_to_high 7 16 7 26 map 7 15 7 16 7 18 7 21 mau 7 15 7 16 7 21 7 23 mem 7 29 memory 7 21 7 23 min_size 7 16 7 30 no_inline 7 17 nocopy 7 28 nvram 7 21 ordered 7 28 overflow 7 31 overlay 7 28 page 7 16 7 29 page_size 7 16 7
33. stdarg h FSS implementation Same as sprintf swprintf but extra arguments are given as variable argument list arg See section 2 2 18 stdarg h FSS implementation 2 15 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Character input output stdio h wchar h Description fgetc stream getc stream getchar stdin fgets s n stream gets s n stdin ungetc c stream fputc c stream putc c stream putchar c stdout fputs s stream puts s Direct input output stdio h fgetwc stream getwc stream getwchar stdin fgetws s n stream ungetwc c stream fputwe c stream putwe c stream putwchar c stdout fputws s stream Description Reads one character from stream Returns the read character or EOF WEOF on error FSS implementation Same as fgetc fgetwe except that is implemented as a macro FSS implementation NOTE Currently defined as getchar getwchar because FILE I O is not supported Returns the read character or EOF WEOF on error Reads one character from the stdin stream Returns the character read or EOF WEOF on error Implemented as macro FSS implementation Reads at most the next n 1 characters from the stream into array s until a newline is found Returns s or NULL or EOF WEOF on error FSS implementation Reads at most the next n 1 characters from the stdin stream into array s A newline is ignored Returns s or NULL or EOF
34. strings means the separate occurrence of a string in a C program So array variables initialized with strings are just initialized character arrays which can be allocated in any memory type and are not considered as strings The TSK51x TSK52x compiler places strings in both ROM and RAM Where strings in RAM are placed depends on the specified memory model If you use the TSK51x TSK52x compiler option S romstrings or pragma romstring the compiler places all strings in ROM only This is useful for single chip applications when you want to allocate strings in ROM only Example without S option __rom char hello Hello n initialized array in ROM only char world world n initialized pointer to string in XDATA C Language Example with compiler option S __rom char hello Hello n initialized array in ROM only _ rom char world world n initialized pointer to string in ROM Example with pragma romstring pragma romstring __rom char hello Hello n initialized array in ROM only __ rom char world world n initialized pointer to string in ROM pragma ramstring Strings in library routines Library routines containing pointer arguments always expect the target memory of these pointers to be the default RAM of the memory model used to make this library For example int printf const char format In large memory model this means p
35. uchar u Description By default char is the same as specifying signed char With this option char is the same as unsigned char Related information d 4 50 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler undefine U Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option undefine to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax undefine macro_name Umacro_name Description With this option you can undefine an earlier defined macro as with undef This option is for example useful to undefine predefined macros However the following predefined ISO C standard macros cannot be undefined _ FILE _ current source filename LINE current source line number int type TIME___ hh mm ss _ DATE___ mmmddyyyy __STDC___level of ANSI standard Example To undefine the predefined macro _ TASKING_ c51 undefine _ TASKING test c Related information d C compiler option define Define preprocessor macro 4 51 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler vector offset Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Code Generation 3 Enable the option Generate code for interrupt vector 4 Inthe Reset interrupt vector offset field enter an offset address in th
36. value assignment 6 8 WX command 6 9 Multiple data pointers 4 25 N nan functions 2 8 nearbyint functions 2 8 nextafter functions 2 8 nexttoward functions 2 8 Functions 1 19 intrinsic 1 21 parameter passing 1 19 reentrant 1 19 return types 1 20 novector 1 14 NULL 2 11 2 12 O offset 3 33 offsetof 2 11 open 2 3 Operands 3 2 Optimization 4 36 4 71 4 107 code compaction 4 17 4 24 inlining 4 18 optimize for speed size 4 49 reverse inlining 4 24 optimize endoptimize 1 13 Option file 4 38 4 108 4 141 4 165 Options saving restoring 4 38 4 108 P page 3 34 page nopage 1 13 Parameter passing 1 19 Passing options 4 143 Peripherals 1 4 perror 2 17 Pointers 1 4 pow functions 2 8 Pragmas 1 11 Predefined preprocessor macros 1 15 Preprocessing 4 60 4 139 4 144 7 3 storing output 4 40 printf 2 13 2 15 conversion characters 2 13 printf versions 1 27 Processor definition 7 2 7 22 Processor options processor definition 4 6 4 58 Processor type assembling for 4 58 compiling for 4 6 4 118 selecting 4 6 4 58 4 118 ptrdiff_t 2 11 putc 2 16 putchar 2 16 puts 2 16 putwc 2 16 putwchar 2 16 Q qsort 2 19 R raise 2 10 ramstring 1 13 rand 2 18 RAND_MAX 2 17 read 2 22 realloc 2 6 2 18 Reentrancy 1 6 1 7 1 19 Reentrant functions 4 43 Register bank switching 1 25 Register usage 1 19 1 20 registerbank 3 35 remainder functi
37. 16 defined 3 7 Defining a macro 3 45 Derivative definition 7 1 7 20 dh 3 17 difftime 2 21 Directives 3 1 div 2 19 dl 3 18 ds 3 19 Index 4 dsb 3 19 dsbit 3 19 dsh 3 19 dsl 3 19 dsw 3 19 dw 3 20 dyadic functions 6 4 E end 3 21 EOF 2 12 equ 3 22 erf functions 2 9 erfc functions 2 9 errno 2 3 exit 2 18 EXIT_FAILURE 2 17 EXIT_SUCCES 2 17 exp functions 2 7 exp2 functions 2 7 expm1 functions 2 7 expression evaluator 6 1 Expressions 3 3 absolute 3 3 relative 3 3 relocatable 3 3 extend 1 12 extension isuffix 1 12 extern 1 12 3 23 F fabs functions 2 8 fclose 2 12 fdim functions 2 9 FE_ALL_EXCEPT 2 4 FE_DIVBYZERO 2 4 FE_INEXACT 2 4 FE_INVALID 2 4 FE_OVERFLOW 2 4 FE_UNDERFLOW 2 4 feclearexcept 2 4 fegetenv 2 4 fegetexceptflag 2 4 feholdexept 2 4 feof 2 17 feraiseexcept 2 4 ferror 2 17 fesetenv 2 4 fesetexceptflag 2 4 fetestexcept 2 4 feupdateenv 2 4 fflush 2 12 fgetc 2 16 fgetpos 2 17 fgets 2 16 fgetwc 2 16 fgetws 2 16 FILENAME_MAX 2 12 Index floor functions 2 8 fma functions 2 8 fmax functions 2 9 fmin functions 2 9 fmod functions 2 8 fopen 2 12 FOPEN_MAX 2 12 for endfor 3 24 fpclassify 2 9 fprintf 2 15 fputc 2 16 fputs 2 16 fputwc 2 16 fputws 2 16 fread 2 16 free 2 6 2 18 freopen 2 12 frexp functions 2 7 fscanf 2 15 fseek 2 16 fsetpos 2 17 fstat 2 23 ftell 2
38. 19 7 19 8 jae e ee 2 include statements in a file should only be preceded by other preprocessor directives or comments Non standard characters should not occur in header file names in include directives The include directive shall be followed by either a lt filename gt or filename sequence C macros shall only expand to a braced initializer a constant a parenthesized expression a type qualifier a storage class specifier or a do while zero construct Macros shall not be define d or undef d within a block undef shall not be used A function should be used in preference to a function like macro A function like macro shall not be invoked without all of its arguments TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 19 9 R 19 10 R 19 11 R 19 12 R 19 13 A 19 14 R 19 15 R 19 16 R 19 17 R Standard libraries 20 1 R 20 2 R x 20 3 R 20 4 R 20 5 R 20 6 R 20 7 R 20 8 R 20 9 R 20 10 R 20 11 R 20 12 R Run time failures x 21 1 R Arguments to a function like macro shall not contain tokens that look like preprocessing directives A violation is reported when the first token of an actual macro argument is In the definition of a function like macro each instance of a parameter shall be enclosed in parentheses unless it is used as the operand of or All macro identifiers in preprocessor directives shall be defined before use except in ifdef and ifn
39. 253 0x62 ABCD CHARS DW A B C D Related information db BS DS Block Storage Define Storage DBIT Define Bit DB_ Define Byte DH_ Define Half Word DL Define Long asna 3 20 Assembly Language END Syntax END Description With the END directive you tell the assembler that the end of the module is reached If the assembler finds assembly source lines beyond the END directive it ignores those lines and issues a warning Example section code code source lines END End of assembly module 3 21 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference EQU Syntax symbol EQU expression Description With the EQU directive you assign the value of expression to symbol permanently Once defined you cannot redefine the symbol With the GLOBAL directive you can define the symbol global The expression can either be absolute or relocatable and cannot contain forward references Normally the defined symbol gets the same type as the result of the expression However when the resulting expression has type none the symbol gets no type when the EQU is used outside a section and it gets the type of the section when it is defined inside a section Example MYSYMBOL1 EQU 0x4000 gets no type SECTION code code _ START SECTION data data MYSYMBOL2 EQU 0x4100 gets type data MYSYMBOL3 EQU START gets type of the expression because _START is defined in
40. 3 Operands of an Assembly Instruction In an instruction the mnemonic is followed by zero one or more operands An operand has one of the following types Operand Description symbol A symbolic name as described in section 3 4 Symbol Names Symbols can also occur in expressions register Any valid register as listed in section 3 5 Registers expression Any valid expression as described in section 3 6 Assembly Expressions address A combination of expression register and symbol 3 4 Symbol Names User defined symbols A user defined symbol can consist of letters digits and underscore characters _ The first character cannot be a digit The size of an identifier is only limited by the amount of available memory The case of these characters is significant You can define a symbol by means of a label declaration or an equate or set directive Labels Symbols used for memory locations are referred to as labels Reserved symbols Symbol names and other identifiers beginning with a period are reserved for the system for example for directives or section names Instructions and names of core processor registers are also reserved The case of these built in symbols is insignificant Assembly Language Examples Valid symbol names loop_1 ENTRY a Be _aBC Invalid symbol names 1_loop starts with a number DEFINE reserved directive name RO reserved register name 3 5 Registers Th
41. 31 of the result of the expression The result of the expression is calculated as a long 32 bits STRCAT siring1 string2 Concatenates string1 and string2 and returns them as a single string You must enclose siring1 and string2 either with single quotes or with double quotes Example DEFINE ID STRCAT TAS KING ID TASKING STRCMP string 1 string2 Compares string1 with string2 by comparing the characters in the string The function returns the difference between the characters at the first position where they disagree or zero when the strings are equal lt 0 if string lt string2 0 if string string2 gt 0 if string gt string2 Example IF STRCMP STR MAIN does STR equal MAIN 3 7 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference STRLEWN string Returns the length of string as an integer Example SLEN SET STRLEN string SLEN 6 STRPOS string1 string2 start Returns the position of string2 in string1 as an integer If string2 does not occur in string7 the last string postition 1 is returned With start you can specify the starting position of the search If you do not specify start the search is started from the beginning of string7 Example ID set STRPOS TASKING ASK ID ID set STRPOS TASKING BUG ID 7 3 8 Assembler Directives An assembler directive is simply a message to the assembler Assembler dire
42. 4 81 4 4 Control Program OptionS 00 netted 4 115 4 5 Make Utility Options i ccsc o00 cae area dons sie nada cas u tae atesaae EREE RE a Sas 4 151 4 6 Librarian Options 32epecaen sesh ede eae a kd Pi deste et eet awe oo ie eee 4 177 List File Formats 5 1 5 1 Assembler List File Format 2 220223 asc eq dane ce see EPESA pap deed ee eee ees 5 1 5 2 Linker Map File Format lt 2 c c3c0ecadschogae wand ode dd dade Oe Ghee been Me dead 5 3 Object File Formats 6 1 6 1 IEEE 695 Format ict pice reg cteaa ead oay ea ian w age E E E eae ae epe ede Sas 6 1 6 1 1 Command Language Concept 0 cece eee ees 6 1 6 1 2 Notational Conventions cece eae cb ia eit ead in See bod death ned peas eee eee eae 6 2 6 1 3 EXPreSSIONS saci ok nce Ved cee tit ae cna ee eke whe ts enn Fee date 6 2 6 1 3 1 Functions without Operands 0 tte eee eens 6 3 6 1 3 2 MOmadic FUNCTIONS a gisele cect centimeter ot ar waarmee Wem aati eae Pwd ena 6 3 6 1 3 3 Dyadic Functions and Operators 0 eees 6 4 6 1 3 4 MUFOM Variables 0 0 0 aaaea 6 4 6 1 3 5 INS and EXT Operator 0c t teen EEE Ea 6 4 6 1 3 6 Conditional Expressions ecseri dersek cii piar teen nee Dan ERs 6 4 Table of Contents 6 1 4 MUFOM Commands seieren ir dg cos eens fake ode eed ees need pad bod ged He E Ra cae 6 5 6 1 4 1 Module Level Commands 00 00 c eect need teenies 6 5 6 1 4 2 Comment and Checksum Command cece eee eet en
43. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 JE III ISI IIIS IOS IOC I ICI IIA I TCI TOT TO I ITA I TCC TC ICG Module Local Symbols Part Seb b rd bn bombo dE ron ESSERE OSS EIOC EOS III TI IKI Scope hello obj __999001__1 0x00000008 system sw data lini 0x00000000 system sw xdata 2 ini 0x00000010 2 0x00000522 system sw code 4o FESS IEE ISG KAK KAAK KAAK KAAKAA kkk kkk kkk Cross Reference Part A kki rn rr k A A k k A A R A A III I IR IR RIK RIE RIK REE naana nn nn nnn nnn nnn nat Definition file Definition section Symbol Referenced in cstart obj _start _start hello obj hello obj code _main cstart obj Fr nt Undefined symbols 5 3 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference JE III III IOSD TOE I IOI I I IIR I IORI I IIR FI IIE III Cay Graph Part _ start main printloop printf printf printf l _doprint _emitchar putstring _ putnumber _emitchar putstring strlen _ltoa _ doflt FEI ICI IOI ICI ITI TIT TR TTI RTI IT TI SATIS IIS IIIA AISA IASI IIIA Overlay Part Overlay stack_xdata size 0x000000a1 Paths in File in Section in Size out Offset
44. Align location counter BS BSBIT BSB Define block storage initialized BSW BSL DBIT Define bit DB Define byte DH Define half word DW Define word DL Define long word DS DSBIT DSB Define storage DSW DSL OFFSET Move location counter forwards Overview of macro and conditional assembly directives Directive Description DEFINE Define substitution string BREAK Break out of current macro expansion REPEAT ENDREP FOR ENDFOR IF ELIF ELSE ENDIF MACRO ENDM UNDEF Repeat sequence of source lines Repeat sequence of source lines n times Conditional assembly directive End of conditional assembly directive Define macro Undefine DEFINE symbol or macro Overview of listing control assembly directives Directive Description LIST NOLIST PAGE TITLE Print do not print source lines to list file Set top of page size of page Set program title in header of assembly list file 3 9 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Overview of HLL directives Directive Description CALLS Pass call tree information SYMB Generate symbolic debug information TSK51x TSK52x specific directive Directive Description REGISTERBANK Use register bank 3 8 2 Detailed Description of Assembler Directives ALIGN Syntax ALIGN expression Description With the ALIGN directive you tell the assembler
45. Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options section type name f m fm endsection Rename sections of the specified type or restore default section naming See section 1 12 Section Naming See C compiler option rename sections in section 4 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options See assembler directive SECTION Start or continue section in section 3 8 2 Assembler Directives in Chapter Assembly Language source nosource With these pragmas you can choose which C source lines must be listed as comments in assembly output Gb See also C compiler option source s linear_switch jump_switch binary_switch smart_switch With these pragmas you can overrule the compiler chosen switch method linear_switch Force jump chain code A jump chain is comparable with an if else if else if else construction jump switch Force jump table code A jump table is a table filled with jump instructions for each possible switch value The switch argument is used as an index to jump within this table binary switch Force binary lookup table code A binary search table is a table filled with a value to compare the switch argument with and a target address to jump to smart_switch Let the compiler decide the switch method used Gls See Section 1 10 Switch Statement tradeoff level Specify tradeoff between speed 0 and size 4 d See also C compiler option tradeoff t vector_offset offset Specify base
46. Description With the MESSAGE directive you tell the assembler to print a message to stdout during the assembling process With type you can specify the following types of messages I Information message Error and warning counts are not affected and the assembler continues the assembling process W Warning message Increments the warning count and the assembler continues the assembling process E Error message Increments the error count and the assembler continues the assembling process F Fatal error message The assembler immediately aborts the assembling process and generates no object file or list file The MESSAGE directive is for example useful in combination with conditional assembly to indicate which part is assembled Example MESSAGE I Generating tables ID EQU 4 MESSAGE E The value of ID is ID DEFINE LONG SHORT MESSAGE I This is a LONG string MESSAGE I This is a LONG string Within single quotes the defined symbol LONG is not expanded Within double quotes the symbol LONG is expanded so the actual message is printed as This is a LONG string This is a SHORT string 3 32 Assembly Language OFFSET Syntax OFFSET expression Description With the OFFSET directive you tell the assembler to give the location counter a new offset relative to the start of the section When the assembler encounters the OFFSET directive it moves the location counter forwards to the specified
47. If you choose IHEX or SREC you can additionally specify the address size of the chosen format option address size Example To generate an Motorola S record output file cc51 format SREC testl c test2 c output test sre Related information db Control program option address size Set address size for linker IHEX SREC files Linker option output Specify an output object file Linker option chip output Generate hex file for each chip 4 125 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Control Program fp trap Command line syntax fp trap Description By default the control program uses the non trapping floating point library p511s 1ib for the large model With this option you tell the control program to use the trapping floating point library fp511st 1ib If you use the trapping floating point library exceptional floating point cases are intercepted and can be handled separately by an application defined exception handler Using this library decreases the execution speed of your application Related information db 4 126 Tool Options Control Program Control Program help Command line syntax help options Description Displays an overview of all command line options When you specify the argument options you can list detailed option descriptions Example The following invocations all display a list of the available command line options cc51 cc51 help cc51 To
48. Linker options e Control program options e Make utility options e Librarian options Chapter 5 List File Formats Contains a description of the following list file formats e Assembler List File Format e Linker Map File Format Chapter 6 Object File Formats Contains a description of the following object file formats e IEEE 695 Object Format e Motorola S Record Format e Intel Hex Record Format Chapter 7 Linker Script Language Contains a description of the linker script language LSL Chapter 8 MISRA C Rules Contains a description the supported and unsupported MISRA C code checking rules viii Manual Purpose and Structure Conventions Used in this Manual Notation for syntax The following notation is used to describe the syntax of command line input bold Type this part of the syntax literally italics Substitute the italic word by an instance For example filename Type the name of a file in place of the word filename Encloses a list from which you must choose an item Encloses items that are optional For example c51 Both c51 and c51 are valid commands Separates items in a list Read it as OR You can repeat the preceding item zero or more times Example c51 option filename You can read this line as follows enter the command c51 with or without an option follow this by zero or more options and specify a filename The following input lines are all valid c51 test c c51
49. Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Enable the option Dump processor and memory info from LSL file Command line syntax Isl dump file Description With this option you tell the linker to dump the LSL part of the map file in a separate file independent of the option map file generate map file If you do not specify a filename the file Lktarget 1df is used Related information db Linker option map file format Map file formatting 4 98 Tool Options Linker Linker IsI file d Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Enable the option Use project specific LSL file 4 Inthe LSL file field type a name or click and select an LSL file Command line syntax lIsl file file diile Description A linker script file contains vital information about the core for the locating phase of the linker A linker script file is coded in LSL and contains the following types of information e the architecture definition describes the core s hardware architecture e the memory definition describes the physical memory available in the system e the section layout definition describes how to locate sections in memory With this option you specify a linker script file to the linker If you do not specify
50. Push register 2 of bank 3 REGISTERBANK 1 PUSH AR2 Push register 2 of bank 1 3 35 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference REPEAT ENDREP Syntax label REPEAT expression ENDREP Description With the REPEAT ENDREP directive you can repeat a sequence of assembly source lines With expression you specify the number of times the loop is repeated If you specify label it gets the value of the location counter at the start of the directive processing Example In this example the loop is repeated 3 times Effectively the preprocessor repeats the source lines DB 10 three times then the assembler assembles the result REPEAT 3 DB 10 assembly source lines ENDREP Related information Gs FOR ENDFOR Repeat sequence of source lines n times 3 36 Assembly Language RESUME Syntax RESUME name type attribute Description With the SECTION directive you always start a new section With the RESUME directive you can reactivate a previously defined section See the SECTION directive for a list of available section types and attributes If you omit the type and attribute the previously defined section with the same name is reactivated ignoring the type and attribute s If you specify a type and attribute you reactivate the section with that same type and attribute You cannot resume sections that have the group or overlay attribute In this case the assembler issues a warning
51. a sequential group In a sequential group the linker places sections in the same order in the address space as they appear in the group and it occupies a contiguous range of memory e The clustered keyword tells the linker to locate the sections in the group in a number of contiguous blocks It tries to keep the number of these blocks to a minimum If enough memory is available the group will be located as if it was specified as contiguous Otherwise it gets split into two or more blocks If a contiguous or clustered group contains alignment gaps the linker can locate sections that are not part of the group in these gaps To prevent this you can use the 111 keyword If the group is located in RAM the gaps are treated as reserved scratch space If the group is located in ROM the alignment gaps are filled with zeros by default You can however change the fill pattern by specifying a bit pattern The result of the expression or list of expressions is used as values to write to memory each in MAU e The overlay keyword tells the linker to overlay the sections in the group The linker places all sections in the address space using a contiguous range of addresses Thus an overlay group is automatically also a contiguous group To overlay the sections all sections in the overlay group share the same run time address For each input section within the overlay the linker automatically defines two symbols The symbol __1le_cb_section_name is defi
52. a string of non white space characters The argument should point to an array of characters large enough to hold the string and a terminating NULL character f float e E float g G float a A float n int the number of characters written so far is written into the argument No scanning is done p pointer hexadecimal 24 bit value which must be entered without Ox prefix la Matches a string of input characters from the set between the brackets A NULL character is added to termi nate the string Specifying includes the character in the set of scanning characters El Matches a string of input characters not in the set between the brackets A NULL character is added to termi nate the string Specifying includes the character in the set Literal no assignment is done Table 2 3 Scanf conversion characters 2 14 Libraries stdio h wchar h Description fscanf stream fwscanf stream Performs a formatted read from the given stream Returns the number of format format items converted succesfully FSS implementation scanf format wscanf format Performs a formatted read from the stdin stream Returns the number sscanf s format vfscanf stream format arg vscanf format arg vsscanf s format arg fprintf stream format printf format sprintf s format snprintf s n format vfprintf stream format arg vprintf format
53. all characters result in a constant value of the specified size Null strings have a value of 0 Square brackets delimit a substring operation in the form string offset length offset is the start position within string length is the length of the desired substring Both values may not exceed the size of string Examples ABCD 0x41424344 POT ge to enclose a quote double it A BC or to enclose a quote escape it AB 1 0x4143 string used in expression Et null string TASKING 0 4 results in the substring TASK 3 6 3 Expression Operators The next table shows the assembler operators They are ordered according to their precedence Operators of the same precedence are evaluated left to right Parenthetical expressions have the highest priority innermost first Valid operands include numeric constants literal ASCII strings and symbols Type Oper Name Description ator parenthesis Expressions enclosed by parenthesis are evaluated first Unary plus Returns the value of its operand minus Returns the negative of its operand complement Returns complement integer only logical negate peru if the operands value is 0 otherwise 0 For example if buf is O then buf is 1 3 4 Assembly Language Type Oper Name Description ator Arithmetic multiplication Yields the product of two operands division Yields the
54. all warnings are reported e If you specify this option but without numbers all warnings are suppressed e If you specify this option with a number only the specified C compiler warning is suppressed You can specify the option no warnings number multiple times Related information ie 4 140 Tool Options Control Program Control Program option file f Command line syntax option file file f file Description Instead of typing all options on the command line you can create an option file which contains all options and flags you want to specify With this option you specify the option file to the control program Use an option file when the command line would exceed the limits of the operating system or just to store options and save typing You can specify the option option file multiple times Format of an option file e Multiple arguments on one line in the option file are allowed e To include whitespace in an argument surround the argument with single or double quotes e If you want to use single quotes as part of the argument surround the argument by double quotes and vise versa This has a single quote embedded This has a double quote embedded This has a double quote and a single quote embedded e When atext line reaches its length limit use a to continue the line Whitespace between quotes is preserved This is a continuation line gt This is a co
55. allowed but object files may not support all characters for symbol names You can use two different assignment operators With the simple assignment operator the symbol is created unconditionally With the operator the symbol is only created if it already exists as an undefined reference in an object file The expression that represents the value to assign to the symbol may contain references to other symbols If such a referred symbol is a special section symbol creation of the symbol in the left hand side of the assignment will cause creation of the special section section_layout le bs 1c _ub stack when the symbol _ lc_bs occurs as an undefined reference in an object file the linker allocates space for the stack 7 32 Linker Script Language 7 9 5 Conditional Group Statements Within a group you can conditionally select sections or create special sections e With the if keyword you can specify a condition The succeeding section statement is executed if the condition evaluates to TRUE 1 e The optional else keyword is followed by a section statement which is executed in case the if condition evaluates to FALSE 0 group if exists mysection select mysection else reserved myreserved size 2k 7 33 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 7 34 8 MISRA C Rules Summ ary chapter contains an overview of the supported and unsupporte
56. are declared Some functions are not completely implemented because their implementation depends on the context where your application will run These functions are for example all I O related functions Where possible these functions are implemented using file system simulation FSS This system can be used by the debugger to simulate an I O environment which enables you to debug your application A number of wide character functions are available as C source code but have not been compiled with the C library To use complete wide character functionality you must recompile the libraries with the macro WCHAR_SUPPORT_ENABLED and keep this macro also defined when compiling your own sources See C compiler option define D in section 4 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter 4 Tool options 2 2 1 assert h assert expr Prints a diagnostic message if NDEBUG is not defined Implemented as macro 2 2 2 complex h The TSK51x TSK52x does not support complex numbers 2 2 3 ctype h and wctype h The header file ctype h declares the following functions which take a character c as an integer type argument The header file wcetype h declares parallel wide character functions which take a character c of the wchar_t type as argument ctype h wctype h Description isalnum iswalnum Returns a non zero value when c is an alphabetic character or a number A Z a z 0 9 isalpha iswalpha Returns a non zero value when c is an alphabetic character A
57. are mapped on the data lines of the destination bus starting with line 0 Linker Script Language From space to space If you map an address space to another address space nesting you can do this by mapping the subspace to the containing larger space In this example a small space of 64k is mapped on a large space of 16M space small id 2 mau 4 map src_offset 0 dest_offset 0 dest space large size 64k From space to bus All spaces that are not mapped to another space must map to a bus in the architecture space large id 1 mau 4 map src_offset 0 dest_offset 0 dest bus bus_name size 16M From bus to bus The next example maps an external bus called e_bus to an internal bus called i_bus This internal bus resides on a core called mycore The source bus has 16 data lines whereas the destination bus has only 8 data lines Therefore the keywords src_dbits and dest_dbits specify which source data lines are mapped on which destination data lines architecture mycore bus i_bus mau 4 space i_space map dest bus i bus size 256 bus e_bus mau 16 width 16 map dest bus mycore i_ bus srce_dbits 0 7 dest_dbits 0 7 It is not possible to map an internal bus to an external bus 7 19 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 7 6 Semantics of the Derivative Definition Keywords in the derivative definition derivative exten
58. are possible e space gt space e space gt bus e bus gt bus e memory gt bus With a mapping you specify a range of source addresses you want to map specified by a source offset and a size the destination to which you want to map them a bus or another address space and the offset address in the destination e The dest argument specifies the destination This can be a bus or another address space only for a space to space mapping This argument is required e The src_offset argument specifies the offset of the source addresses In combination with size this specifies the range of address that are mapped By default the source offset is Ox0000 e The size argument specifies the number of addresses that are mapped This argument is required e The dest_offset argument specifies the position in the destination to which the specified range of addresses is mapped By default the destination offset is Ox0000 If you are mapping a bus to another bus the number of data lines of each bus may differ In this case you have to specify a range of source data lines you want to map sre_dbits begin end and the range of destination data lines you want to map them to dest_dbits first last e The srce_dbits argument specifies a range of data lines of the source bus By default all data lines are mapped e The dest_dbits argument specifies a range of data lines of the destination bus By default all data lines from the source bus
59. argument is the symbol reference in the template section that must be replaced by the address of the handler function This symbol name should start with the linker prefix for the symbol to be ignored in the link phase This argument is required The vector_prefix argument defines the names of vector sections the section for a vector with id vector_id is vector_prefix vector_id Vectors defined in C or assembly source files that should be included in the vector table must have the correct symbol name The compiler uses the prefix that is defined in the default LSL file s if this attribute is changed the vectors declared in C source files are not included in the vector table When a vector supplied in an object file has exactly one relocation the linker will assume it is a branch to a handler function and can be removed when the handler is inlined in the vector table Otherwise no inlining is done This argument is required With the optional no_inline argument the vectors handlers are not inlined in the vector table With the optional copy argument a ROM copy of the vector table is made and the vector table is copied to RAM at startup With the optional id_symbol_prefix argument you can set an internal string representing a symbol name prefix that may be found on symbols in vector handler code When the linker detects such a symbol in a handler the symbol is assigned the vector number If the symbol was already assigned a vector number a warn
60. argument options you can list detailed option descriptions Example The following invocations all display a list of the available command line options 1k51 1k51 help 1k51 To see a detailed description of the available options enter 1k51 help options 4 90 Tool Options Linker Linker include directory l Menu entry Command line syntax include directory path Ipath Description With this option you can specify the path where your LSL include files are located A relative path will be relative to the current directory The order in which the linker searches for LSL include files is 1 The pathname in the LSL file and the directory where the LSL file is located only for include files that are enclosed in 2 The path that is specified with this option 3 The default directory PRODDIR include 1sl Example Suppose that your linker script file my1s1 1s1 contains the following line include myinc inc You can call the linker as follows 1k51 include directory c proj include lsl file mylsl 1sl test obj First the linker looks in the directory where myls1 1s1 is located for the file myinc inc If it does not find the file it looks in the directory c proj include for the file myinc inc this option Finally it looks in the directory PRODDIR include 1sl Related information ie 4 91 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Linker incremental r
61. atanh atanhf atanhl atanh Returns the arc hyperbolic tangent of x Exponential and logarithmic functions All of these functions are new in ISO C99 except for exp log and 1og10 math h tgmath h Description exp expf expl exp Returns the result of the exponential function eX exp2 exp2f exp2l1 exp2 Returns the result of the exponential function 2 Not implemented expml expmlf expmll expml Returns the result of the exponential function ex 1 Not implemented log logf logl log Returns the natural logarithm 1n x x gt 0 log10 1logl0f 1log101 10g10 Returns the base 10 logarithm of x x gt 0 loglp loglpf loglpl loglp Returns the base e logarithm of 1 x x lt gt 1 Not implemented log2 log2 1log21 log2 Returns the base 2 logarithm of x x gt 0 Not implemented ilogb ilogbf ilogbl ilogb Returns the signed exponent of x as an integer x gt 0 Not implemented logb logbf logbl logb Returns the exponent of x as a signed integer in value in floating point notation x gt 0 Not implemented frexp Idexp modf scalbn scalbIn math h tgmath h Description frexp frexpl frexpf frexp Splits a float x into fraction f and exponent n so that f 0 0 or 0 5 lt f lt 1 0 and 2 x Returns f stores n ldexp ldexpl ldexpf ldexp Inverse of frexp Returns the result of x 2 x and n are both arguments modf modf1 modff Splits a float x into fraction f and integer n so that f lt 1 0 and f n x Returns f sto
62. attributes r w Keep in mind that all section selections are restricted to the address space of the section layout in which this group definition occurs e With the ref_tree field you can select a group of related sections The relation between sections is often expressed by means of references By selecting just the root of tree the complete tree is selected This is for example useful to locate a group of related sections in special memory e g fast memory The referenced sections must meet the following conditions in order to be selected 1 The sections are within the section layout s address space 2 The sections match the specified attributes 3 The sections have no absolute restriction as is the case for all wildcard selections For example to select the code sections referenced from fool group refgrp ordered contiguous run_addr mem ext_c select ref_tree fool attributes x If section foo1 references foo2 and foo2 references foo3 then all these sections are selected by the selection shown above Locating a group group group _name group_specifications section_statements With the group_specifications you actually define how the linker must locate the group You can roughly define three things 1 assign properties to the group like alignment and read write attributes 2 define the mutual order in the address space for sections in the group and 3 restrict the possible ad
63. build library files and it offers the possibility to replace extract and remove modules from an existing library You can only call the librarian from the command line The invocation syntax is tlb key_option sub_option library object_file This section describes all options for the make utility Suboptions can only be used in combination with certain key options Keyoptions and their suboptions are therefor described together The miscellaneous options can always be used and are also described separately The librarian is a command line tool so there are no equivalent options in Altium Designer Description Option Suboption Main functions key options Replace or add an object module r a b c u v Extract an object module from the library X 0 V Delete object module from library d V Move object module to another position m a b v Print a table of contents of the library t s0 s1 Print object module to standard output p Suboptions Append or move new modules after existing module name a name Append or move new modules before existing module name b name Create library without notification if library does not exist c Preserve last modified date from the library 0 Print symbols in library modules s 0 1 Replace only newer modules u Verbose vV Miscellaneous Display options Display version header V Read options from file f file Suppress warnings above level n wn
64. bytes S3 records default The name of the output file will be filename with the extension hex or sre and contains the code and data allocated in the default address space If they exist any other address spaces are also emitted whereas their output files are named filename_spacename hex sre AN Use option chip output c to create Intel Hex or Motorola S record output files for each chip defined in the LSL file suitable for loading into a PROM programmer Example To create the output file my file hex of the default address space 1k51 test obj output myfile hex IHEX If they exist any other address spaces are emitted as well and are named myfile_spacename hex Related information dE Linker option chip output Generate an output file for each chip 4 109 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Linker strip debug S Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Disable the option Include symbolic debug information Command line syntax strip debug S Description With this option you specify not to include symbolic debug information in the resulting output file Related information de 4 110 Tool Options Linker Linker user provided initialization code i Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appe
65. can call the make utility from within another directory The path is the path to the directory where your makefile and other files are stored and can be absolute or relative to your current directory Example Suppose your makefile and other files are stored in the directory myfiles You can call the make utility for example as follows tmk G myfiles Related information J 4 161 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility i Command line syntax i Description When an error occurs during the make process the make utility exits with a certain exit code With the option i the make utility exits without an error code even when errors occurred Example tmk i The make utility exits without an error code even when an error occurs Related information J 4 162 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility K Command line syntax K Description With this option the make utility keeps temporary files it creates during the make process The make utility stores temporary files in the directory that you have specified with the environment variable TMPDIR or in the default temp directory of your system when the TMPDIR environment variable is not specified Example tmk K The make utility preserves all temporary files Related information J 4 163 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility k Command line syntax k Description When during the make pro
66. can use functions as terms in any expression Syntax of an assembly function function_name argument argumeni Functions start with character and have zero or more arguments and are always followed by opening and closing parentheses White space a blank or tab is not allowed between the function name and the opening parenthesis and between the comma separated arguments 3 7 1 Overview of Built in Assembly Functions The following table provides an overview of all built in assembly functions Next all functions are described into more detail expr can be any assembly expression resulting in an integer value Expressions are explained in section 3 6 Assembly Expressions Overview of assembly functions Function Description CNT CAST type expr ARG symbol expr Test whether macro argument is present Cast result of expr to type Return number of macro arguments 3 5 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Function Description cPU string Test if current CPU matches string DEFINED symbol symbol1 Test whether symbol exists LSB expr Least significant byte of the expression LSwW expr Least significant word of the expression MSB expr Most significant byte of the expression mMsw expr Most significant word of the expression STRCAT str1 str2 Concatenate str and str2 STRCMP strl1 str2 Compare str1 with str2 STRLEN Str Return length of s
67. compiler option optimize inline the C compiler automatically inlines small functions in order to reduce execution time smart inlining The compiler inserts the function body at the place the function is called The C compiler decides which functions will be inlined You can overrule this behavior with the two keywords inline ISO C and __noinline With the inline keyword you force the compiler to inline the specified function regardless of the optimization strategy of the compiler itself inline unsigned int abs int val unsigned int abs_val val if val lt 0 abs_val val return abs_val If a function with the keyword inline is not called at all the compiler does not generate code for it You must define inline functions in the same source module as in which you call the function because the compiler only inlines a function in the module that contains the function definition When you need to call the inline function from several source modules you must include the definition of the inline function in each module for example using a header file 1 20 C Language With the noinline keyword you prevent a function from being inlined __noinline unsigned int abs int val unsigned int abs _val val if val lt 0 abs_val val return abs _ val Using pragmas inline noinline smartinline Instead of the inline qualifier you can also use pragma inline and pragma noinline to inline a functio
68. date and time on standard output Example tmk time The make utility displays the current date and time and updates out of date files Related information i 4 173 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility V Command line syntax V Description Display version information The make utility ignores all other options or input files Example tmk V The make utility displays the version information but does not perform any tasks Related information i 4 174 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility W Command line syntax W target Description With this option the make utility considers the specified target file always as up to date and will not rebuild it Example tmk W test abs The make utility rebuilds out of date targets in the makefile except the file test abs which is considered now as up to date Related information i 4 175 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility x Command line syntax X Description With this option the make utility shows extended error messages Extended error messages give more detailed information about the exit status of the make utility after errors Altium Designer uses this option for the graphical version of make Example tmk x If errors occur the make utility gives extended information Related information i 4 176 Tool Options Librarian 4 6 Librarian Options The librarian tlb is a tool to
69. e Replacing objects in the library with the same object of a newer date e Creating a new library The option r normally adds a new module to the library However if the library already contains a module with the specified name the existing module is replaced If you specify a library that does not exist the librarian creates a new library with the specified name If you add a module to the library without specifying the suboption a or b the specified module is added at the end of the archive Use the suboptions a or b to insert them to a specified place instead aposname Add the specified object module s after the existing module posname b posname Add the specified object module s before the existing module posname C Create a new library without checking whether it already exists If the library already exists it is overwritten u Insert the specified object module only if it is newer than the module in the library V Verbose the librarian shows which files are removed AN The suboptions a or b have no effect when an object is added to the library Examples Suppose the library mylib 1ib contains the following objects see option t obj1 obj To add obj2 obj to the end of mylib 1lib tlb r mylib lib obj2 obj To insert obj3 obj just before obj2 obj tlb r b obj2 obj mylib lib obj3 o0bj The library mylib 1ib after these two invocations now looks like obj1 obj obj3 0bj obj2 obj Creating a new library To create a ne
70. faster than accessing data in external RAM In the large memory model the produced code is larger and in some cases slower than the code for a similar operation in one of the other memory models The auxiliary page memory model is especially interesting for derivatives with 256 bytes of external RAM on chip All data must fit in one 256 bytes page Related information db Optionally you can choose to enable reentrancy with C compiler option reentrant Section 1 4 Memory Models in chapter C Language 4 29 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler noclear Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option noclear to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax noclear Description Normally variables are cleared at program startup With this option you tell the compiler to generate code to prevent non initialized global variables from being cleared at program startup Related information d gt 4 30 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler noframe Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Code Generation 3 Disable the option Generate frame for interrupt handler Command line syntax noframe Description With this option you can speci
71. filename lt filename gt Description With the INCLUDE directive you include another file at the exact location where the INCLUDE occurs This happens before the resulting file is assembled The INCLUDE directive works similarly to the include statement in C The source from the include file is assembled as if it followed the point of the INCLUDE directive When the end of the included file is reached assembly of the original file continues The string specifies the filename of the file to be included The filename must be compatible with the operating system forward backward slashes and can contain a directory specification If you omit a filename extension the assembler assumes the extension asm If an absolute pathname is specified the assembler searches for that file If a relative path is specified or just a filename the order in which the assembler searches for include files is 1 The current directory if you use the filename construction The current directory is not searched if you use the lt filename gt syntax 2 The path that is specified with the assembler option include directory l 3 The path that is specified in the environment variable AStargetINC when the product was installed 4 The default directory ctarget include Example Suppose that your assembly source file test src contains the following line INCLUDE c myincludes myinc inc The assembler issues an error if it cannot find th
72. follow the same rules as symbol names the name can consist of letters digits and underscore characters _ The first character cannot be a digit Argument names cannot start with a percent sign Macro definitions can be nested but the nested macro will not be defined until the primary macro is expanded You can use the following operators in macro definition statements Operator Name Description Macro argument Concatenates a macro argument with adjacent alphanumeric characters concatenation Return decimal Substitutes the symbol sequence with a character string that represents the decimal value value of symbol of the symbol Return hex Substitutes the symbo sequence with a character string that represents the hexadecimal value of symbol value of the symbol Macro string Allows the use of macro arguments as literal strings delimiter i Macro local label Prevents name mangling on labels in macros override Example The macro definition macro_a MACRO argl arg2 header db argl body dw argl arg2 ENDM terminator The macro call section macro_data data init macro_a 2 3 The macro expands as follows db 2 dw 2 3 3 30 Assembly Language Related information d DEFINE Define a substitution string Section 3 9 Macro Operations 3 31 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference MESSAGE Syntax MESSAGE type str exp symbo strlexp symbo
73. for demo application ELSE ssi instructions for the real application ENDIF You can now use a macro definition to set the DEMO flag Macro Value DEMO 1 or empty as51 define DEMO test src as51 define DEMO 1 test src Note that both invocations have the same effect Related information als Assembler option option file Read options from file 4 60 Tool Options Assembler Assembler diag Menu entry 1 From the View menu select Workspace Panels System Messages The Messages panel appears 2 In the Messages panel right click on the message you want more information on A popup menu appears 3 Select More Info A Message Info box appears with additional information Command line syntax diag format all nr Description With this option you can ask for an extended description of error messages in the format you choose The output is directed to stdout normally your screen and in the format you specify You can specify the following formats html rtf or text default To create a file with the descriptions you must redirect the output With the suboption all the descriptions of all error messages are given If you want the description of one or more selected error messages you can specify the error message numbers separated by commas With this option the assembler does not assemble any files Example To display an explanation of message number 241 enter as51 diag 24
74. function name e Alternative syntax for variadic macros e Alternative syntax for designated initializers e Allow zero sized arrays e Allow empty struct union e Allow empty initializer list e Allow initialization of static objects by compound literals e The middle operand of a operator may be omitted e Allow a compound statement inside braces as expression e Allow arithmetic on void pointers and function pointers e Allow a range of values after a single case label e Additional preprocessor directive warning e Allow comma operator conditional operator and cast as lvalue e An inline function without static or extern will be global e An extern inline function will not be compiled on its own e An attribute directly following a struct union definition relates to that tag instead of to the objects in the declaration For an exact description of these gcc extensions please refer to the gcc info pages info gcc 4 22 Tool Options C Compiler Example c51 AGPx c90 test c c51 language gcc comments strings iso 90 test c Gls C compiler option iso ISO C standard 4 23 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler max call depth Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option max call depth to the Additional C compiler options field Command lin
75. implementation Libraries lstat name buff This function is identical to stat except in the case of a symbolic link where the link itself is stat ed not the file that it refers to Not implemented fstat fd buff This function is identical to stat except that it uses a file descriptor instead of a name Not implemented unlink name Removes the named file so that a subsequent attempt to open it fails Calls unlink FSS implementation write fd buff cnt Write a sequence of characters to a file Calls write FSS implementation 2 2 27 Wwchar h Many in wchar h represent the wide character variant of other so these are discussed together See sections 2 2 22 sidio h and wehar h 2 2 23 stdlib h and wchar h 2 2 24 string h and wehar h and 2 2 25 time h and wchar h The remaining are described below They perform conversions between multi byte characters and wide characters In these ps points to struct mbstate_t which holds the conversion state information necessary to convert between sequences of multibyte characters and wide characters typedef struct wchar_t we_value wide character value solved so far unsigned short n_bytes number of bytes of solved multibyte unsigned short encoding encoding rule for wide character lt gt mbstate_t multibyte conversion When multibyte characters larger than 1 byte are used this struct will be used to store the conve
76. is two bytes long This field is only used for Data Records In other records this field is coded as four ASCII zero characters 0000 type is the record type This value occupies one byte two hexadecimal digits The record types are Byte Type Record type 00 Data 01 End of File 02 Extended segment address not used 03 Start segment address not used 04 Extended linear address 32 bit 05 Start linear address 32 bit content is the information contained in the record This depends on the record type checksum is the record checksum The linker computes the checksum by first adding the binary representation of the previous bytes from length to content The linker then computes the result of sum modulo 256 and subtracts the remainder from 256 two s complement Therefore the sum of all bytes following the header is zero Extended Linear Address Record The Extended Linear Address Record specifies the two most significant bytes bits 16 31 of the absolute address of the first data byte in a subsequent Data Record 02 0000 upper_address checksum Object File Formats The 32 bit absolute address of a byte in a Data Record is calculated as address offset index modulo 4G where address is the base address where the two most significant bytes are the upper_address and the two least significant bytes are zero offset is the 16 bit offset from the Data Record index is the index of the data byte within the Data Reco
77. it initializes its program counter to a certain start address sometimes called the reset vector In the architecture definition you must specify this start address in the correct address space in combination with the name of the label in the application code which must be located here The run_addr argument specifies the start address reset vector If the core starts executing using an entry from a vector table and directly jumps to the start label you should omit this argument The symbol argument specifies the name of the label in the application code that should be located at the specified start address The symbol argument is required The linker will resolve the start symbol and use its value after locating for the start address field in IEEE 695 files and Intel Hex files If you also specified the run_addr argument the start symbol label must point to a section The linker locates this section such that the start symbol ends up on the start address space space_name id 1 mau 8 align 8 page_size 1 stack name min_size 1k grows low_to_high reserved start _address end_address start_address run_addr 0x0000 symbol start_label map map_description 7 5 4 Mappings You can use a mapping when you define a space bus or memory With the map field you specify how addresses from the source Space bus or memory are translated to addresses of a destination Space bus The following mappings
78. manually add CALLS directives make sure they connect to the compiler generated CALLS directives the name of the caller must also be named as a callee in another directive The linker uses the CALLS information to build a call graph The call graph then is used to create a static stack overlay Example SECTION func data overlay stack_data SECTION main data overlay stack_data CALLS main nfunc Indicates that the function main calls the function _nfunc 3 13 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference DB Syntax label DB argument argument Description With the DB directive Define Byte the assembler allocates and initializes one byte of memory for each argument An argument can be e asingle or multiple character string constant e an integer expression e NULL indicated by two adjacent commas If you specify label it gets the value of the location counter at the start of the directive processing Multiple arguments are stored in successive address locations If an argument is NULL its corresponding address location is flled with zeros Integer arguments are stored as is but must be byte values within the range 0 255 floating point numbers are not allowed If the evaluated expression is out of the range 256 255 the assembler issues an error For negative values within that range the assembler adds 256 to the specified value for example 254 is stored as 2
79. nonhex_letter alpha_num _ letter digit identifier letter alpha_num character value valid within chosen character set char_string_length hex_digit hex_digit char_string char_string_length character The numeric value specified in char_string_length should be followed by an equal number of characters Expressions may be formed out of immediate numbers and MUFOM variables The MUFOM processes 2 to 4 which form the linker contain expression evaluators which parse and calculate the values for the expressions If a MUFOM process cannot calculate the absolute value of an expression because the values of the variable are not yet known it copies the expression with modifications into the output file Expression are coded in reverse Polish notation The operator follows the operands expression boolean_function one_operand_function two_operand_function three_operand_function four_operand_function conditional_expr hex_number MUFOM_variable 6 1 3 1 Functions without Operands F false function T true function boolean_function F T The false and true function produce a boolean result false or true which may be used in logical expressions Both functions do not have operands 6 1 3 2 Monadic Functions Monadic functions have one operand which precedes the function one_operand_function operand monop operand expression monop ABS NE
80. now also stops after encountering a warning Related information Gls Assembler option no warnings Suppress some or all warnings 4 80 Tool Options Linker 4 3 Linker Options Altium Designer uses a makefile to build your entire project This means that you cannot run the linker separately However you can set options specific for the linker Options in Altium Designer versus options on the command line Most command line options have an equivalent option in Altium Designer but some options are only available on the command line for example in a Windows Command Prompt If there is no equivalent option in Altium Designer you can specify a command line option in Altium Designer as follows 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Enter one or more command line options in the Additional Linker options field Invocation syntax on the command line Windows Command Prompt The invocation syntax on the command line is 1k51 option file When you are linking multiple files either relocatable object files obj or libraries 1ib it is important to specify the files in the right order Short and long option names Options can have both short and long names Short option names always begin with a single minus character long option names always begin with double minus characters You can abbre
81. object with size size The new object cannot have a size larger than the previous object Environment communication abort Causes abnormal program termination If the signal SIGABRTis caught the signal handler may take over control See section 2 2 17 signal h atexit func Func points to a function that is called without arguments when the program normally terminates exit status Causes normal program termination Acts as if main returns with status as the return value Status can also be specified with the predefined macros EXIT SUCCES or EXIT_FAILURE _Exit status Same as exit but no registered by the atexit function or signal handlers registerd by the signal function are called getenv s Searches an environment list for a string s Returns a pointer to the contents of s NOTE this function is not implemented because there is no OS system s Passes the string s to the environment for execution NOTE this function is not implemented because there is no OS 2 18 Libraries Searching and sorting bsearch key base n size cmp qsort base n size cmp Integer arithmetic int abs j long labs j long long llabs j div_t div x y ldiv_t ldiv x y lldiv_t lldiv x y This function searches in an array of n members for the object pointed to by key The initial base of the array is given by base The size of each member is specified by size The given array must be sorted in ascending order ac
82. of MUFOM letters and function codes Function code Identifiers Function code Letter code F OxAO T OxA1 A 0xC1 ABS OxA2 B OxC2 NEG 0xA3 C 0xC3 NOT 0xA4 D 0xC4 OxA5 E OxC5 OxA6 F 0xC6 OxA7 G OxC7 OxA8 H 0xC8 MAX OxAQ9 0xC9 Object File Formats Function code Identifiers Function code Letter code MIN OxAA J OxCA MOD 0xAB K 0xCB lt OxAC L OxCC gt OxAD M 0xCD OxAE N OxCE l lt gt OxAF O OxCF AND OxBO P 0xDO OR 0xB1 Q 0xD1 XOR 0xB2 R OxD2 EXT 0xB3 S 0xD3 INS 0xB4 T OxD4 ERR 0xB5 U 0xD5 IF OxB6 V OxD6 ELSE OxB7 W 0xD7 END 0xB8 xX 0xD8 ISDEF 0xB9 Y 0xD9 Z OxDA Table 6 3 Binary encoding of MUFOM letters and function codes MUFOM Command codes Command Code Description MB OxE0O Module begin ME OxE1 Module end AS OxE2 Assign IR OxE3 Inititialize relocation base LR OxE4 Load with relocation SB OxE5 Section begin ST OxE6 Section type SA OxE7 Section alignment NI OxE8 Internal name NX OxE9 External name CO OxEA Comment DT OxEB Date and time AD OxEC Address description LD OxED Load CS with sum OxEE Checksum followed by sum value CS OxEF Checksum reset sum to 0 NN OxFO Name AT OxF 1 Attribute TY OxF2 Type RI OxF3 Retain internal symbol 6 11 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Refer
83. of memory for each argument An argument is e asingle or multiple character string constant e an expression e NULL indicated by two adjacent commas If you specify label it gets the value of the location counter at the start of the directive processing Multiple arguments are stored in sets of four bytes If an argument is NULL its corresponding address locations are flled with zeros Long arguments are stored as is Floating point values are not allowed If the evaluated argument is too large to be represented in a long the assembler issues an error and truncates the value In case of character strings each character is stored in the least significant byte of a long whose lower seven bits represent the ASCII value of the character DL AB D gt 0x00000041 0x00000042 0x00000000 second argument is empty 0x00000044 When you use the DL directive in a bit type section each argument initializes 32 bits and the location counter of the current section is incremented with the same number of bits Example TABLE DL 14 253 0x62 ABCD CHARS DL A B C D Related information Gb BS DS Block Storage Define Storage DBIT Define Bit DB_ Define Byte DH Define Half Word DW Define Word aana Assembly Language DS DSBIT DSB DSH DSW DSL Syntax label DS expression label DSBIT expression label DSB expression label DSH expression label
84. option k in the environment variable MAKEFLAGS Example tmk S The effect of the option k is cancelled so the make utility stops with the make process after it encounters an error The option k in this example may have been set with the environment variable MAKEFLAGS or in a recursive call to tmk in the makefile Related information db Make utility option k On error abandon the work for the current target only 4 170 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility s Command line syntax s Description With this option you tell the make utility to perform its tasks without printing the commands it executes Error messages are normally printed Example tmk s The make utility rebuilds your files but does not print the commands it executes during the make process Related information d Make utility option n Perform a dry run 4 171 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility t Command line syntax t Description With this option you tell the make utility to touch the target files bringing them up to date rather than performing the rules to rebuild them Example tmk t The make utility updates out of date files by giving them a new date and time stamp The files are not actually rebuild Related information J 4 172 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility time Command line syntax time Description With this option you tell the make utility to display the current
85. optional Memory and bus definition are used within the context of a derivative definition to specify internal memory and on chip buses In the context of a board specification the memory and bus definitions are used to define external off chip memory and buses Given the above definitions the linker can convert a logical address into an offset into an on chip or off chip memory device See section 7 7 3 Defining External Memory and Buses for more information on how to specify the external physical memory layout Internal memory for a processor should be defined in the derivative definition for that processor The board specification The processor definition and memory and bus definitions together form a board specification LSL provides language constructs to easily describe single core and heterogeneous or homogeneous multi core systems The board specification describes all characteristics of your target board s system buses memory devices I O sub systems and cores that are of interest to the linker Based on the information provided in the board specification the linker can for each core e convert a logical address to an offset within a memory device e locate sections in physical memory e maintain an overall view of the used and free physical memory within the whole system while locating The section layout definition optional The optional section layout definition enables you to exactly control where input sections are located F
86. select ROM copy of mydata mydata The load time and run time addresses of a group cannot be set at the same time If the load time property is set for a group the group only restricts the positioning at load time of the group s sections It is not possible to set the address of a group that has a not unrestricted parent group The properties of the load time and run time start address are At run time before using an element in an overlay group the application copies the sections from their load location to their run time location but only if these two addresses are different For non overlay sections this happens at program start up The start addresses cannot be set to absolute values for unrestricted groups For non overlay groups that do not have an overlay parent the load time start address equals the run time start address For any group if the run time start address is not set the linker selects an appropriate address If an ordered group or sequential group has an absolute address and contains sections that have separate page restrictions not defined in LSL all those sections are located in a single page In other cases for example when an unrestricted group has an address range assigned to it the paged sections may be located in different pages For overlays the linker reserves memory at the run time start address as large as the largest element in the overlay group The page keyword tells the linker to place the
87. storage class specifier should not be used 29 R The use ofa tag shall agree with its declaration 30 R All automatics shall be initialized before being used This rule is checked using worst case assumptions This means that violations are reported not only for variables that are guaranteed to be uninitialized but also for variables that are uninitialized on some execution paths 31 R Braces shall be used in the initialization of arrays and structures 32 R Only the first or all enumeration constants may be initialized 33 R The right hand operand of amp amp or shall not contain side effects 34 R The operands of a logical amp amp or shall be primary expressions 35 R Assignment operators shall not be used in Boolean expressions 36 A Logical operators should not be confused with bitwise operators 37 R Bitwise operations shall not be performed on signed integers 38 R A shift count shall be between 0 and the operand width minus 1 This violation will only be checked when the shift count evaluates to a constant value at compile time 39 R The unary minus shall not be applied to an unsigned expression 40 A sizeof should not be used on expressions with side effects x 41 A The implementation of integer division should be documented 42 R The comma operator shall only be used in a for condition 43 R Don t use implicit conversions which may result in information loss 44 A Redundant explicit casts
88. the option f multiple times Format of an option file e Multiple arguments on one line in the option file are allowed e To include whitespace in an argument surround the argument with single or double quotes e If you want to use single quotes as part of the argument surround the argument by double quotes and vise versa This has a single quote embedded This has a double quote embedded This has a double quote and a single quote embedded When a text line reaches its length limit use a to continue the line Whitespace between quotes is preserved This is a continuation line gt This is a continuation line e Itis possible to nest command line files up to 25 levels Example Suppose the file myoptions contains the following lines x mylib lib objl obj w5 Specify the option file to the librarian tlb f myoptions This is equivalent to the following command line tlb x mylib lib objl obj w5 4 180 Tool Options Librarian Librarian m Command line syntax m a posname b posname Description Move the specified object modules to another position in the library The ordering of members in a library can make a difference in how programs are linked if a symbol is defined in more than one member Default the specified members are moved to the end of the archive Use the suboptions a or b to move them to a specified place instead a posname Move the spec
89. the value of the parameters of the sub architecture architecture name_child_arch parml1 parm2 1 extends name_parent_arch arguments definitions 7 5 2 Defining Internal Buses With the bus keyword you define a bus the combination of data and corresponding address bus The bus name is used to identify a bus and does not conflict with other identifiers Bus descriptions in an architecture definition or derivative definition define internal buses Some internal buses are used to communicate with the components outside the core or processor Such buses on a processor have physical pins reserved for the number of bits specified with the width statements e The mau field specifies the MAU size Minimum Addressable Unit of the data bus This field is required e The width field specifies the width number of address lines of the data bus The default value is the MAU size e The map keyword specifies how this bus maps onto another bus if so Mappings are described in section 7 5 4 Mappings bus bus_name mau 8 width 8 map map_description 7 5 3 Defining Address Spaces With the space keyword you define a logical address space The space name is used to identify the address space and does not conflict with other identifiers 7 15 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference The id field defines how the addressing space is identified in object files In general each address space has a unique ID The linker locate
90. this option the linker uses a default script file You can specify the existing file 51 1s1 or the name of a manually written linker script file You can use this option multiple times The linker processes the LSL files in the order in which they appear on the command line Related information db Linker option Isl check Check LSL file s and exit Section 4 8 Controlling the Linker with a Script in chapter Using the Linker of the user s manual 4 99 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Linker map file M Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Map File 3 Enable the option Generate a memory map file map 4 Inthe Map file format section enable or disable the information you want to be included in the map file Command line syntax map file file Mifile Description With this option you tell the linker to generate a linker map file If you do not specify a filename and you specfied the o option the linker uses the same basename as the output file with the extension map If you did not specify the o option the linker uses the file task1 map Altium Designer names the map file after the project A linker map file is a text file that shows how the linker has mapped the sections and symbols from the various object files ob3 to the linked object file A locate part shows the absolute position of each
91. to align the location counter When the assembler encounters the ALIGN directive it moves the location counter forwards to an address that is aligned as specified by expression and places the next instruction or directive on that address The alignment is in minimal addressable units MAUs The assembler fills the gap with NOP instructions If the location counter is already aligned on the specified alignment it remains unchanged The location of absolute sections will not be changed The expression must be a power of two 2 4 8 16 If you specify another value the assembler changes the alignment to the next higher power of two and issues a warning In bit type sections expression is in number of bits Examples SECTION code code ALIGN 16 the assembler aligns instruction this instruction at 16 MAUs and fills the gap with NOP instructions SECTION code code ALIGN 12 WRONG not a power of two the instruction assembler aligns this instruction at 16 MAUs and issues a warning Assembly Language BREAK Syntax BREAK Description The BREAK directive causes immediate termination of a macro expansion a FOR loop exansion or a REPEAT loop expansion In case of nested loops or macros the BREAK directive returns to the previous level of expansion The BREAK directive is for example useful in combination with the IF directive to terminate expansion when error conditions are
92. to find the shortest possible operand encoding for instructions Related information d gt Section 3 5 Assembler Optimizations in chapter Using the Assembler of the user s manual 4 71 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Assembler option file f Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option option file to the Additional assembler options field Be aware that the options in the option file are added to the assembler options you have set in the other dialogs Only in extraordinary cases you may want to use them in combination Command line syntax option file file f file Description This option is primarily intended for command line use Instead of typing all options on the command line you can create an option file which contains all options and flags you want to specify With this option you specify the option file to the assembler Use an option file when the command line would exceed the limits of the operating system or just to store options and save typing Option files can also be generated on the fly for example by the make utility You can specify the option option file multiple times Format of an option file e Multiple arguments on one line in the option file are allowed e To include whitespace in an argument surround the argument with single or double q
93. type variable it becomes 1 true if the integer is not equal to 0 and 0 false if the integer is 0 The next two C source lines have the same effect C Language bit_variable int_variable bit_variable int_variable 1 0 e Pointer to bit is allowed but you cannot take the address of a bit on the stack e The _ bit type is allowed as a structure member However a bit structure can only contain members of type __ bit and you cannot push a bit structure on the stack or return a bit structure via a function e Aunionofa__ bit structure and another type is not allowed e A __ bit type variable is allowed as a parameter of a function e A __bit type variable is allowed as a return type of a function e A ___bit typed expression is allowed as switch expression e The sizeof ofa_bittypeis 1 e A global or static bit type variable can be initialized e A __ bit type variable can be declared volatile 1 3 Memory Qualifiers You can use static memory qualifiers to allocate static objects in a particular part of the addressing space of the processor or to use a specific addressing mode In addition you can place variables at absolute addresses with the keyword __at 1 3 1 Memory Type Qualifiers In the C language you can specify that a variable must lie in a specific part of memory You can do this with a memory type qualifier You can specify the following memory types Qualifier Description
94. you specified the keyword fixed group heap myheap size 2k The linker creates two labels to mark the begin and end of the heap __1c_ub_heap_name for the begin of the heap and __1c_ue_heap_name for the end of the heap The linker allocates space for the heap when a reference to either of the section labels exists in one of the input object files Reserved section e The keyword reserved tells the linker to create an area or section of a given size The linker will not locate any other sections in the memory occupied by a reserved section with some exceptions Optionally you can assign a name to a reserved section With the keyword size you can specify a size for a given reserved area or section group reserved myreserved size 2k 7 30 Linker Script Language The optional 111 field contains a bit pattern that the linker writes to all memory addresses that remain unoccupied during the locate process The result of the expression or list of expressions is used as values to write to memory each in MAU The first MAU of the fill pattern is always the first MAU in the section By default no sections can overlap with a reserved section With alloc_allowed absolute sections that are located at an absolute address due to an absolute group restriction can overlap a reserved section With the attributes field you can set the access type of the reserved section The linker locates the reserve
95. 1 This results in the following message and explanation W241 additional input files will be ignored The assembler supports only a single input file All other input files are ignored To write an explanation of all errors and warnings in HTML format to file aserrors html use redirection and enter as51 diag html all gt aserrors html Related information i 4 61 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Assembler emit locals Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax emit locals Description With this option the assembler also emits local symbols to the object file Normally only global symbols are emitted Having local symbols in the object file can be useful for debugging Related information i 4 62 Tool Options Assembler Assembler error file Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax error file file Description With this option the assembler redirects error messages to a file If you do not specify a filename the error file will be named after the input file with extension ers Example To write errors to errors err instead of stderr enter as51 error file errors err test src Related information ie 4 63 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Assembler help Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax help options Description Displays an overview of all command line options When you specify the argument options y
96. 17 Function syntax 3 5 Function inlining 1 20 Function qualifiers __frame 1 25 __interrupt 1 24 __registerbank 1 25 fwprintf 2 15 fwrite 2 16 fwscanf 2 15 G Generic instructions 3 1 3 50 getc 2 16 getchar 2 16 getcwd 2 22 getenv 2 18 gets 2 16 getwc 2 16 getwchar 2 16 global 3 25 gmtime 2 21 H Header files 2 2 alert h 2 2 complex h 2 2 ctype h 2 2 errno h 2 3 fentl h 2 3 fenv h 2 4 float h 2 4 fss h 2 4 inttypes h 2 5 io h 2 5 iso646 h 2 5 limits h 2 6 locale h 2 6 malloc h 2 6 math h 2 6 setimp h 2 10 signal h 2 10 stdarg h 2 10 stdbool h 2 10 stddef h 2 11 stdint h 2 5 stdio h 2 11 stdlib h 2 17 string h 2 19 tgmath h 2 6 time h 2 20 unistd h 2 22 wehar h 2 11 2 19 2 20 2 23 wetype h 2 2 2 24 Heap 7 16 hypot functions 2 8 l IEEE 695 6 1 command language concept 6 1 conditional expressions 6 4 expressions 6 2 notational conventions 6 2 variables in object file 6 2 if elif else endif 3 26 ilogb functions 2 7 imaxabs 2 5 imaxdiv 2 5 include 3 27 Include directory 4 15 4 33 4 65 4 91 4 128 Include file 4 16 4 66 Initialized variables 1 16 Inline assembly __asm 1 7 Inline functions 1 20 inline noinline smartinline 1 12 Inlining 4 17 Input specification 3 1 Instructions 3 1 generic 3 1 3 50 Intel hex record type 6 16 Intel Hex record format 6 16 Interrupt 4 31 Interrupt frame 1 25 Interrup
97. 29 priority 7 30 processor 7 22 ram 7 21 ref_tree 7 27 reserved 7 18 7 21 7 30 rom 7 21 run_addr 7 17 7 18 7 29 section 7 31 section_layout 7 25 Index 7 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference section_setup 7 24 select 7 26 size 7 17 7 18 7 21 7 23 7 30 7 31 space 7 15 7 18 speed 7 21 7 23 src_dbits 7 18 src_offset 7 18 stack 7 16 7 30 start_address 7 18 symbol 7 18 template 7 17 template_symbol 7 17 type 7 21 7 23 vector 7 17 vector_prefix 7 17 vector_size 7 17 vector_table 7 17 width 7 15 LSL syntax 7 3 architecture definition 7 7 board specification 7 10 bus definition 7 6 derivative definition 7 9 memory definition 7 6 processor definition 7 10 section layout definition 7 10 Istat 2 23 Isw 3 7 macro nomacro 1 13 Macro argument string 3 47 Macro call 3 1 Macro definition 4 9 4 60 4 121 Macro operations 3 45 macro endm 3 30 Macros 3 45 for directive 3 48 repeat directive 3 48 argument concatenation 3 46 argument operator 3 46 argument string 3 47 calling 3 45 conditional assembly 3 49 defining 3 45 local label override 3 48 make utility 4 152 return decimal value operator 3 47 return hex value operator 3 47 Macros preprocessor 1 15 Make utility options 4 153 a 4 154 c 4 155 D 4 156 d 4 157 DD 4 156 dd 4 157 Index 8 e 4 158 err 4 159 f 4 160 G 4 161 i 4 162 K 4 163 k 4 164 m
98. 3 lt length_byte gt lt address gt lt code bytes gt lt checksum_byte gt The linker generates 4 byte addresses by default Example S3070000FFFE6E6825 _ checksum _ code _ address _ length The linker has an option that controls the length of the output buffer for generating S3 records The checksum calculation of S3 records is identical to SO S7 record With the linker option ofilename SREC 4 which is the default at the end of an S record file the linker generates an S7 record which contains the program start address S7 is the corresponding termination record for S3 records Layout S 7 lt length_byte gt lt address gt lt checksum_byte gt Example S70500000000FA checksum _ address _ length The checksum calculation of S7 records is identical to SO S8 record With the linker option ofilename SREC 3 at the end of an S record file the linker generates an S8 record which contains the program start address Layout S 8 lt length_byte gt lt address gt lt checksum_byte gt Example S804FF0003F9 _ checksum _ address _ length The checksum calculation of S8 records is identical to SO S9 record With the linker option ofilename SREC 2 at the end of an S record file the linker generates an S9 record which contains the program start address S9 is the corresponding termination record for S1 records Layout S 9 lt len
99. 3 for endfor 3 24 global 3 25 iff elif else endif 3 26 include 3 27 label 3 28 list nolist 3 29 macro endm 3 30 message 3 32 offset 3 33 page 3 34 registerbank 3 35 repeat endrep 3 36 resume 3 37 section 3 38 set 3 40 symb 3 41 title 3 42 undef 3 43 assembly control overview 3 8 conditional assembly overview 3 9 data definition overview 3 9 detailed description 3 10 HLL overview 3 10 listing control overview 3 9 macros overview 3 9 overview 3 8 storage allocation overview 3 9 symbol definitions overview 3 9 TSK51x TSK52x overview 3 10 weak 3 44 Assembler options 4 55 4 64 case insensitive 4 56 check 4 57 cpu 4 58 debug info 4 59 define 4 60 Index 1 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference diag 4 61 emit locals 4 62 error file 4 63 help 4 64 include directory 4 65 include file 4 66 list file 4 68 list format 4 69 no warnings 4 70 optimize 4 71 option file 4 72 output 4 73 preprocessor type 4 74 rom monitor nops 4 75 section info 4 76 symbol scope 4 77 verbose 4 79 version 4 78 warnings as errors 4 80 C 4 58 C 4 56 D 4 60 f 4 72 g 4 59 H 4 66 l 4 65 i 4 77 k 4 67 k keep output files 4 67 L 4 69 l 4 68 m 4 74 O 4 71 0 4 73 t 4 76 V 4 78 V 4 79 w 4 70
100. 4 165 4 170 n 4 166 p 4 167 q 4 168 r 4 169 s 4 171 t 4 172 time 4 173 V 4 174 W 4 175 x 4 176 defining a macro 4 152 malloc 2 6 2 18 Map file generation 4 100 Mappings 7 18 MAU 6 2 maxcalldepth 1 13 MB_CUR_MAX 2 17 2 23 MB_LEN_ MAX 2 23 mblen 2 19 mbrlen 2 23 mbrtowc 2 23 mbsinit 2 23 mbsrtowcs 2 23 mbstate_t 2 23 mbstowcs 2 19 mbtowc 2 19 memchr 2 20 memcmp 2 20 memcpy 2 19 memmove 2 19 Memory definition 7 2 Memory model 4 29 4 136 Memory models 1 6 Memory qualifiers 1 3 Memory type qualifiers 1 3 memset 2 20 Merging source code 4 46 message 1 13 3 32 MISRA C 4 26 4 27 MISRA C report 4 102 supported rules 1998 8 1 supported rules 2004 8 5 version 4 28 mktime 2 21 modf functions 2 7 monadic functions 6 3 Motorola S record format 6 13 msb 3 7 msw 3 7 Index MUFOM 6 1 AD command 6 5 AS command 6 8 AT command 6 7 checksum command 6 5 command codes 6 11 comment command 6 5 data types 6 3 DT command 6 5 first byte of language elements 6 10 function codes 6 10 functions 6 10 IR command 6 8 LD command 6 8 letters 6 10 LI command 6 10 loading commands 6 8 LR command 6 9 LX command 6 10 MB command 6 5 ME command 6 5 module level commands 6 5 NI command 6 7 NN command 6 7 NX command 6 7 processes 6 1 RE command 6 9 RI command 6 9 SA command 6 7 SB command 6 6 sections 6 6 ST command 6 6 TY command 6 8
101. 51ls First the linker looks in the directory c mylibs for library c511s 1ib this option If it does not find the requested libraries it looks in the directory that is set with the environment variable LIBC51 Then the linker looks in the default directory PRODDIR c51 1ib for libraries Related information d gt Linker option library Link system library Section 4 4 1 How the linker searches libraries in chapter Using the Linker of the user s manual 4 95 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Linker link only Menu entry Command line syntax link only Description With this option you suppress the locating phase The linker stops after linking and informs you about unresolved references Related information dE Control program option cl Stop after linking 4 96 Tool Options Linker Linker Isl check Menu entry Command line syntax Isl check Description With this option the linker just checks the syntax of the LSL file s and exits No linking or locating is performed Use the option Isl file file to specify the name of the Linker Script File you want to test Related information Gb Linker option Isl file Linker script file Linker option Isl dump Dump LSL info Section 4 8 Controlling the Linker with a Script in chapter Using the Linker of the user s manual 4 97 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Linker Isl dump Menu entry 1 From the
102. 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 ae ese 3 A A switch expression should not represent a Boolean case Every switch shall have at least one case Floating point variables shall not be used as loop counters A for should only contain expressions concerning loop control A violation is reported when the loop initialization or loop update expression modifies an object that is not referenced in the loop test Iterator variables should not be modified in a for loop Functions shall always be declared at file scope Functions with variable number of arguments shall not be used Functions shall not call themselves either directly or indirectly A violation will be reported for direct or indirect recursive function calls in the source file being checked Recursion via functions in other source files or recursion via function pointers is not detected Function prototypes shall be visible at the definition and call The function prototype of the declaration shall match the definition Identifiers shall be given for all prototype parameters or for none Parameter identifiers shall be identical for declaration definition Every function shall have an explicit return type Functions with no parameters shall have a void parameter list An actual parameter type shall be compatible with the prototype The number of actual para
103. 8 Architecture Definition sess eee cP hee pas reteni dated ey Gee Pee a wee ee ee ey eas 7 7 7 3 9 Derivative DefinitiON secc ere a oseti ea eee eae ie Ee ee ec ee A eae 7 9 7 3 10 Processor Definition and Board Specification 0 cece eee eee 7 10 7 3 11 Section Layout Definition and Section Setup 0 eee 7 10 7 4 Expression Evaluation iavcievuciiee pinind eh ne EE ean wea eed ee aa Des 7 13 7 5 Semantics of the Architecture Definition 0 0 c cece teeta 7 14 7 5 1 Defining an Architecture crisis ureriniecei i a e dawned a EE EE E E hig 7 15 7 5 2 Defining Internal BUSES perece teriris ean Cas cad nel de ska dermis pian oe BRE Sa Cee Eai 7 15 7 5 3 Defining Address Spaces 00 c cece eee eee eee eee e nents 7 15 7 5 4 MAPPINGS sss ceisia oniranran chamigareeeenenb ap darne E ea yaa AEE heb EEn eee 7 18 7 6 Semantics of the Derivative Definition 0 0 c cece 7 20 7 6 1 Defining a Derivative cc0s caged tac aaw Cae cada de a Tae Bd ee ea eee ode ph wee OnE 7 20 7 6 2 Instantiating Core Architectures 00 ccc eee eens 7 20 7 6 3 Defining Internal Memory and Buses 0 cece eet etn 7 21 7 7 Semantics of the Board Specification 0 cece eet eet 7 22 7 7 1 Defining a PrOCESSOF sinew iid donate ok cnd dane Meena aa a aa oa ondokeni 7 22 7 7 2 Instantiating Derivatives 0 i tenet nents 7 22 7 7 3 Defining External Memory and BUSES 0 c c
104. D command The address where loading takes place depends on the value of the P variable belonging to the section Data which is contiguous in a LD command is supposed to be loaded contiguously in memory If data is not absolute it contains expressions which must be evaluated by the expression evaluator The LR command allows a relocation expression to be part of the loading command LD Command LD_command LD hex_digit The constants loaded with the LD command are loaded with the most significant part first IR Command A relocation base is an expression which can be associated with a relocation letter This relocation letter can be used in subsequent load relocate commands IR_command IR relocation_letter relocation_base number_of_bits relocation_letter nonhex_letter relocation_base expression number_of_bits expression Object File Formats Example IRV X20 16 ITM R2 40 8 The number_of_bits must be less than or equal to the number of bits per address which is the product of the number of MAUs per address and the number of bits per MAU both of which are specified in the AD command If the number_of_bits is not specified it equals the number of bits per address LR Command LR_command x LR load_item load_item relocation_letter offset load_constant expression number_of_MAUs load_constant x hex_dig
105. DSW expression label DSL expression Description With the Ds directive Define Storage the assembler reserves a block of memory The reserved block of memory is not initialized to any value With the expression you specify the number of minimum addressable units MAUs that you want to reserve The expression must evaluate to an integer larger than zero and cannot contain references to symbols that are not yet defined in the assembly source In a bit type section the MAU size is 1 the DS directive reserves a number of bits equal to the result of the expression If you specify label it gets the value of the location counter at the start of the directive processing aN You cannot use the DS directive in sections with attribute init If you need to reserve initialized space in an init section use the BS directive instead The DSBIT DSB DSH DSW and DSL directives are variants of the Ds directive DSBIT The expression argument specifies the number of bits to reserve DSB The expression argument specifies the number of bytes to reserve In a bit type section the DSB directive still reserves 8 bits DSH Same as the DSB directive DSW The expression argument specifies the number of words to reserve one word is 16 bits In a bit type section the DSW directive still reserves16 bits DSL The expression argument specifies the number of longs to reserve one long is 32 bits In a bit type section the DSL direc
106. Description With this option you define the CPU core for which you create your application The TSK51x TSK52x target has more than one processor type and therefore you need to specify for which processor type the assembler should assemble The effect of this option is that the assembler includes the appropriate special function register file regcpu sfr You choose one of the following CPU s TSK51A TSK52A or TSK52B Assembly code can check the value of the option by means of the built in function CPU Example To assemble the file test src for the TSK51x TSK52x processor and use the SFR file for the TSK51A processor type enter the following on command line as51 cpu tsk5la test src The assembler includes the SFR file regtsk51a sfr and assembles for the chosen processor type When you call the assembler from the command line make sure you specify the same core type to the compiler to avoid conflicts Related information db Assembly function CPU 4 58 Tool Options Assembler Assembler debug info g Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Debug Information 3 Select which debug information to include Automatic HLL or assembly level debug information Custom debug information or No debug information If you select Custom debug information 4 Select which Custom debug information to include A
107. Example SECTION code code SECTION data data Sueton code code een data data init RESUME code RESUME data data RESUME data data init Related information db SECTION Start a new section First code section First data section Second code section Second data section Resume in the second code section Resume in the first data section Resume in the second data section 3 37 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference SECTION Syntax SECTION name type attribute Description With the SECTION directive you define a new section Each time you use the SECTION directive a new section is created It is possible to create multiple sections with exactly the same name To resume a previously defined section use the RESUME directive If you define a section you must always specify the section name and type Names starting with a dot are reserved for the system Optionally you can specify one or more attributes You can specify the following section types Section Type Description data Direct addressable data on chip sfr Special Function Registers part of DATA idata Indirect addressable space on chip bit Bit data space xdata External address space pdata Paged data mapped in one 256 bytes page code Code address space sfrbit SFR bits part of SFR space bdata Bit addressable data on chip RAM bsfr Bit addressable SFR s
108. G NOT ISDEF ABS returns the absolute value of an integer operand NEG returns the negative value of an integer operand NOT returns the negation of a boolean operand or the one s complement value if the operand is an integer ISDEF returns the logical true value if all variable in an expression are defined return false otherwise TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 6 1 3 3 Dyadic Functions and Operators Dyadic functions and operators have two operands which precede the operator or function two_operand_function operand1 operand2 dyadop operand1 expression operand2 expression dyadop AND MAX MIN MOD OR XOR aa r ap IKI Ped ugn Ka or a AND returns boolean true false result of logical and operation on operands when both operands are logical values When both operands are not logical values the bitwise and is performed MAx compares both operands arithmetically and returns the largest value MIN compares both operands arithmetically and returns the smallest value MOD returns the modulo result of the division of operand1 by operand2 The result is undefined if either operand is negative or if operand2 is zero OR returns boolean true false result of logical or operation on operands when both operands are logical values When both operands are no logical values the bitwise and is performed
109. H A R REG2 XCH A R REG1 ENDM The macro first expands as follows XCH A R O XCH A R 1 XCH A R 2 Because of the concatenation operator the strings are concatenated XCH A RO XCH A R1 XCH A R2 Example Hex Value Operator The percent sign is similar to the standard decimal value operator except that it returns the hexadecimal value of a symbol Consider the following macro definition GEN_LAB MACRO LAB VAL STMT LAB SVAL STMT ENDM The macro is called after NUM has been set to 10 NUM SET 10 GEN_LAB HEX NUM NOP The macro expands as follows HEXA NOP The VAL argument is replaced by the character A which represents the hexadecimal value 10 of the argument VAL Example Argument String Operator To generate a literal string enclosed by single quotes you must use the argument string operator in the macro definition Consider the following macro definition 3 47 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference STR_MAC MACRO STRING DB STRING ENDM The macro is called as follows STR_MAC ABCD The macro expands as follows DB ABCD Within double quotes DEFINE directive definitions can be expanded Take care when using constructions with quotes and double quotes to avoid inappropriate expansions Since DEFINE expansion occurs before macro substitution any DEFINE symbols are replaced first within a macro argument string DEFINE LONG short
110. ISRA C Standard If you select Custom MISRA C configuration 4 Inthe left pane expand the MISRA C entry and select MISRA C Rules 5 Enable or disable the individual rules Command line syntax misrac all number number Description With this option you specify to the compiler which MISRA C rules must be checked With the option misrac all the compiler checks for all supported MISRA C rules Example c51 misrac 9 13 test c The compiler generates an error for each MISRA C rule 9 10 11 12 or 13 violation in file test c Related information C compiler option misrac advisory warnings C compiler option misrac required warnings Linker option misrac report 4 26 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler misrac advisory warnings misrac required warnings Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select MISRA C 3 Enable one or both options Turn advisory rule violation into warning and Turn required rule violation into warning Command line syntax misrac advisory warnings misrac required warnings Description Normally if an advisory rule or required rule is violated the compiler generates an error AS a consequence no output file is generated With this option the compiler generates a warning instead of an error Related information d gt C compiler option misrac Linker option misrac repor
111. Identifiers shall not rely on significance of more than 31 characters 12 A The same identifier shall not be used in multiple name spaces 13 A Specific length typedefs should be used instead of the basic types 14 R Use unsigned char or signed char instead of plain char x 15 A Floating point implementations should comply with a standard 16 R The bit representation of floating point numbers shall not be used A violation is reported when a pointer to a floating point type is converted to a pointer to an integer type 17 R typedef names shall not be reused 18 A Numeric constants should be suffixed to indicate type A violation is reported when the value of the constant is outside the range indicated by the suffixes if any 19 R Octal constants other than zero shall not be used 20 R All object and function identifiers shall be declared before use 21 R Identifiers shall not hide identifiers in an outer scope 22 A Declarations should be at function scope where possible 8 1 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference x 23 A _ All declarations at file scope should be static where possible 24 R Identifiers shall not have both internal and external linkage x 25 R Identifiers with external linkage shall have exactly one definition 26 R Multiple declarations for objects or functions shall be compatible x 27 A External objects should not be declared in more than one file 28 A The register
112. If it does not find the file it looks in the directory c proj include for the file myinc inc this option If the file is still not found the assembler searches in the environment variable and then in the default include directory Related information db Assembler option include file H Include file before source 4 65 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Assembler include file H Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Preprocessing 3 Enter the name of the file in the Include this file before source field or click and select a file Command line syntax include file file Hfile Description With this option set at project level you include one extra file at the beginning of the assembly source file The specified include file is included before all other includes This is the same as specifying INCLUDE file atthe beginning of your assembly source Example as51 include file myinc inc testl src The file myinc inc is included at the beginning of test 1 src before it is assembled Related information Gb Assembler option include directory Include files path Section 3 4 How the Assembler Searches Include Files in chapter Using the Assembler of the user s manual 4 66 Tool Options Assembler Assembler keep output files k Menu entry Altium Designe
113. LC_NUMERIC 3 LC_COLLATE 1 LC_TIME 4 LC_CTYPE 2 LC_MONETARY 5 struct lconv localeconv void Returns a pointer to type stuct lconv with values appropriate for the formatting of numeric quantities according to the rules of the current locale The struct lconv in this header file is conforming the ISO standard 2 2 14 malloc h The header file malloc h contains prototypes for memory allocation functions This include file is not defined in ISO C99 it is included for backwards compatibility with ISO C90 For ISO C99 the memory allocation functions are part of stdlib h See section 2 2 23 sidlib h and wchar h malloc size Allocates space for an object with size size The allocated space is not initialized Returns a point er to the allocated space calloc nobj size Allocates space for n objects with size size The allocated space is initialized with zeros Returns a pointer to the allocated space free ptr Deallocates the memory space pointed to by pir which should be a pointer earlier returned by the malloc or calloc function realloc ptr size Deallocates the old object pointed to by ptr and returns a pointer to a niew object with size size The new object cannot have a size larger than the previous object 2 2 15 math h and tgmath h The header file math h contains the prototypes for many mathematical functions Before ISO C99 all functions were computed using the double type the float was automatically converted to double
114. Manual AN A number of MISRA C rules leave room for interpretation Other rules can only be checked in a limited way In such cases the implementation decisions and possible restrictions for these rules are listed x means that the rule is not supported by the TASKING C compiler R is a required rule A is an advisory rule Environment 1 1 R 1 2 R x13 R x14 R x15 A All code shall conform to ISO 9899 1990 Programming languages C amended and corrected by ISO IEC 9899 COR1 1995 ISO IEC 9899 AMD1 1995 and ISO IEC 9899 COR2 1996 No reliance shall be placed on undefined or unspecified behavior Multiple compilers and or languages shall only be used if there is a common defined interface standard for object code to which the languages compilers assemblers conform The compiler linker shall be checked to ensure that 31 character significance and case sensitivity are supported for external identifiers Floating point implementations should comply with a defined floating point standard Language extensions 2 1 R 22 R 2 3 R 2 4 A Documentation x 3 1 R x 3 2 R x 3 3 A 3 4 R 3 5 R x 3 6 R Character sets 4 1 R 4 2 R Assembly language shall be encapsulated and isolated Source code shall only use style comments The character sequence shall not be used within a comment Sections of code should not be commented out In general it is not possible to decid
115. Operations on files stdio h Returns the current file position for stream or 1L on error FSS implementation Sets the file position indicator for the stream to the beginning of the file This function is equivalent to void fseek stream OL SEEK _SET clearerr stream FSS implementation Stores the current value of the file position indicator for stream in the object pointed to by pos FSS implementation Positions stream at the position recorded by getpos in pos FSS implementation Description remove file rename old new tmpfile tmpnam buffer Error handling stdio h Removes the named file so that a subsequent attempt to open it fails Returns a non zero value if not succesful Changes the name of the file from old name to new name Returns a non zero value if not succesful Creates a temporary file of the mode wb that will be automatically removed when closed or when the program terminates normally Returns a file pointer Creates new file names that do not conflict with other file names currently in use The new file name is stored in a buffer which must have room for L_tmpnam characters Returns a pointer to the temporary name The file names are created in the current directory and all start with tmp At most TMP_MAX unique file names can be generated Description clearerr stream ferror stream feof stream perror s Clears the end of file and error i
116. SET 0 Initialize count Later on you can assign other values to the symbol Related information d gt EQU Set a permanent value to a symbol 3 40 Assembly Language SYMB read only Syntax SYMB string abs_expr abs_expr Description With the SYMB directive high level language symbolic debug information is passed via the assembler and linker to the debugger The SYMB is not meant for hand coded assembly files but is generated internally by the C compiler 3 41 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference TITLE Syntax TITLE title Description If you generate a list file see assembler option list file you can use the TITLE directive to specify the program title which is printed at the top of each page in the assembler list file If you use the TITLE directive without the argument the title becomes empty This is also the default The specified title is valid until the assembler encouters a new TITLE directive Example TITLE The best program In the header of each page in the assembler list file the title of the progam is printed In this case The best program Related information db PAGE Format the assembler list file Assembler option list file Generate list file in Section 4 2 Assembler Options of Chapter Tool Options 3 42 Assembly Language UNDEF Syntax UNDEF symbol Description With the UNDEF directive you can undefine a substitution strin
117. TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference TRO105 May 02 2008 Software hardware documentation and related materials Copyright 2008 Altium Limited All Rights Reserved The material provided with this notice is subject to various forms of national and international intellectual property protection including but not limited to copyright protection You have been granted a non exclusive license to use such material for the purposes stated in the end user license agreement governing its use In no event shall you reverse engineer decompile duplicate distribute create derivative works from or in any way exploit the material licensed to you except as expressly permitted by the governing agreement Failure to abide by such restrictions may result in severe civil and criminal penalties including but not limited to fines and imprisonment Provided however that you are permitted to make one archival copy of said materials for back up purposes only which archival copy may be accessed and used only in the event that the original copy of the materials is inoperable Altium Altium Designer Board Insight DXP Innovation Station LiveDesign NanoBoard NanoTalk OpenBus P CAD SimCode Situs TASKING and Topological Autorouting and their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Altium Limited or its subsidiaries All other registered or unregistered trademarks referenced herein are the property of their respective owners and no trademar
118. TSK51x TSK52x compiler tries to place some automatic variables which are used the most into registers and internal RAM extended virtual registers You can change the maximum amount of internal RAM that may be used for such local variables with the compiler option xsi ze or with the pragma extend size The default size is 4 bytes Note that these bytes can be allocated for each function These bytes are overlaid by the linker LN The static versions of the TSK51x TSK52x C library have been built with x0 d gt C compiler option x in section 4 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options 1 8 2 Initialized Variables Non automatic initialized variables use the same amount of space in both ROM and RAM for all possible RAM memory spaces This is because the initializers are stored in ROM and copied to RAM at start up This is completely transparent to the user The only exception is an initialized variable residing in ROM by means of the __ rom memory type qualifier The following examples are for the TSK51x TSK52x compiler in the large memory model int i 100 2 bytes in ROM and 2 bytes in XDATA _ rom int j 3 2 bytes in ROM char p TEXT 7 bytes in ROM and 7 bytes in XDATA 2 bytes for p 5 bytes for TEXT _ rom char HELP 5 bytes in ROM _ data char c a 1 byte in ROM and 1 byte in DATA d Section 1 3 1 Memory Type Qualifiers 1 9 Strings In this context the word
119. The make utility never removes target dependency files Related information de 4 167 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility q Command line syntax q Description With this option the make utility does not perform any tasks but only returns an exit code A zero status indicates that all target files are up to date a non zero status indicates that some or all target files are out of date Example tmk q The make utility only returns an exit code that indicates whether all target files are up to date or not It does not rebuild any files Related information J 4 168 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility r Command line syntax r Description When you call the make utility it first reads the implicit rules from the file tmk mk then it reads the makefile with the rules to build your files The file tmk mk is located in the etc directory of the toolset With this option you tell the make utility not to read tmk mk and to rely fully on the make rules in the makefile Example tmk r The make utility does not read the implicit make rules in tmk mk Related information J 4 169 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility S Command line syntax S Description With this option you cancel the effect of the option k This is only necessary in a recursive make where the option k might be inherited from the top level make via MAKEFLAGS or if you set the
120. WEOF on error FSS implementation Pushes character c back onto the input stream Returns EOF WEOF on error Put character c onto the given stream Returns EOF WEOF on error FSS implementation Same as fpuc fputwe except that is implemented as a macro FSS implementation Put character c onto the stdout stream Returns EOF WEOF on error Implemented as macro FSS implementation Writes string s to the given stream Returns EOF WEOF on error Writes string s to the stdout stream Returns EOF WEOF on error FSS implementation fread ptr size nobj stream fwrite ptr size nobj stream Random access stdio h Reads nobj members of size bytes from the given stream into the array pointed to by ptr Returns the number of elements succesfully read FSS implementation Writes nobj members of size bytes from to the array pointed to by pir to the given stream Returns the number of elements succesfully written FSS implementation Description fseek stream offset origin Sets the position indicator for stream FSS implementation When repositioning a binary file the new position origin is given by the following macros SEEK_SET 0 SEEK_CUR 1 SEEK_END 2 offset characters from the beginning of the file offset characters from the current position in the file offset characters from the end of the file Libraries ftell stream rewind stream fgetpos stream pos fsetpos stream pos
121. Z a z isblank iswblank Returns a non zero value when c is a blank character tab space isentrl iswentrl Returns a non zero value when c is a control character isdigit iswditit Returns a non zero value when c is a numeric character 0 9 isgraph iswgraph Returns a non zero value when c is printable but not a space islower iswlower Returns a non zero value when c is a lowercase character a z isprint iswprint Returns a non zero value when c is printable including spaces ispunct iswpunct Returns a non zero value when c is a punctuation character such as r isspace iswspace Returns a non zero value when c is a space type character space tab vertical tab formfeed linefeed carriage return isupper iswupper Returns a non zero value when c is an uppercase character A Z isxdigit iswxdigit Returns a non zero value when c is a hexadecimal digit O 9 A F a f tolower towlower Returns c converted to a lowercase character if it is an uppercase character otherwise c is returned toupper towupper Returns c converted to an uppercase character if it is a lowercase character otherwise c is returned _tolower Converts c to a lowercase character does not check if c really is an uppercase character Implemented as macro This macro function is not defined in ISO C99 _toupper Converts c to an uppercase character does not check if c really is a lowercase character Implemented as macro This macro fun
122. __FILE__ the TASKING C compiler supports the predefined macros as defined in the table below The macros are useful to create conditional C code Macro Description __ BIG ENDIAN__ Expands to 1 indicating the processor accesses data in big endian _ BUILD __ Identifies the build number of the compiler composed of decimal digits for the build number three digits for the major branch number and three digits for the minor branch number For example if you use build 1 22 1 of the compiler _ BUILD expands to 1022001 If there is no branch number the branch digits expand to zero For example build 127 results in 127000000 _ c51 Expands to 1 for the TSK51x TSK52x toolset otherwise unrecognized as macro __CPU__ Expands to the CPU core name option cpu cpu _ MODEL __ Identifies the memory model for which the current module is compiled For example if you compile for the small memory model the macro expands to s __REVISION __ Identifies the revision number of the compiler For example if you use version 1 0r2 of the compiler _ REVISION _ expands to 2 __ SINGLE _FP__ Expands to 1 for single precision floating point _ TASKING _ Identifies the compiler as a TASKING compiler Expands to 1 if a TASKING compiler is used __VERSION _ Identifies the version number of the compiler For example if you use version 1 0r2 of the compiler _VERSION__ expands to 1000 dot and revision number are omitted minor ve
123. _t Flags length specifier period precision and length modifier are optional the conversion character is not The conversion character must be one of the following if a character following is not in the list the behavior is undefined Character Printed as d i int signed decimal o int unsigned octal x X int unsigned hexadecimal in lowercase or uppercase respectively u int unsigned decimal c int single character converted to unsigned char s char the characters from the string are printed until a NULL character is found When the given precision is met before printing will also stop f double e E double g G double a A double n int the number of characters written so far is written into the argument This should be a pointer to an inte ger in default memory No value is printed p pointer hexadecimal 24 bit value No argument is converted a is printed Table 2 2 Printf conversion characters All arguments to the scanf related functions should be pointers to variables in default memory of the type which is specified in the format string The format string can contain 2 13 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Blanks or tabs which are skipped Normal characters not which should be matched exactly in the input stream Conversion specifications starting with a character Conversion specifications should be built as follows in order A meaning t
124. a 0x00000100 0x00000100 100 0x00000000 0 0x00000000 0 system sw xdata 0x00010000 0x0000010a 1 Ox0000fef6 99 Ox0000fef6 99 Pr rf Address range usage at memory level frm nf Total Used Free gt free gap system iram 0x00000100 0x0000002b 17 0x000000d5 83 0x000000d5 83 system xram 0x00010000 0x0000010a 1 Ox0000fef6 99 Ox0000fef6 99 system xrom 0x00010000 0x00002008 13 Ox0000dff8 87 Ox0000dff8 87 Pen nf JE III IOI ISDE TOSS ISO I IOC TIO IIE AIGIKE Linker Script File Part FEI IIIS IIIS ICIS IIIS OIC OI EAT kkk Locate Rule Part Akk k k h k kk k k k k k indica a k e k II E R E ICCC I IIIA RR IIIA Address space Type Properties Sections system sw code absolute 0x00000000 code address range 0x00000000 0x000000ff start system sw xdata clustered system sw code l l system sw code clustered system sw idata unrestricted stack system sw code unrestricted Exit _fss_break The meaning of the different parts is Processed Files Part IKK IKK KKK KKK IKK IKK K IKI KAIRIE KIKI KIB IKARIA IRA xdata xdata xdata xdata xdata xdata xdata xdata This part of the map file shows all processed files This also includes object files that are extracted from a library with the symbol that led to the extraction Link Part This part of the map file shows per object file how the link
125. a S record format Example To generate Intel Hex output files for each defined memory enter the following on the command line 1k51 chip output myfile IHEX testl obj In this case this generates the file myfile_memname hex Related information d gt Linker option output Output file Section 6 2 Motorola S Record Format Section 6 3 Inte Hex Record Format in Chapter Object File Formats 4 83 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Linker define D Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option define to the Additional linker options field Command line syntax define macro_name macro_definition Dmacro_name macro_definition Description With this option you can define a macro and specify it to the linker LSL file preprocessor If you only specify a macro name no macro definition the macro expands as 1 You can specify as many macros as you like just use the option define multiple times If the command line exceeds the limit of the operating system you can define the macros in an option file which you then must specify to the linker with the option option file file f The definition can be tested by the preprocessor with if ifdef and ifndef for conditional locating Example To define the stack size which is used in the linker script file 51 1s1 en
126. a black box So it is your responsibility to make sure that the assembly block is syntactically correct General syntax of the _ asm keyword _asm instruction_template output_param_list input_param_list register_save_list TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference instruction_template Y parm_nr regnum output_param_list input_param_list amp constraint _ char C_expression register_save_list register_name q Assembly instructions that may contain parameters from the input list or output list in the form parm_nr Parameter number in the range 0 9 With the optional regnum you can access an individual register from a register pair For example with the word register R12 0 selects register R1 amp constraint_char C_expression constraint_char C_expression Says that an output operand is written to before the inputs are read so this output must not be the same register as any input Constraint character the type of register to be used for the C_expression Any C expression For output parameters it must be an value that is something that is legal to have on the left side of an assignment register_name Name of the register you want to reserve Typical example adding two C variables using assembly __data char a b _ data int result void add2 void __asm MOV A 1 n t ADD A 2 n t MOV 30 A
127. a default library search list The library names specified in the LIL command are searched for unresolved references LI_command LI char_string char_string LX Command The LX command specifies a library to search for a named unresolved variable LX_command L X_variable char_string The paragraphs above showed the commands and operators as ASCII strings In an object file they are binary encoded The following tables show the binary representation 6 1 5 MUFOM Functions The following table lists the first byte of MUFOM elements Each value between 0 and 255 classifies the MUFOM language element that follows or it is a language element itself E g numbers outside the range 0 127 are preceded by a length field 0x82 specifies that a 2 byte integer follows OxE4 is the function code for the LR command Overview of first byte of MUFOM language elements Value Description 0x00 Ox7F Start of regular string or one byte numbers ranging 0 127 0x80 Code for omitted optional number field 0x81 0x88 Numbers outside the range 0 127 0x89 Ox8F Unused 0x90 OxAO User defined function codes OxA0 OxBF_ MUFOM function codes OxCO Unused OxC1 OxDA MUFOM letters OxDB OxDF Unused OxEO OxF9 MUFOM commands OxFA OxFF Unused Table 6 2 Overview of first byte of MUFOM language elements Binary encoding
128. a new type table entry The type number introduced by the type command can be seen as a reference index to this type The TY command defines the relation between the newly introduced type and other types that are defined in other places in the object module It also establishes a relation between a new type index and symbols N_ variable TY_command TY type_table_entry parameter type_table_entry hex_number parameter hex_number N_variable T type_table_entry Level 2 does not define the semantics of the parameters These are defined at level 3 the language layer A linkage editor which does not have knowledge of the semantics of the parameter in a type command can still perform type comparison Two types are considered to compare equal when the following conditions hold e both types have an equal number of parameters e the numeric values in the types are equal e N_variables in both types have the same name e the type entries referenced from both types compare equal Variable NO is supposed to compare equal to any other name Type table entry TO is supposed to compare equal to any other type 6 1 4 5 Value Assignment AS Command The assignment command assigns a value to a variable AS_command AS MUFOM_variable expression 6 1 4 6 Loading Commands The contents of a section is either absolute data code or relocatable data code Absolute data can be loaded with the L
129. a third C variable Registers are used for the input parameters constraint r 1 for a and 2 for b in the instruction template and memory is used for the output parameter constraint m 0 for result in the instruction template The compiler generates code to move the input expressions into the input registers and to assign the result to the output variable __data char a b _ data int result void add void __asm MR A 1 n t ADD A 2 n t MR 0 a m result r a r b void main void a 3 b 4 add2 Generated assembly code _add2 mov R0 _b mov R1 _a MOV A RO ADD A R1 MOV _result A _main mov _a 3 movx _b 4 gjmp _add2 Example 4 reserve registers Sometimes an instruction knocks out certain specific registers The most common example of this is a function call where the called function is allowed to do whatever it likes with some registers If this is the case you can list specific registers that get clobbered by an operation after the inputs Same as Example 3 but now register RO is a reserved register You can do this by adding a reserved register list RO As you can see in the generated assembly code register RO is not used the first register used is R1 _ data char a b _ data int result void add2 void __asm MOV A 1 n t ADD A 2 n t MOV 0 A m result r a r b RO C Language Generat
130. address The address is a hexadecimal number that represents the offset from the beginning of a relocatable section or the absolute address for an absolute section The address only appears on lines that generate object code 5 1 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference CODE This is the object code generated by the assembler for this source line displayed in hexadecimal format The displayed code need not be the same as the generated code that is entered in the object module The code can also be relocatable code In this case the letter r is printed for the relocatable code part in the listing For lines that allocate space the code field contains the text RESERVED For lines that initialize a buffer the code field lists one value followed by the word REPEATS CYCLES The first number in this column is the number of instruction cycles needed to execute the instruction s as generated in the CODE field The second number is the accumulated cycle count of this section LINE This column contains the line number This is a decimal number indicating each input line starting from 1 and incrementing with each source line SOURCE LINE This column contains the source text This is a copy of the source line from the assembly source file For the SET and EQU directives the ADDR and CODE columns do not apply The symbol value is listed instead Related information See section 3 6 Generating a List File in Chapter Using the Assem
131. address relative to the start of the section and places the next instruction on that address If you specify an address equal to or lower than the current position of the location counter the assembler issues an error Example SECTION code nop nop nop OFFSET 0x20 nop SECTION code nop nop nop OFFSET 0x02 nop code the assembler places this instruction at address 0x20 relative to the start of the section code WRONG the current position of the location counter is 0x03 3 33 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference PAGE Syntax PAGE width length blanktop blankbim blankleft Description If you generate a list file see assembler option list file you can use the PAGE directive to format the generated list file width Number of characters on a line 1 255 Default is 132 length Number of lines per page 10 255 Default is 66 blanktop Number of blank lines at the top of the page Default 0 Specify a value so that blanktop blankbtm lt length 10 blankbtm Number of blank lines at the bottom of the page Default 0 Specify a value so that blanktop blankbtm lt length 10 blankleft Number of blank columns at the left of the page Default 0 Specify a value smaller than width If you use the PAGE directive without arguments it causes a formfeed the next source line is printed on the next page in the list file You can omit an argument by u
132. address for interrupt vectors db See C compiler option vector offset in section 4 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options novector Do not generate interrupt vectors and reference to interrupt handler in run time library db See C compiler option novector in section 4 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options C Language warning number With this pragma you can disable warning messages If you do not specify a warning number all warnings will be suppressed db See also C compiler option no warnings w weak symbol Mark a symbol as weak weak assembler directive The symbol must have external linkage which means a global or external object or function A static symbol cannot be declared weak A weak external reference is resolved by the linker when a global or weak definition is found in one of the object files However a weak reference will not cause the extraction of a module from a library to resolve the reference When a weak external reference cannot be resolved the null pointer is substituted A weak definition can be overruled by a normal global definition The linker will not complain about the duplicate definition and ignore the weak definition d gt See assembler directive WEAK in Section 3 8 2 Assembler Directives in Chapter Assembly Language 1 7 Predefined Preprocessor Macros In addition to the predefined macros required by the ISO C standard such as ___ DATE __ and
133. ade relative to the R variable Linking is accomplished by assigning a new value to R The R variable consists of the letter R followed by an section index which is a hexadecimal number The section index must have been defined with an ST command The default value of an unassigned R variable is 0 S The S type variable is the section size in MAUs for a section There is one S variable per section The S is followed by an section index An S variable is created by its first assignment W Work variable This type of variable can be used to assign values to which can be used in following MUFOM commands They serve the purpose of maintaining values in a workspace without any additional meaning A work variable consists of the letter W followed by a hexadecimal number W variables are created by their first assignment Object File Formats X An X type variable refers to an external reference X variables cannot have a value assigned to it An X variable consists of the letter X followed by a hexadecimal number The MUFOM language uses the following data types to form expressions digit 0 ae rop 3 4 5 6 277 go 9 hex_letter wA 4B 20r 2p Se a hex_digit digit hex_letter hex_number hex_digit nonhex_letter G PH PP J PPR PE PM PN O P pP PR PS PT UV pP WW X PY PZ letter hex_letter
134. ah A geen tne ac ee 3 4 3 6 3 Expression Operators vis es wees feat be a a E deed denarii die daa n de wee cane 3 4 3 7 Built in Assembly Functions 0 0 cece eee eee tenets 3 5 3 7 1 Overview of Built in Assembly Functions 00 0 cece cece eens 3 5 3 7 2 Detailed Description of Built in Assembly Functions 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 3 6 3 8 Assembler Directives ca tic wise gadadiocad ined ee eda ene Lea poke a Mav a E 3 8 3 8 1 Overview of Assembler Directives 0 es 3 8 3 8 2 Detailed Description of Assembler Directives 0 0 c cee eens 3 10 3 9 Macro Operations v 2 08008ca vedur a led isda abe apie ducin E a E EE A ek bed healed 3 45 3 9 1 Detining IMAGO oss eceieeyusid acted ence kanuni dota eho anata a Wem aa ete dee indie 3 45 3 9 2 Calling a Macro ss risidrer agiriren bay thee pga ted Midas A TE EBENE EA saa tad 3 45 3 9 3 Using Operators for Macro Arguments 0 eect eee eee eens 3 46 3 9 4 Using the FOR and REPEAT Directives as Macros 00 0c cece eee eee eee 3 48 3 9 5 Conditional Assembly spesse cirera arnese card can Een E ERD E Sed hewn pandas 3 49 3 10 Generic INStIrUC NS ieceri epee n kiena a be ed e a e aa a a Eaa 3 50 Tool Options 4 1 4 1 C Compiler Options sisarena canir a eie EE AAEE EE aed OERA 4 1 4 2 Assembler Options srrerrisnsac ineei e EE E E A E otk deo Mi han ek 4 55 4 3 Linker Options s2 cs a degeoate gene i nn a ek e EEE a T A E a aa iA
135. all bytes following the record type is OFFH S1 record With the linker option ofilename SREC 2 the actual program code and data is supplied with S1 records with the following layout S 1 lt length_byte gt lt address gt lt code bytes gt lt checksum_byte gt This record is used for 2 byte addresses Example 1130250F03EF04DFOACE8A408A2A013EDFCDBO0E6 _ checksum _ code _ address _ length The linker has an option that controls the length of the output buffer for generating S1 records The default buffer length is 32 code bytes The checksum calculation of S1 records is identical to SO S2 record With the linker option ofilename SREC 3 the actual program code and data is supplied with S2 records with the following layout S 2 lt length_byte gt lt address gt lt code bytes gt lt checksum_byte gt This record is used for 3 byte addresses Example S 213FF002000232222754E00754F04AF4FAE4E22BF _ checksum _ code _ address _ length The linker has an option that controls the length of the output buffer for generating S2 records The default buffer length is 32 code bytes 6 13 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference The checksum calculation of S2 records is identical to SO S3 record With the linker option ofilename SREC 4 which is the default the actual program code and data is supplied with S3 records with the following layout S
136. all depth 4 24 madptr 4 25 misrac 4 26 misrac advisory warnings 4 27 misrac required warnings 4 27 model 4 29 no warnings 4 35 noclear 4 30 noframe 4 31 noregaddr 4 32 nostdinc 4 33 novector 4 34 optimize 4 36 option file 4 38 output 4 39 preprocess 4 40 reentrant 4 43 rename sections 4 41 romstrings 4 44 signed bitfields 4 45 source 4 46 static 4 47 stdout 4 48 tradeoff 4 49 uchar 4 50 undefine 4 51 vector offset 4 52 version 4 53 warnings as errors 4 54 A 4 22 b 4 3 C 4 6 c 4 20 D 4 9 E 4 40 f 4 38 g 4 8 H 4 16 l 4 15 k 4 21 M 4 29 m 4 25 n 4 48 O 4 36 0 4 39 R 4 41 S 4 44 S 4 46 t 4 49 U 4 51 u 4 50 V 4 53 w 4 35 xX 4 13 code generation 4 31 4 32 4 34 4 44 4 52 debug information 4 8 diagnostics 4 35 4 54 language 4 19 4 20 4 22 4 45 4 50 memory model 4 29 4 43 MISRA C 4 26 optimization 4 36 4 49 preprocessing 4 9 4 16 4 40 4 51 C style comments 4 22 Call graph 3 13 calloc 2 6 2 18 calls 3 13 cast 3 6 cbrt functions 2 8 ceil functions 2 8 chdir 2 22 Check source code 4 5 4 57 4 117 clear noclear 1 12 clearerr 2 17 clock 2 21 clock_t 2 20 CLOCKS_PER_SEC 2 21 close 2 22 cnt 3 6 Code compaction 4 17 4 24 Command file 4 165 Comment 3 1 Comments 7 3 compactmaxmatch 1 12 compiler optio
137. ame refers to a defined address space 7 8 Linker Script Language start_addr start_address start_addr_descr lt start_addr_descr gt gt start_addr_descr run_addr expr symbol symbol_name e Asymbol_name refers to the section that contains the startup code vector table statement vector_table section_name vecttab_spec lt vecttab_spec gt lt vector_def gt vecttab_spec vector size expr size expr id_symbol_ prefix symbol_name run_addr addr_absolute template section_name template_symbol symbol name vector prefix section_name fill vector value no_inline copy vector def vector vector_spec lt vector_spec gt vector spec id vector_id_spec fill vector_value vector_id_spec number range lt range gt 9 vector value symbol_name number lt number gt loop lt expr gt l reserved_range reserved expr expr endianness_ def endianness lt endianness_type gt 1 endianness_type big little 7 3 9 Derivative Definition derivative _definition derivative derivative_name lt parameter list gt 9 1 lt extends derivative_name lt argument_list gt 1 gt 0 1 lt derivative_spec gt e Aderivative_definition defines a derivative with the given derivative_name as a unique name derivative_spec core def bus_def mem_def section_definition
138. and number are the same register Table 1 4 Available input output operand constraints TSK51x TSK52x Loops and conditional jumps The compiler does not detect loops that are coded with multiple __asm statements or conditional jumps across _ asm statements and will generate incorrect code for the registers involved If you want to create a loop with __ asm the whole loop must be contained ina single __asm statement The same counts for conditional jumps As a rule of thumb all references to a labelinan__ asm statement must be contained in the same statement Example 1 no input or output A simple example without input or output parameters You can use any instruction or label Note that you can use standard C escape sequences __asm nop n t ow nop m Generated code nop nop Example 2 using output parameters Assign the result of inline assembly to a variable A register is chosen for the parameter because of the constraint r the compiler decides which register is best to use The 0 in the instruction template is replaced with the name of this register Finally the compiler generates code to assign the result to the output variable _ data char out void main void __asm mov 0 0xff r out Generated assembly code mov R0 0xff mov _out RO TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Example 3 using input and output parameters Add two C variables and assign the result to
139. ar 0x88 ITO __bsfr _ bitstruct_t 0x88 _ b0 IEO __bsfr _ bitstruct_t 0x88 _ bl Example of access to the SFR PO 0x PO 0 56 IEO Because the special function registers are dealing with I O it is incorrect to optimize away the access to them Therefore the compiler deals with the special function registers as if they were declared with the volatile qualifier Non initialized global SFR variables are not cleared at startup For example _ sfr i nt i global SFR not cleared TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference It is not allowed to initialize global SFR variables SFR variables are not initialized at startup For example __sfr int j 10 not allowed to initialize global SFR db See also C compiler option cpu Use SFR definitions for CPU in section C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options 1 3 3 Placing an Object at an Absolute Address __at Just like you can declare a variable in a specific part of memory using memory type qualifiers you can also place an object at an absolute address in memory This may be useful to interface with other programs using fixed memory schemes or to access special function registers With the attribute __at you can specify an absolute address Examples unsigned char Display 80 24 _at 0x2000 The array Display is placed at address 0x2000 In the generated assembly an absolute section is created On this position space is reserved for the va
140. arnings to suppress field or enter the following on the command line as51 test srce no warnings 135 136 Related information db Assembler option warnings as errors Treat warnings as errors 4 70 Tool Options Assembler Assembler optimize O Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Optimization 3 Enable or disable the optimization options e Generic instructions e Jump chains e Instruction size Command line syntax Oflags optimize flags You can set the following flags generics g G Allow generic instructions jumpchains j J Jump chains instr size s S Optimize instruction size Default optimize gJs Description Allow generic instructions If you use generic instructions in your assembly source the assembler can optimize them by replacing it with the fastest or shortest possible variant of that instruction By default this option is enabled If you turn off this optimization the assembler generates an error on generic instructions Be aware that the compiler also generates generic instructions Jump chains With this optimization the assembler replaces chained jumps by a single jump instruction For example a jump from a to b immediately followed by a jump from b to c is replaced by a jump from a to c Optimize instruction size With this optimization the assembler tries
141. ars 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option user provided initialization code to the Additional linker options field Command line syntax user provided initialization code i Description It is possible to use your own initialization code for example to save ROM space With this option you tell the linker not to generate a copy table for initialize clear sections Use linker labels in your source code to access the positions of the sections when located If the linker detects references to the TASKING initialization code an error is emitted it is either the TASKING initialization routine or your own not both Note that the options no rom copy and non romable may vary independently The copytable compression optimization optimize t is automatically disabled when you enable this option Related information i 4 111 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Linker verbose v extra verbose vv Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option verbose or extra verbose to the Additional linker options field Command line syntax verbose extra verbose v vv Description With this option you put the linker in verbose mode The linker prints the link phases while it processes the files In the extra verbose mode the linker al
142. artinline you can temporarily disable this optimization With the C compiler options inline max incr and inline max size you have more control over the automatic function inlining process of the compiler See for more information the C compiler options inline max iner and inline max size in section 4 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options macro nomacro Turns macro expansion on or off By default macro expansion is enabled maxcalldepth value Control the maximum call depth By default the maximum is infinite 1 d gt See C compiler option max call depth in section 4 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options message message Print the message string s on standard output optimize flags endoptimize You can overrule the compiler option O for the code between the pragmas optimize and endoptimize The pragma works the same as compiler option O See section 2 6 Compiler Optimizations in Chapter Using the Compiler in the user s manual See C compiler option optimize O in section 4 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options page nopage Align or do not align code sections on a 256 page boundary ramstring Allocate strings in ROM and RAM The strings are copied to RAM at startup romstring Same as compiler option source S Allocate strings in ROM only 1 13 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference db See C compiler option source S in section 4 1 C
143. as the same value as the previous time the function returned because it may have been overlaid with another automatic variable of another module Whereas the values of variables declared with the keyword static are the same as the previous time the function returned static variables are never overlaid Example void f_static void this function is by default _ static _ reentrant int f reentrant void int i variable i is placed on a virtual stack db C compiler option reentrant in section 4 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options of the reference manual 1 11 2 Parameter Passing A lot of execution time of an application is spent transferring parameters between functions The fastest parameter transport is via registers Therefore function parameters are first passed via registers If no more registers are available for a parameter the compiler pushes parameters on the stack for the TSK51x TSK52x compiler a static or reentrant stack depending on the ___reentrant function qualifier See the table below Parameter Type Parameter Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 __bit Bool B O B 1 B 2 B 3 B 4 B 5 B 6 B 7 char R7 R5 R3 R6 R4 R2 8 bit struct R7 R5 R3 R6 R4 R2 8 bit pointer to data bdata idata R7 R5 R3 R6 R4 R2 pdata sfr bsfr bit short int R67 R45 R23 16 bit struct R67 R45 R23 16 bit pointer to xdata rom code R67 R45 R23 long R4567 float R4567 32 bit struct R4567
144. at 2 22 Statement 3 1 stderr 2 12 stdin 2 12 stdout 2 12 Storage types 1 3 strcat 2 19 3 7 strchr 2 20 strcmp 2 20 3 7 strcoll 2 20 strcpy 2 19 strespn 2 20 strerror 2 20 strftime 2 21 Strings C 1 16 substring 3 4 strlen 3 8 strncat 2 19 strncmp 2 20 strncpy 2 19 strpbrk 2 20 strpos 3 8 strrchr 2 20 strspn 2 20 strstr 2 20 strtod 2 18 strtof 2 18 strtoimax 2 5 strtok 2 20 strtol 2 18 strtold 2 18 strtoll 2 18 strtoul 2 18 strtoull 2 18 strtoumax 2 5 Structure tags 1 4 strxfrm 2 20 Substring 3 4 Switch method 1 14 switch statement 1 18 swoprintf 2 15 swscanf 2 15 symb 3 41 Symbol names 3 2 Syntax error checking 4 5 4 57 4 117 Syntax of an expression 3 3 system 2 18 T tan functions 2 6 tanh functions 2 7 tgamma functions 2 9 time 2 21 time_t 2 20 Index TIOF 6 1 title 3 42 tm struct 2 21 TMP_MAX 2 12 tmpfile 2 17 tmpnam 2 17 tolower 2 2 toupper 2 2 towctrans 2 24 towlower 2 2 2 24 towupper 2 2 2 24 tradeoff 1 14 Transferring parameters between functions 1 19 trunc functions 2 8 Typedef 1 4 U undef 3 43 ungetc 2 16 ungetwc 2 16 unlink 2 23 Using assembly in C source 1 7 V va_arg 2 10 va_copy 2 10 va_end 2 10 va_start 2 10 Variables 1 16 automatic 1 16 initialized 1 16 Vector table 7 17 vector_offset 1 14 Version information 4 174 4 186 vfprintf 2 15 vfscanf 2 15 vfwprintf 2 15 v
145. bler of the user s manual for more information on how to generate a list file and specify the amount of list file information 5 2 List File Formats 5 2 Linker Map File Format The linker map file is an additional output file of the linker that shows how the linker has mapped the sections and symbols from the various object files obj to output sections The locate part shows the absolute position of each section External symbols are listed per space with their absolute address both sorted on symbol and sorted on address With the linker option map file format map file formatting you can specify which parts of the map file you want to see Example part of linker map file FEI ICICI III ICICI IGS ICIS OIC CATHIE Brocessed Files Part 2a Kk dhk i kk k k a anni cI a IIIS CI I A k A R R A R A RIO IIR RR K a File From archive Symbol causing the extraction cstart obj c511s 1ib __start hello obj printf obj c511s 1ib _overlay_ printf a FE ISI IIIS III IDI OIG OIG IOI EIA k Tn Rat ap agaidaniciniaaidiniaii ining a anc a IIIS ICICI CIS I ICICI IIIA RR K K in File in Section in Size out Offset out Section out Size hello obj code 0x00000028 0x00000000 code 0x00000028 SS SS cstart obj code 0x00000003 0x00000000 code 0x00000003 SSS printf obj code 0x0000002d 0x00000000 code 0x0000002d toon 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
146. build a demo program and a real program ifdef DEMO the value of DEMO is of no importance real abs demo obj main obj 1k51 demo obj main obj d51 1sl lc5lss lfp51lss lrt51 else real abs real obj main obj 1k51 real obj main obj d51 1sl lc5lss lfp5l1lss lrt51 endif You can now use a macro definition to set the DEMO flag tmk real abs DEMO 1 In both cases the absolute object file real abs is created but depending on the DEMO flag it is linked with demo obj or with real obj Related information Make utility option e Environment variables override macro definitions Make utility option m Name of invocation file 4 152 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility Command line syntax Description Displays an overview of all command line options Example The following invocation displays a list of the available command line options tmk Related information i 4 153 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility a Command line syntax a Description Normally the make utility rebuilds only those files that are out of date With this option you tell the make utility to rebuild all files without checking whether they are out of date Example tmk a Rebuilds all your files regardless of whether they are out of date or not Related information J 4 154 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility c Command line syntax c Description Altium Designer uses th
147. bute readable sections writable sections executable code sections initialized sections scratch sections blanked cleared sections oN ry x EK group_load_address load_addr lt load_or_run_addr gt page lt expr gt 0 1 page_size expr lt range lt range gt gt 0 gt 0 1 group_page group_run_address run_addr lt load_or_run_addr gt 1 group _type clustered contiguous ordered overlay e For non contiguous groups you can only specify group_alignment and attributes e The overlay keyword also sets the contiguous property e The clustered property cannot be set together with contiguous or ordered on a single group load_or_run_addr addr_absolute addr_range lt addr_range gt addr_absolute 2 expr memory_reference expr e An absolute address can only be set on ordered groups addr_range expr expr memory_reference memory_reference expr expr e The parent of a group with an addr_range or page restriction cannot be ordered contiguous or clustered memory_reference mem lt proc_name gt 0 1 lt core_name gt 0 1 mem_name e Aproc_name refers to a defined processor e Acore_name refers to a defined core e Amem_name refers to a defined memory if_ statement if expr section_statement lt else section_statement gt 1 section_creation_statement section section_name section_specs lt section_
148. by pwcs See also mbsrtowcs in section 2 2 27 wchar h Converts a sequence of wide characters in the array pointed to by pwcs into multi byte charac ters and stores at most n multi byte characters into the string pointed to by s See also wcsrtowmb in section 2 2 27 wchar h 2 2 24 string h and wehar h This header file provides numerous functions for manipulating strings By convention strings in C are arrays of characters with a terminating null character Most functions therefore take arguments of type char However many functions have also parallel wide character functions which take arguments of type wchar_t These functions are declared in wchar h Copying and concatenation functions stdio h wehar h Description memcpy sl s2 n memmove sl1 s2 n strcpy sl1 s2 strncpy sl s2 n strcat sl1 s2 strncat sl s2 n wmemcpy s1 s2 n Copies n characters from s2 into s1 and returns s1 If s1 and s2 overlap the result is undefined wmemmove sl1 s2 n Same as memcpy but overlapping strings are handled correctly Returns s1 wcscpy s1 s2 Copies s2 into s1 and returns s1 If s1 and s2 overlap the result is undefined wesncpy s1 s2 n Copies not more than n characters from s2 into s7 and returns s7 If s1 and s2 overlap the result is undefined wescat s1 s2 Appends a copy of s2 to s7 and returns s7 If s7 and s2 overlap the result is undefined wesncat
149. c51 define DEMO 1 test c Note that both invocations have the same effect The next example shows how to define a macro with arguments Note that the macro name and definition are placed between double quotes because otherwise the spaces would indicate a new option cc51 D MAX A B A gt B A B test c Related information Control Program option undefine Undefine preprocessor macro Control Program option option file Read options from file 4 121 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Control Program diag Command line syntax diag format all nr Description With this option you can ask for an extended description of error messages in the format you choose The output is directed to stdout normally your screen and in the format you specify You can specify the following formats html rtf or text default To create a file with the descriptions you must redirect the output With the suboption all the descriptions of all error messages are given If you want the description of one or more selected error messages you can specify the error message numbers separated by commas With this option the control program does not process any files Example To display an explanation of message number 103 enter cc51 diag 103 This results in message 103 with explanation To write an explanation of all errors and warnings in HTML format to file ccerrors html1 enter cc51 diag html all
150. case insensitive Labels symbols directive arguments and literal strings are case sensitive The syntax of an assembly statement is label instruction directive macro_call comment label A label is a special symbol which is assigned the value and type of the current program location counter A label can consist of letters digits and underscore characters _ The first character cannot be a digit A label which is prefixed by whitespace spaces or tabs has to be followed by a colon The size of an identifier is only limited by the amount of available memory Examples LAB1 This label is followed by a colon and can be prefixed by whitespace LAB1 This label has to start at the beginning of a line instruction An instruction consists of a mnemonic and zero one or more operands It must not start in the first column Operands are described in section 3 3 Operands of an Assembly Instruction The instructions are described in the target s Core Reference Manual The instruction can also be a so called generic instruction Generic instructions are pseudo instructions no instructions from the instruction set Depending on the situation in which a generic instruction is used the assembler replaces the generic instruction with appropriate real assembly instruction s For a complete list see section 3 10 Generic Instructions directive With directives you can control the assembler from within the assembly sour
151. cation The effect of this option is that the compiler includes the appropriate special function register file regcpu sfr You choose one of the following CPU s TSK51A TSK52A or TSK52B Assembly code can check the value of the option by means of the built in function CPU Example To build the file test c for the TSK51x TSK52x processor and use SFR file regtsk51la sfr cc51 cpu tsk5la test c Related information C compiler option cpu Select CPU core type Assembler option cpu Select CPU core type 4 118 Tool Options Control Program Control Program create cl cm co cs Command line syntax create siage c stage You can specify the following stages if you omit the stage the default is create object relocatable I Stop after the files are linked to a linker object file out mil m Stop after C files are compiled to MIL mil object 0 Stop after the files are assembled to objects obj assembly s Stop after C files are compiled to assembly src Description Normally the control program generates an absolute object file of the specified output format from the file you supplied as input With this option you tell the control program to stop after a certain number of phases Related information d Linker option link only Link only no locating 4 119 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Control Program debug info g Command line syntax debu
152. ccessing data in internal RAM is considerably faster than accessing data in external RAM In the large memory model the produced code is larger and in some cases slower than the code for a similar operation in one of the other memory models The auxiliary page memory model is especially interesting for derivatives with 256 bytes of external RAM on chip All data must fit in one 256 bytes page Related information db Optionally you can choose to enable reentrancy with control program option reentrant Section 1 4 Memory Models in chapter C Language 4 136 Tool Options Control Program Control Program no default libraries Command line syntax no default libraries Description By default the control program specifies the standard C libraries C99 and run time library to the linker With this option you tell the control program not to specify the standard C libraries and run time library to the linker In this case you must specify the libraries you want to link to the linker with the option I ibrary_name The control program recognizes the option I as an option for the linker and passes it as such Example cc51 no default libraries test c The control program does not specify any libraries to the linker In normal cases this would result in unresoved externals To specify your own libraries Libmy a and avoid unresolved externals cc51 no default libraries lmy test c Related information d gt L
153. ce Except for preprocessing directives these must not start in the first column Directives are described in section 3 8 Assembler Directives macro_call A call to a previously defined macro It must not start in the first column See section 3 9 Macro Operations comment Comment preceded by a semicolon You can use empty lines or lines with only comments 3 1 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 3 2 Assembler Significant Characters You can use all ASCII characters in the assembly source both in strings and in comments Also the extended characters from the ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 set are allowed Some characters have a special meaning to the assembler Special characters associated with expression evaluation are described in section 3 6 3 Expression Operators Other special assembler characters are Character Description Start of a comment Line continuation character or Macro operator argument concatenation Macro operator return decimal value of a symbol v Macro operator return hex value of a symbol Macro operator override local label j Macro string delimiter or Quoted string DEFINE expansion character z String constants delimiter Start of a built in assembly function Location counter substitution Substring delimiter Immediate addressing TSK51x TSK52x Note that macro operators have a higher precedence than expression operators 3
154. cess the make utility encounters an error it stops rebuilding your files With the option k the make utility only stops building the target that produced the error All other targets defined in the makefile are built Example tmk k If the make utility encounters an error it stops building the current target but proceeds with the other targets that are defined in the makefile Related information db Make utility option S Undo the effect of k 4 164 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility m Command line syntax m file Description Instead of typing all options on the command line you can create an option file which contains all options and flags you want to specify With this option you specify the option file to the make utility Use an option file when the command line would exceed the limits of the operating system or just to store options and save typing You can specify the option m multiple times Format of an option file Multiple arguments on one line in the option file are allowed To include whitespace in an argument surround the argument with single or double quotes If you want to use single quotes as part of the argument surround the argument by double quotes and vise versa This has a single quote embedded This has a double quote embedded This has a double quote and a single quote embedded When a text line reaches its length limit use a to contin
155. chip memory to any derivative you need to map the off chip memory to a bus and map that bus on the internal bus of the derivative you want to connect it to 7 23 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 7 8 Semantics of the Section Setup Definition Keywords in the section setup definition section_setup stack min_size grows low_to_high high _to_low align fixed id heap min_size grows low_to_high high _to_low align fixed id vector _ table vector size size id_symbol_ prefix run_addr template template_symbol vector prefix fill no_inline copy vector id 1IL loop reserved 7 8 1 Setting up a Section With the keyword section_setup you can define stacks heaps vector tables and or reserved address ranges outside their address space definition section_setup my_space vector table statements reserved address range stack definition heap definition See the subsections Stacks and heaps Vector table and Reserved address ranges in section 7 5 3 Defining Address Spaces for details on the keywords stack heap vector_table and reserved 7 24 Linker Script Language 7 9 Semantics of the Section Layout Definition Keywords in the section layout definition section_layout direction low_to_high high _to_low group align attributes rwxbis copy nocopy gali ordered contiguous clustered overlay allow cross_references load_addr mem run addr mem page page_size priority select stack siz
156. claration Unions shall not be used to access the sub parts of larger types A violation is reported for a union containing a struct member bit fields shall have type unsigned int or signed int bit fields of type signed int shall be at least 2 bits long All struct union members shall be named Reserved and standard library names shall not be redefined Standard library function names shall not be reused Production libraries shall comply with the MISRA C restrictions The validity of library function parameters shall be checked Dynamic heap memory allocation shall not be used The error indicator errno shall not be used The macro offsetof shall not be used lt locale h gt and the setlocale function shall not be used The setjmp and longjmp functions shall not be used The signal handling facilities of lt signal h gt shall not be used The lt stdio h gt library shall not be used in production code The functions atof atoi atol shall not be used The functions abort exit getenv system shall not be used The time handling functions of library lt time h gt shall not be used Gls See also section 2 7 C Code Checking MISRA C in Chapter Using the Compiler of the User s manual 8 4 MISRA C Rules 8 2 MISRA C 2004 This section lists all supported and unsupported MISRA C 2004 rules d gt See also section 2 7 C Code Checking MISRA C in Chapter Using the Compiler of the User s
157. conversion stdlib h wehar h float strtof s endp float westof s endp double strtod s endp double westod s endp long double strtold s endp long double wcstold s endp The following functions convert the initial portion of the string s to a long long long unsigned long and unsigned long long respectively Base specifies the radix endp will point to the first character not used by the conversion stdlib h wchar h long strtol s endp base long westol s endp base long long strtoll s endp base long long westoll s endp base unsigned long strtoul s endp base unsigned long wcstoul s endp base unsigned long long unsigned long long strtoull s endp base westoull s endp base Random number generation rand Returns a pseudo random integer in the range 0 to RAND_MAX srand seed Same as rand but uses seed for a new sequence of pseudo random numbers Memory management malloc size Allocates space for an object with size size The allocated space is not initialized Returns a pointer to the allocated space calloc nobj size Allocates space for n objects with size size The allocated space is initialized with zeros Returns a pointer to the allocated space free ptr Deallocates the memory space pointed to by ptr which should be a pointer earlier returned by the malloc or calloc function realloc ptr size Deallocates the old object pointed to by ptr and returns a pointer to a niew
158. cording to the results of the function pointed to by cmp Returns a pointer to the matching member in the array or NULL when not found This function sorts an array of n members using the quick sort algorithm The initial base of the array is given by base The size of each member is specified by size The array is sorted in as cending order according to the results of the function pointed to by cmp Compute the absolute value of an int long int and long long intj resepectively Compute x y and x y in a single operation X and y have respectively type int long int and long long int The result is stored in the members quot and remof struct div_t ldiv_t and 11div_t which have the same types Multibyte wide character and string conversions mblen s n mbtowc pwc s n wctomb s wc mbstowcs pwcs s n westombs s pwcs n Determines the number of bytes in the multi byte character pointed to by s At most n characters will be examined See also mbr1len in section 2 2 27 wchar h Converts the multi byte character in s to a wide character code and stores it in pwc At most n characters will be examined Converts the wide character wc into a multi byte representation and stores it in the string pointed to by s At most MB_CUR_MAX characters are stored Converts a sequence of multi byte characters in the string pointed to by s into a sequence of wide characters and stores at most n wide characters into the array pointed to
159. cro C compiler option option file Read options from file Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler diag Menu entry 1 From the View menu select Workspace Panels System Messages The Message pannel appears 2 In the Message panel right click on the message you want more information on A popup menu appears 3 Select More Info A Message Info box appears with additional information Command line syntax diag format all nr Description With this option you can ask for an extended description of error messages in the format you choose The output is directed to stdout normally your screen and in the format you specify You can specify the following formats html rtf or text default To create a file with the descriptions you must redirect the output With the suboption all the descriptions of all error messages are given If you want the description of one or more selected error messages you can specify the error message numbers separated by commas With this option the compiler does not compile any files Example To display an explanation of message number 282 enter c51 diag 282 This results in the following message and explanation E282 unterminated comment Make sure that every comment starting with has a matching Nested comments are not possible To write an explanation of all errors and warnings in HTML format to file cerrors html use redirection and enter c51 diag ht
160. ction by name you can use a wildcard pattern ane matches with all section names 2 matches with a single character in the section name N takes the next character literally abc matches with a single a b or c character a z matches with any single character in the range a to 2 group select mysection select The first select statement selects the section with the name mysection The second select statement selects all sections that were not selected yet A section is selected by the first select statement that matches in the union of all section layouts for the address space Global section layouts are processed in the order in which they appear in the LSL file Internal core architecture section layouts always take precedence over global section layouts e The attributes field selects all sections that carry or do not carry the given attribute With attribute you select sections that have the specified attribute set With attribute you select sections that do not have the specified attribute set You can specify one or more of the following attributes r readable sections w writable sections 7 26 Linker Script Language executable sections initialized sections sections that should be cleared at program startup no rf mw scratch sections not cleared and not initialized To select all read only sections group select
161. ction is not defined in ISO C99 isascii Returns a non zero value when c is in the range of 0 and 127 This function is not defined in ISO C99 toascii Converts c to an ASCII value strip highest bit This function is not defined in ISO C99 2 2 Libraries 2 2 4 errno h int errno External variable that holds implementation defined error codes The following error codes are defined as macros in errno h EPERM 1 Not owner ENOENT 2 No such file or directory EINTR 3 Interrupted system call EIO 4 I O error EBADF 5 Bad file number EAGAIN 6 No more processes ENOMEM 7 Not enough core EACCES 8 Permission denied EFAULT 9 Bad address EEXIST 10 File exists ENOTDIR 11 Not a directory EISDIR 12 Is a directory EINVAL 13 Invalid argument ENFILE 14 File table overflow EMFILE 15 Too many open files ETXTBSY 16 Text file busy ENOSPC 17 No space left on device ESPIPE 18 Illegal seek EROFS 19 Read only file system EPIPE 20 Broken pipe ELOOP 21 Too many levels of symbolic links ENAMETOOLONG 22 File name too long Floating point errors EDOM 23 Argument too large ERANGE 24 Result too large Errors returned by prinff scanf ERR_FORMAT 25 Illegal format string for printf scanf ERR_NOFLOAT 26 Floating point not supported ERR_NOLONG 27 Long not supported ERR_NOPOINT 28 Pointers not supported Encoding error stored in errno by functions like fgetwc getwc mbrtowc etc EILSEQ 29 Invalid or incomplete multibyte or wide charact
162. ction translation This part of the map file shows the absolute position of each section in the absolute object file It is organized per address space memory chip and group and sorted on space address Space The names of the address spaces as defined in the linker script file 1s1 The names are constructed of the derivative name followed by a colon the core name another colon and the space name Chip The names of the memory chips as defined in the linker script file 1s1 in the memory definitions Group Sections can be ordered in groups These are the names of the groups as defined in the linker script file 1s1 with the keyword group in the section_layout definition The name that is displayed is the name of the deepest nested group Section The name of the section Names within square brackets will be copied during initialization from ROM to the corresponding section name in RAM Size MAU The size of the section in minimum addressable units Space addr The absolute address of the section in the address space Chip addr The absolute offset of the section from the start of a memory chip Locate Part Symbol translation This part of the map file lists all external symbols per address space name both sorted on address and sorted on symbol name Name The name of the symbol Address The absolute address of the symbol in the address space Space The names of the address spaces as defined in the linker script f
163. ctives are not translated into machine instructions but can produce data There are three types of assembler directives e Assembler directives that tell the assembler how to go about translating instructions into machine code This is the most typical form of assembly directives Typically they tell the assembler where to put a program in memory what space to allocate for variables and allow you to initialize memory with data When the assembly source is assembled a location counter in the assembler keeps track of where the code and data is to go in memory The following directives fall under this group Assembly control directives Symbol definition directives Data definition Storage allocation directives HLL directives e Directives that are interpreted by the macro preprocessor These directives tell the macro preprocessor how to manipulate your assembly code before it is actually being assembled You can use these directives to write macros and to write conditional source code Parts of the code that do not match the condition will not be assembled at all Unlike other directives preprocesssor directives can start in the first column e Some directives act as assembler options and most of them indeed do have an equivalent assembler command line option The advantage of using a directive is that with such a directive you can overrule the assembler option for a particular part of the code A typical example is to tell the assembler wi
164. ctor consisting of an instruction jumping to the interrupt function You can suppress this with the compiler option novector or the pragma novector The difference between a normal function and an interrupt function is that an interrupt function ends with a RETI instruction instead of a RET instruction and that all registers that might possibly be corrupted during the execution of the interrupt function are saved on function entry this is called the interrupt frame and restored on function exit C compiler option novector Do not generate interrupt vectors in section 4 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options of the reference manual Specify another vector offset For certain ROM monitors it is necessary to specify an offset for all interrupt vectors For this you can use the command vector offset va ue Suppose a ROM monitor has the interrupt table at offset Ox4000 When you compile with vector of fset 0x4000 interrupt vector 1 vector address 11 is being located at address 0x400B instead of OxB C compiler option vector offset Specify a 16 bit offset address for interrupt vectors in section 4 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options of the reference manual 1 24 C Language 1 11 6 2 Interrupt Frame _ frame With the function type qualifier frame can specify which registers and SFRs must be saved for a particular interrupt function Only the specified registers will be pushed and popped from the stack If
165. current floating point status flags Not implemented fetestexcept Returns the bitwise OR of the exception macros corresponding to the exception flags which are current ly set and are specified in the argument Not implemented For each supported exception a macro is defined The following exceptions are defined FE_DIVBYZERO FE_INEXACT FE_ INVALID FE_OVERFLOW FE_UNDERFLOW FE_ALL EXCEPT fegetround Returns the current rounding direction represented as one of the values of the rounding direction mac ros Not implemented fesetround Sets the current rounding directions Not implemented Currently no rounding mode macros are implemented 2 2 7 float h The header file float h defines the characteristics of the real floating point types float double and long double AN Float h used to contain prototypes for the functions copysign f isinf f isfinite f isnan f and scalb f These functions have accordingly to the ISO C99 standard been moved to the header file math h See also section 2 2 15 math h and tgmath h 2 2 8 fss h The header file ss h contains definitions for the debugger s file system simulation FSS This header file is not defined in ISO c99 fss h Description _fss_break void Buffer and breakpoint functions for the debugger Opens file descriptors O stdin 1 stdout and 2 stderr and associates them with terminal sere ed eee window Fss 0 of the debugger 2 4 Libraries 2 2 9 intt
166. d unless the nested switch is implemented in a separate function which is preceded by a different switch pragma Example place pragma before function body pragma jump switch void test unsigned char val function containing the switch switch val use jump table C Language 1 11 Functions 1 11 1 Reentrant Functions For the TSK51x TSK52x functions in C can either be static or reentrant In static functions parameters and automatic variables are not allocated on a stack but in a static area Reentrant functions use a less efficient virtual dynamic stack which allows you to call functions recursively With reentrancy you can call functions at any time even from interrupt functions The compiler can overlay parameters and automatics of static functions but not of reentrant functions You can use the function qualifiers staticor reentrant to specify a function as static or reentrant respectively If you do not specify a function qualifier the TSK51x TSK52x compiler assumes that those functions are static If you specify the compiler option reentrant the default for functions without a function qualifier is reentrant Although automatic variables are allocated in a static area with non reentrant functions they are not the same as local variables within a function which are declared to be static by means of the C keyword static The difference is that it is not guaranteed that an automatic variable still h
167. d MISRA C rules 8 1 MISRA C 1998 This section lists all supported and unsupported MISRA C 1998 rules db See also section 2 7 C Code Checking MISRA C in Chapter Using the Compiler of the User s Manual AN A number of MISRA C rules leave room for interpretation Other rules can only be checked in a limited way In such cases the implementation decisions and possible restrictions for these rules are listed x means that the rule is not supported by the TASKING C compiler R is a required rule A is an advisory rule R The code shall conform to standard C without language extensions x A Other languages should only be used with an interface standard A Inline assembly is only allowed in dedicated C functions x A Provision should be made for appropriate run time checking R Only use characters and escape sequences defined by ISO C R Character values shall be restricted to a subset of ISO 106460 1 R Trigraphs shall not be used R Multibyte characters and wide string literals shall not be used R Comments shall not be nested ba oO ON ODO 0 e OY A Sections of code should not be commented out In general it is not possible to decide whether a piece of comment is C code that is commented out or just some pseudo code Instead the following heuristics are used to detect possible C code inside a comment a line ends with or a line starts with possibly preceded by white space 11 R
168. d section in its space with the restrictions that follow from the used attributes r w or x or a valid combination of them The allowed attributes are shown in the following table A value between lt and gt in the table means this value is set automatically by the linker Properties set in LSL Resulting section properties attributes filled access memory content x yes lt rom gt executable r yes r lt rom gt data r no r lt rom gt scratch rx yes r lt rom gt executable rw yes rw lt ram gt data rw no rw lt ram gt scratch rwx yes rw lt ram gt executable group reserved myreserved size 2k attributes rw fill Oxaa If you do not specify any attributes the linker will reserve the given number of maus no matter what type of memory lies beneath If you do not specify a fill pattern no section is generated The linker creates two labels to mark the begin and end of the section __1 _ub_name for the start and___1c_ue_name for the end of the reserved section Output sections The keyword section tells the linker to accumulate sections obtained from object files input sections into an output section of a fixed size in the locate phase You can select the input sections with select statements You can use groups inside output sections but you can only set the align attributes and load_addr attributes The fi11 field contains a bit pattern that the li
169. data section data data clear To change the name of all sections with type data enter c51 rename sections data NEW test c This results in section NEW data clear To use the name of the current module name test for all data sections c51 rename sections data m test c Example To change all sections named data into data NEW 4 41 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Related information Section 1 12 Section Naming in chapter C Language Assembler directive SECTION Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler reentrant Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Memory Model 3 Enable the Allow reentrant functions check box Command line syntax reentrant Description If you select reentrancy a less efficient virtual dynamic stack is used which allows you to call functions recursively With reentrancy you can call functions at any time even from interrupt functions Related information d gt C compiler option model Memory model Section 1 4 Memory Models in chapter C Language Section 1 11 1 Reentrant Functions in chapter C Language 4 43 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler romstrings S Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Code Generation
170. dd Ghaedwe ned dvea eed 2 2 2 2 3 ctype N and wetyperl cerrces cose ed ta baw Cas ema ee eda Re dee eee eee nee ewe oes 2 2 2 2 4 enO east chee teckel ve binned eeu ema gad ep eoi eee del en Peewee heeded 2 3 2 2 5 TCM eieae knw E eta ee e etal Sr a bia be ae bird 2 3 2 2 6 TETAS ac heer eg oo a ad ts gaa etd oh oe coder tran ene tee aoe weak ar cedar aie 2 4 2 2 7 MOAN esarri Cited HA wd Ca enone be dae hho N ET E E E A S a oe E 2 4 2 2 8 TSS ease cries eras E E or va ween rae etre teeta e cement ac aeenvaeant cee ntact aaen sens 2 4 2 2 9 intlypes hand Stn ivis ovacer ds pa rend er nate waned Bea O EEL nae dad 2 5 2 2 10 TOM spree eee E aoa tee eran O E gh none ances ee Oe eee eens ROR aye aoe ae 2 5 2 2 11 S Aa E E E E E faye ba baled se abddons oN Baden doi E edith kemee ne 2 5 2 2 12 limits Mi esseni Roos knee E aaa cia See rag doa ees eee a came TEE se eee Ode eae ers 2 6 2 2 13 locale IAD ve eg nis e ene eed eee Cea Re ee E Coed EA die Adhere el Adee eek 2 6 2 2 14 malloc A ieee sete cts Shes gaan Pa Dey wed EE RE TAE E UNE E Wee wean al Cae eee 2 6 2 2 15 math Mang tgmath 2 ented gee dha degonsiend pan a na ai ald need E 2 6 2 2 16 Semp oeiee an cee ia ae pow Gt ea EA de Ra needs oea wee E Ree hes 2 10 2 2 17 SIQMAN siie cots Hanae td Galena ya date Pam aaa tam eace td weemeds Mangus Rae Se 2 10 2 2 18 Staat anaran T EE E E E Ruy Rachid Ane REN 2 10 2 2 19 SIABO deerise nie tc acne ce NEA inst we stra E E E EE E ap ld T E ne Eat in E 2 10
171. debug information 4 59 4 62 diagnostics 4 70 4 80 list file 4 68 4 69 4 76 optimization 4 71 preprocessing 4 60 4 66 4 74 Assembler significant characters 3 2 Assembly Programming in C 1 7 Assembly expressions 3 3 Assembly functions 3 5 arg 3 6 cast 3 6 ent 3 6 cpu 3 6 defined 3 7 lsb 3 7 lsw 3 7 msb 3 7 msw 3 7 strcat 3 7 strcmp 3 7 Index 2 strlen 3 8 strpos 3 8 detailed description 3 6 overview 3 5 Assembly syntax 3 1 atan functions 2 6 atan2 functions 2 7 atanh functions 2 7 atexit 2 18 atof 2 18 atoi 2 18 atol 2 18 atoll 2 18 Automatic variables 1 16 Auxiliary memory model 1 7 B Bank switching 1 25 4 3 Binary search table 1 18 binary_switch 1 14 Bit data type 1 2 Board specification 7 2 7 22 break 3 11 bs 3 12 bsb 3 12 bsbit 3 12 bsearch 2 19 bsh 3 12 bsl 3 12 bsw 3 12 btowc 2 23 BUFSIZ 2 12 Build options 4 95 include files path 4 15 4 33 4 65 4 91 Bus definition 7 2 Buses 7 15 Cc C compiler options 4 1 4 14 bank number 4 3 bypass 4 4 check 4 5 compact max size 4 7 cpu 4 6 debug info 4 8 define 4 9 diag 4 11 error file 4 12 extend 4 13 help 4 14 include directory 4 15 include file 4 16 inline 4 17 inline max incr 4 18 inline max size 4 18 integer enumeration 4 19 Index iso 4 20 keep output files 4 21 language 4 22 max c
172. def preprocessor directives and the defined operator There shall be at most one occurrence of the or preprocessor operators in a single macro definition The and preprocessor operators should not be used The defined preprocessor operator shall only be used in one of the two standard forms Precautions shall be taken in order to prevent the contents of a header file being included twice Preprocessing directives shall be syntactically meaningful even when excluded by the preprocessor All else elif and endif preprocessor directives shall reside in the same file as the if or ifdef directive to which they are related Reserved identifiers macros and functions in the standard library shall not be defined redefined or undefined The names of standard library macros objects and functions shall not be reused The validity of values passed to library functions shall be checked Dynamic heap memory allocation shall not be used The error indicator errno shall not be used The macro offsetof in library lt stddef h gt shall not be used The setjmp macro and the long jmp function shall not be used The signal handling facilities of lt signal h gt shall not be used The input output library lt stdio h gt shall not be used in production code The library functions atof atoi and atol from library lt stdlib h gt shall not be used The library functions abort exit getenv and system from library lt stdlib h gt shal
173. default the assembler treats all symbols as local symbols unless you have defined them explicitly as global Related information i 4 77 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Assembler version V Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax version V Description Displays version information of the assembler The assembler ignores all other options or input files Related information J 4 78 Tool Options Assembler Assembler verbose v Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax verbose y Description With this option you put the assembler in verbose mode The assembler prints the filenames and the assembly passes while it processes the files so you can monitor the current status of the assembler Related information i 4 79 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Assembler warnings as errors Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Diagnostics 3 Enable the option Treat warnings as errors Command line syntax warnings as errors Description If the assembler encounters an error it stops assembling When you use this option without arguments you tell the assembler to treat all warnings as errors This means that the exit status of the assembler will be non zero after one or more compiler warnings As a consequence the assembler
174. default the name of the list file is the basename of the source file with the extension 1st Related information On the command line you can use the option list format L to specify which types of information should be included in the list file 4 68 Tool Options Assembler Assembler list format L Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select List File 3 Enable Generate list file 4 Inthe List file format section enable or disable the types of information to be included Command line syntax list format flags Lilags You can set the following flags 0 Same as LDEGILMNPQRSVWYXY all options disabled 1 Same as Ldegilmnpqrsvwxy all options enabled section d D Section directives SECTION symbol e E Symbol definition directives generic expansion g G Generic instruction expansion generic i I Generic instructions line I L C preprocessor line directives macro m M Macro dup definitions e g MACRO empty line n N Empty source lines newline conditional p P Conditional assembly IF ELSE ENDIF equate q Q Assembler EQU and SET directives relocations r R Relocation characters r hll s S HLL symbolic debug information SYMB equate values v V Assembler EQU and SET values wrap lines w W Wrapped source lines macro expan
175. detected Example FOR MYVAR IN 10 TO 20 assembly source lines IF MYVAR gt 15 BREAK ENDIF ENDREP 3 11 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference BS BSBIT BSB BSH BSW BSL Syntax label BS expression1 expression2 label BSBIT expression expression2 label BSB expression1 expression2 label BSH expression1 expression2 label BSW expression1 expression2 label BSL expression1 expression2 Description With the Bs directive Block Storage the assembler reserves a block of memory The reserved block of memory is initialized to the value of expression2 or zero if omitted With expression you specify the number of minimum addressable units MAUs you want to reserve and how much the location counter will advance The expression must be an integer greater than zero and cannot contain any forward references to address labels labels that have not yet been defined In a bit type section the MAU size is 1 the BS directive initializes a number of bits equal to the result of the expression With expression2 you can specify a value to initialize the block with Only the least significant MAU of expression2 is used If you omit expression2 the default is zero If you specify label it gets the value of the location counter at the start of the directive processing AN Initialization of a block of memory only happens in sections with section attribute init or romdata I
176. dresses for the sections in a group The linker creates labels that allow you to refer to the begin and end address of a group from within the application software Labels _1 _gb_group_nameand__1le_ge_group_name mark the begin and end of the group respectively where the begin is the lowest address used within this group and the end is the highest address used Notice that a group not necessarily occupies all memory between begin and end address The given label refers to where the section is located at run time versus load time 1 Assign properties to the group like alignment and read write attributes These properties are assigned to all sections in the group and subgroups and override the attributes of the input sections e The align field tells the linker to align all sections in the group and the group as a whole according to the align value By default the linker uses the largest alignment constraint of either the input sections or the alignment of the address space e The attributes field tells the linker to assign one or more attributes to all sections in the group This overrules the default attributes By default the linker uses the attributes of the input sections You can set the r wor rw attributes and you can switch between the b and s attributes e The copy field tells the linker to locate a read only section in RAM and generate a ROM copy and a copy action in the copy table This property makes the sections in the group writable
177. ds core architecture bus mau width map memory type reserved rom ram nvram mau size speed map section_layout section_setup map dest bus space dest_dbits dest_offset size src_dbits sre offset 7 6 1 Defining a Derivative With the keyword derivative you define a derivative and assign a unique name to it The name is used to refer to it at other places in the LSL file derivative name definitions If you are defining multiple derivatives that show great resemblance you can define the common features in a parent derivative and extend this with a child derivative that contains specific features The child inherits all features of the parent cores and memories With the keyword extends you create a child derivative derivative name_child_deriv extends name_parent_deriv definitions As with a core architecture a derivative can have any number of parameters These are identifiers which get values assigned on instantiation or extension of the derivative You can use them in any expression within the derivative definition derivative name_child_deriv parml1 parm2 1 extends name_parent_derivh arguments definitions 7 6 2 Instantiating Core Architectures With the keyword core you instantiate a core architecture in a derivative 7 20 Linker Script Language With the keyword architecture you tell the linker that the given core has a certain architecture The architecture name refers to an exi
178. e chosen optimizations expect to affect ease of debugging default debug information This provides all debug information you need to debug your application It meets the debugging requirements in most cases without resulting in over sized assembler object files all debug information With this information extra debug information is generated In extra ordinary cases you may use this debug information for instance if you use your own debugger which makes use of this information With this suboption the resulting assembler object file increases significantly Related information dp 4 8 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler define D Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Preprocessing 3 Select User macro and click on the down arrow in the right pane to expand macro input 4 Click on an empty Macro field and enter a macro name Then click an empty cell to confirm 5 Optionally click in the Value field and enter a definition Then click an empty cell to confirm Command line syntax define macro_name macro_definition Dmacro_name macro_definition Description With this option you can define a macro and specify it to the preprocessor If you only specify a macro name no macro definition the macro expands as 1 You can specify as many macros as you like On the command line you can use
179. e heap size reserved size attributes rwx fill alloc allowed absolute copytable section size blocksize attributes rwx Eill overflow I else 7 9 1 Defining a Section Layout With the keyword section_layout you define a section layout for exactly one address space In the section layout you can specify how input sections are placed in the address space relative to each other and what the absolute run and load addresses of each section will be You can define one or more section definitions Each section definition arranges the sections in one address space You can precede the address space name with a processor name and or core name separated by colons You can omit the processor name and or the core name if only one processor is defined and or only one core is present in the processor A reference to a space in the only core of the only processor in the system would look like my__space A reference to a space of the only core on a specific processor in the system could be my_chip my_space The next example shows a section definition for sections in the my_space address space of the processor called my_chip 7 25 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference section_layout my _chip my_ space locate direction section statements With the optional keyword direction you specify whether the linker starts locating sections from low_to_high default or from high_to_low In the second case the linker starts
180. e O Oxffff __bdata bdata 0x20 Ox2f __bsfr bsfr 0x80 0x88 0x90 0x98 Oxa0 Oxa8 Oxb0 Oxb8 OxcO Oxc8 OxdO Oxd8 Oxe0 Oxe8 Oxf0 Oxf8 Table 1 8 C type qualifiers and section type relation for the TSK51x TSK52x See also the assembler directive SECTION Start or continue section in section 3 8 2 Assembler Directives in Chapter Assembly Language of the reference manual See also C compiler option rename sections in section 4 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options 1 13 Libraries The TASKING compilers come with standard C libraries ISO IEC 9899 1999 and header files with the appropriate prototypes for the library functions All standard C libraries are available in object format and in C or assembly source code A number of standard operations within C are too complex to generate inline code for too much code These operations are implemented as run time library functions to save code db See section 2 2 Library Functions in Chapter Libraries for an extensive description of all standard C library functions 1 13 1 Printf and Scanf Routines The C library functions printf fprintf vfprintf vsprintf call one single function doprint that deals with the format string and arguments The same applies to all scanf type functions which call the function doscan and also for the wprint and wscanf type functions which call _dowprint and_dowscan respectively The C library contains three
181. e core supports multiple address spaces then for each space the linker must know how to perform this conversion In this context a physical address is an offset on a given internal or external bus Additionally the architecture definition contains information about items such as the hardware stack and the vector table This specification is normally written by Altium The architecture definition of the LSL file should not be changed by you unless you also modify the core s hardware architecture If the LSL file describes a multi core system an architecture definition must be available for each different type of core d gt See section 7 5 Semantics of the Architecture Definition for detailed descriptions of LSL in the architecture definition The derivative definition The derivative definition describes the configuration of the internal on chip bus and memory system Basically it tells the linker how to convert offsets on the buses specified in the architecture definition into offsets in internal memory A derivative definition must be present in an LSL file Microcontrollers and DSPs often have internal memory and I O sub systems apart from one or more cores The design of such a chip is called a derivative When you design an FPGA together with a PCB the components on the FPGA become part of the board design and there is no need to distinguish between internal and external memory For this reason you probably do not need to work with derivati
182. e file at the specified location INCLUDE myinc inc The assembler searches the file myinc inc according to the rules described above Related information d Assembler option include directory Add directory to include file search path in Section 4 2 Assembler Options of Chapter Tool Options 3 27 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference LABEL Syntax label LABEL type Description With the LABEL directive you define a label of a specified type Use this directive if the label that you define must have another type than it receives by default By default a label inherits its type from the type of the section in which you define the label Example In the next example the first label receives the type of the section The second label is defined with the LABEL directive and receives the type data SECTION code code mylabell EQU 2 mylabel2 LABEL data 3 28 Assembly Language LIST NOLIST Syntax NOLIST assembly source lines LIST Description If you generate a list file see assembler option list file you can use the LIST and NOLIST directives to specify which source lines the assembler must write to the list file The assembler prints all source lines to the list file untill it encounters a NOLIST directive The assembler does not print the NOLIST directive and subsequent source lines When the assembler encounters the LIST directive it resumes printing to the list
183. e following register names either upper or lower case should not be used for user defined symbol names in an assembly language source file TSK51x TSK52x registers A c DPTR RO R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 The following special function registers should also not be used as symbol names in an assembly language source file However it is allowed to redefine them TSK51x TSK52x special function registers ARO ARI AR2 AR3 AR4 AR5 AR6 ART ACC B DPH DPL PSW SP AC CY FO Fl P OV RSO RS1 3 6 Assembly Expressions An expression is a combination of symbols constants operators and parentheses which represent a value that is used as an operand of an assembler instruction or directive Expressions may contain user defined labels and their associated integer values and any combination of integers or ASCII literal strings Expressions follow the conventional rules of algebra and boolean arithmetic Expressions that can be evaluated at assembly time are called absolute expressions Expressions where the result is unknown until all sections have been combined and located are called relocatable or relative expressions When any operand of an expression is relocatable the entire expression is relocatable Relocatable expressions are emitted in the object file and evaluated by the linker The assembler evaluates expressions with 64 bit precision in two s complement The syntax of an expression can be any of the following numeric contant stri
184. e if those characters represent valid multibyte characters relative to the conversion state held in ps 2 23 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 2 2 28 wctype h Most in wctype h represent the wide character variant of declared in ctype h and are discussed in section 2 2 3 ctype h and wetype h In addition this header file provides extensible locale specific wide character classification wctype property iswctype wc desc Constructs a value of type wctype_t that describes a class of wide characters identified by the string property If property identifies a valid class of wide characters according to the LC_TYPE category see section 2 2 13 ocale h of the current locale a non zero value is returned that can be used as an argument in the iswctype function Tests whether the wide character wc is a member of the class represented by wctype_t desc Returns a non zero value if tested true Function Equivalent to locale specific test iswalnum wc iswctype wc wctype alnum iswalpha wc iswctype wc wctype alpha iswentrl wc iswctype wc wctype cntr1 iswdigit wc iswctype wc wctype digit iswgraph wc iswctype wc wctype graph iswlower wc iswctype wc wctype lower iswprint wc iswctype wc wctype print iswpunct wc iswctype wc wctype punct iswspace wc iswctype wc wctype space iswupper wc iswctype wc wctype upper iswxditig wc is
185. e mem argument can be used anywhere in section layouts You can use the following built in functions in expressions All functions return a numerical value This value is a 64 bit signed integer absolute int absolute expr Converts the value of expr to a positive integer absolute labelA labelB addressof int addressof addr_id Returns the address of addr_id which is a named section or group To get the offset of the section with the name asect addressof sect asect AN This function only works in assignments exists int exists section_name The function returns 1 if the section section_name exists in one or more object file O otherwise If the section is not present in input object files but generated from LSL the result of this function is undefined To check whether the section mysection exists in one of the object files that is specified to the linker exists mysection max int max expr expr Returns the value of the expression that has the largest value To get the highest value of two symbols max Syml sym2 7 5 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference min int min expr expr Returns the value of the expression hat has the smallest value To get the lowest value of two symbols min sym1l sym2 sizeof int sizeof size_id Returns the size of the object group section or memory the identifier refers to To get the size of the sectio
186. e range 0x0000 0xFFFF Command line syntax vector offset address Description With this option you can specify a 16 bit offset address for the interrupt vector table The default offset address is 0x0000 This option is for example useful to place the vector table in RAM Example Type 0x4000 as the base address of the interrupt vector table in the Reset interrupt vector offset field or enter the following on the command line c51 vector offset 0x4000 test c Suppose your C source contains the following interrupt function __interrupt 0x0013 void isr void The compiler adds the offset address to the vector address in the C source so the actual vector address becomes 0x4013 Related information C compiler option novector Do not generate interrupt vectors C compiler option noframe Do not generate frame for interrupt handler Section 1 11 6 nterrupt Functions in chapter C Language 4 52 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler version V Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax version V Description Displays version information of the compiler The compiler ignores all other options or input files Related information J TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler warnings as errors Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Diagnostics 3 Enable the opt
187. e section 2 2 9 inttypes h and stdint h 2 2 22 stdio h and wehar h Types The header file stdio h contains functions for performing input and output A number of functions also have a parallel wide character function or macro defined in wchar h The header file wchar h also includes stdio h In the C language many I O facilities are based on the concept of streams The stdio h header file defines the data type FILE which holds the information about a stream An FILE object is created with the function fopen The pointer to this object is used as an argument in many of the in this header file The FILE object can contain the following information e the current position within the stream e pointers to any associated buffers e indications of for read write errors e end of file indication The header file also defines type fpos_t as an unsigned long 2 11 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Macros stdio h wchar h Description NULL BUFSIZ EOF WEOF FOPEN_MAX FILENAME MAX _IOFBF _IOLBF _IONBF L_tmpnam TMP_MAX SEEK _CUR SEEK_END SEEK_SET stderr stdin stdout File access stdio h expands to the null pointer constant Size of the buffer used by the setbuf setvbuf function 512 End of file indicator Expands to 1 End of file indicator Expands to UINT_Max defined in limits h NOTE WEOF need not to be a negative number as long as its value does not correspond to a member of the wide cha
188. e syntax max call depth va ue Default 1 Description This option is related to the compiler optimization optimize compact Code compaction or reverse inlining Code compaction is the opposite of inlining functions large sequences of code that occur more than once are transformed into a function This reduces code size possibly at the cost of execution speed During code compaction the compiler generates nested calls This may cause the program to run out of its stack To prevent stack overflow caused by too deeply nested function calls you can use this option to limit the call depth This option can have the following values 1 Poses no limit to the call depth default 0 The compiler will not generate any function calls Effectively the same as if you turned of code compaction with option optimize compact gt 0 Code sequences are only reversed if this will not lead to code at a call depth larger than specified with value Function calls will be placed at a call depth no larger than va ue 1 Note that if you specified a value of 1 the option optimize compact may remain without effect when code sequences for reversing contain function calls This option does not influence the call depth of user written functions aN If you use this option with various C modules the call depth is valid for each individual module The call depth after linking may differ depending on the nature of the modules Related information
189. e to the installation directory when searching for include files This way the compiler only searches in the include file search paths you specified Related information d gt C compiler option include directory Add directory to include file search path 4 33 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler novector Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Code Generation 3 Disable the option Generate code for interrupt vector Command line syntax novector Description With this option you tell the compiler not to generate code for interrupt vectors and references to the interrupt handler in the run time library Use this option if you do not use interrupts in your application or if you want to write your own interrupt vectors Related information C compiler option vector offset Specify a base address for interrupt vectors C compiler option noframe Do not generate frame for interrupt handler Section 1 11 6 nterrupt Functions in chapter C Language 4 34 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler no warnings w Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Diagnostics 3 Inthe Warnings field select one of the following options e Report all warnings e Suppress all warnings e Supp
190. e two types a logical type and a memory type For example a function is residing in ROM memory type but the logical type is the return type of this function Example using memory types with pointers __rom char _ data p pointer residing in data pointing to ROM means p has memory type data allocated in on chip RAM but has logical type character in target memory space ROM The memory type qualifier used left to the specifies the target memory of the pointer the memory type qualifier used right to the specifies the storage memory of the pointer The memory type qualifiers are treated like any other data type specifier like unsigned This means the pointer above can also be declared exactly the same using char _ rom _ data p pointer residing in data pointing to ROM The TSK51x TSK52x C compiler is very efficient in allocating pointers because it recognizes far 2 byte and near 1 byte pointers Pointers to data _idataand__ pdata havea size of 1 byte whereas pointers to rom __xdata and functions in ROM have a size of 2 bytes Structure tags with memory type qualifiers A tag declaration is intended to specify the layout of a structure or union If a memory type is specified it is considered to be part of the declarator A tag name itself nor its members can be bound to any storage area although members having type pointer to do require one A tag may then be used to declare object
191. e unresolved reference corresponding to an NX command can be resolved by an internal symbol definition NI_command in another module NN Command The NN command defines a local name which may be used for defining a name of a local symbol in a module or aname ina type definition A name defined with an NN command is not visible outside the scope of the module The NN command must precede all occurrences of the corresponding N variable NN_command N N_ variable char_string AT Command The attribute command may be used to define debugging related information of a symbol such as the symbol type number Level 2 of the standard does not prescribe the contents of the optional fields of the AT command The language dependent layer level 3 describes how these fields can be used to pass high level symbol information with the AT command AT_command AT variable type_table_entry lex_level hex_number variable _variable N_variable X_variable type_table_entry hex_number TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference lex_level us hex_number The type_table entry is a type number introduced with a type command TY References to type numbers in the AT command may precede the definition of the type in the TY command The meaning of the lex_level field is defined at layer 3 or higher The same applies to the optional hex_number fields TY Command The TY command defines
192. e whether a piece of comment is C code that is commented out or just some pseudo code Instead the following heuristics are used to detect possible C code inside a comment a line ends with or a line starts with possibly preceded by white space All usage of implementation defined behavior shall be documented The character set and the corresponding encoding shall be documented The implementation of integer division in the chosen compiler should be determined documented and taken into account All uses of the pragma directive shall be documented and explained This rule is really a documentation issue The compiler will flag all pragma directives as violations The implementation defined behavior and packing of bit fields shall be documented if being relied upon All libraries used in production code shall be written to comply with the provisions of this document and shall have been subject to appropriate validation Only those escape sequences that are defined in the ISO C standard shall be used Trigraphs shall not be used 8 5 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Identifiers 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 x 5 5 5 6 x 5 7 Types 6 1 x 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 Constants 7 1 R R ZS R Identifiers internal and external shall not rely on the significance of more than 31 characters Identifiers in an inner scope shall not use the same name as an identifier in an outer scope and there
193. ead of test src enter c51 output output sre test c Related information i 4 39 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler preprocess E Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Preprocessing 3 Enable the option Store the C Compiler preprocess output lt file gt pre Command line syntax preprocess flags Effiags You can set the following flags when you specify E without flags the default is ECMP comments c C Keep comments from the C source in the preprocessed output make m M Generate dependency lines that can be used for the makefile noline p P Strip line source position info lines starting with line The compiler sends the preprocessed file to stdout To capture the information in a file specify an output file with the option output Description When compiling each file is preprocessed first With this option you can store the result of preprocessed C files Altium Designer stores the preprocessed file in a file called name pre where name is the name of the C source file being compiled C comments are not preserved similar to ECMP Related information ib 4 40 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler rename sections R Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C C
194. eatures are provided such as the ability to place sections at a given load address or run time address to place sections in a given order and to overlay code and or data sections Which object files Sections constitute the task that will run on a given core is specified on the command line when you invoke the linker The linker will link and locate all sections of all tasks simultaneously From the section layout definition the linker can deduce where a given section may be located in memory form the board specification the linker can deduce which physical memory is still available while locating the section See section 7 9 Semantics of the Section Layout Definition for more information on how to locate a section at a specific place in memory Skeleton of a Linker Script File The skeleton of a linker script file now looks as follows architecture architecture_name architecture definition derivative derivative_name derivative definition 7 2 Linker Script Language processor processor name processor definition memory definitions and or bus definitions section_layout space_name section placement statements 7 3 Syntax of the Linker Script Language 7 3 1 Preprocessing When the linker loads an LSL file the linker processes it with a C style prepocessor As such it strips C and C comments You can use the standard ISO C preprocessor directives such as include define if else end
195. ece eee 7 23 7 8 Semantics of the Section Setup Definition 0 7 24 7 8 1 Setting Up a Section seeria bees ede eae ede ee eee be ede cee 7 24 7 9 Semantics of the Section Layout Definition 0 cece eee teeta 7 25 7 9 1 Defining a Section Layout 0 eee eee tenes 7 25 7 9 2 Creating and Locating Groups of Sections 0 ccc cece teeta 7 26 7 9 3 Creating or Modifying Special Sections 00 0 cece teeta 7 30 7 9 4 Creating Symbols acic c cc qccceb oie ae one con eka ee RE ERRE E dae DE EDak 7 32 7 9 5 Conditional Group Statements 0 cece teeta 7 33 MISRA C Rules 8 1 8 1 MISRAHC1998 mecres code cee cid cos cku dane ede hedges E E ne Ea aes 8 1 8 2 MISRA C 2004 unc irna med oeae We eee tee tne be Ghee Mave E 8 5 Index TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference vi Manual Purpose and Structure Manual Purpose and Structure Windows Users The documentation explains and describes how to use the TASKING TSK51x TSK52x toolset to program a TSK51x TSK52x processor You can use the tools either with the graphical Altium Designer or from the command line in a command prompt window Structure The toolset documentation consists of a user s manual Using the TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools which includes a Getting Started section and a separate reference manual this manual Start by reading the Getting Started in Chapter 1 of the user s manual The other chapters in the
196. ections are to be overlapped e sections are not to coexist A section type gives additional information to the linkage editor about the section which may be used to layout a section in memory Section type information is encoded with letters which may be combined in one ST command Some combinations of letters are invalid or may be meaningless letter meaning class explanation A absolute access section has absolute address assigned to corresponding L variable R read only access no write access to this section W writable access section may be read and written x executable access section contains executable code Z zero page access if target has zero page or short addressable page Z section map into it Ynum addressing access section must be located in addressing mode num mode blank access section must be initialized to 0 cleared F not filled access section is not filled or cleared scratch l initialize access section must be initialized in rom E equal overlap if sections in two modules have different length an error must be raised M max overlap Use largest value as section size U unique overlap The section name must be unique 6 6 Object File Formats letter meaning class explanation C cumulative overlap Concatenate sections if they appear in several modules The section alignment for partial section must be preserved O overlay overlap sections with the
197. ects or functions in a header file Functions shall be declared at file scope Objects shall be defined at block scope if they are only accessed from within a single function An external object or function shall be declared in one and only one file An identifier with external linkage shall have exactly one external definition All declarations and definitions of objects or functions at file scope shall have internal linkage unless external linkage is required The static storage class specifier shall be used in definitions and declarations of objects and functions that have internal linkage When an array is declared with external linkage its size shall be stated explicitly or defined implicitly by initialization MISRA C Rules Initialization 9 1 R All automatic variables shall have been assigned a value before being used This rule is checked using worst case assumptions This means that violations are reported not only for variables that are guaranteed to be uninitialized but also for variables that are uninitialized on some execution paths Braces shall be used to indicate and match the structure in the non zero initialization of arrays and structures In an enumerator list the construct shall not be used to explicitly initialize members other than the first unless all items are explicitly initialized Arithmetic type conversions 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 R The value of an expr
198. ed Command line syntax optimize flags Offlags Use the following options for predefined sets of flags optimize 0 O0 optimize 1 O1 optimize 2 O2 optimize 3 O3 No optimization Alias for OABCEFGILOPRSY Few optimizations Alias for OabcefgILOPRSy Medium optimization default Alias for Oabcefglloprsy Full optimization Alias for Oabcefgiloprsy You can enable the following individual optimizations coalesce a A ipro b B cse c C expression e E flow f F glo g G inline i loop I L forward 0 0 propagate p P compact r R subscript s S peephole y Y Coalescer remove unnecessary moves Interprocedural Register Optimization Common subexpression elimination CSE Expression simplification Control flow simplification optimization and code reordering Generic assembly code optimizations Function inlining Loop transformations Forward store Constant propagation Code compaction reverse inlining Subscript strength reduction Peephole optimizations For an extensive description of these optimizations please refer to section 2 6 Compiler Optimizations in chapter Using the Compiler of the user s manual Description The TASKING C compilers offer four optimization levels and a custom level at each level a specific set of optimizations is enabled e No optimization O0 No optimizations are performed The compil
199. ed assembly code _add2 mov R1 _b mov R2 _a MOV A R1 ADD A R2 MOV _result A Example 5 input and output are the same If the input and output must be the same you can use a number constraint The following example adds two values Input variable a has to go in the same place as the output variable a so 2 and 0 are the same thing That is why the constraint of the argument 2 is 0 which means it has to be the same as argument 0 Note also that the 0 and 1 select a kid register from a register pair Register A is reserved int ADDI int a int b __asm MOV A 1 1 n t ADD A 0 1 n t MOV 0 1 A n t MOV A 1 0 n t ADDC A 0 0 n t MOV 0 0 A R a R b O a A return a void main void int ovar ovar _ADDI 2 3 Generated assembly __ ADDI MOV A R5 ADD A R7 MOV R7 A MOV A R4 ADDC A R6 MOV R6 A ret _main mov R6 0 mov R7 2 mov R4 0 mov R5 3 gcall _ ADDI ret 1 6 Pragmas to Control the Compiler Pragmas are keywords in the C source that control the behavior of the compiler Pragmas overrule compiler options For example you can set a compiler option to specify which optimizations the compiler should perform With the pragma optimize flags you can set an optimization level for a specific part of the C source This overrules the general optimization level that is set in the C compiler Optimization page in the Project Options dialo
200. el 1 LUMP label 2 2 GCUNE A direct label CJNE A direct label CJNE A direct 1 CJNE A direct 1 SJMP 2 SJMP 2 1 AJMP label 1 LJMP label 2 2 GCUNE A imm8 label CJNE A imm8 label CJUNE A imm68 1 CJUNE A imm68 1 SJMP 2 SJMP 2 1 AJMP label 1 LJMP label 2 2 GCUNE Rn imm68 label CJNE Rn imm68 label CJNE Rn imm8 1 CJNE Rn imm8 1 SJMP 2 SJMP 2 1 AJMP label 1 LJMP label 2 2 GCJUNE Ri imm8 label CINE Ri imm68 label CJNE Ri imm8 1 CJNE Ri imm8 1 SJMP 2 SJMP 2 1 AJMP label 1 LJMP label 2 2 GDJNZ direct label DJNZ direct label DJNZ direct 1 DJNZ direct 1 SJMP 2 SJMP 2 1 AJMP label 1 LJMP label 2 2 GDJNZ Rn label DJNZ Rn label DJNZ Rn 1 DJNZ Rn 1 SJMP 2 SJMP 2 1 AJMP label 1 LJMP label 2 2 3 50 Altium 4 Tool Options Summary This chapter provides a detailed description of the options for the compiler assembler linker control program make program and the librarian 4 1 C Compiler Options Altium Designer uses a makefile to build your entire project This means that in Altium Designer you cannot run the compiler separately If you compile a single C source file from within Altium Designer the file is also assembled However you can set options specific for the compiler Options in Altium Designer versus options on the command line Most command line options have an equivalent option in Altium Designer but some options are on
201. ence Command Code Description WX OxF4 Weak external LI OxF5 Library search list LX OxF6 Library external RE OxF7 Replicate SC OxF8 Scope definition LN OxF9 Line number OxFA Undefined OxFB Undefined OxFC Undefined OxFD Undefined OxFE Undefined OxFF Undefined Table 6 4 MUFOM Command codes 6 12 Object File Formats 6 2 Motorola S Record Format With the linker option ofilename SREC option the linker produces output in Motorola S record format with three types of S records SO S3 and S7 With the options ofilename SREC 2 or ofilename SREC 3 option you can force other types of S records They have the following layout SO record S 0 lt length_byte gt lt 2 bytes 0 gt lt comment gt lt checksum_byte gt A linker generated S record file starts with a SO record with the following contents length_byte 07 comment Ik51 checksum BB 1k51 S00700006C6B3531BB The SO record is a comment record and does not contain relevant information for program execution The length_byte represents the number of bytes in the record not including the record type and length byte The checksum is calculated by first adding the binary representation of the bytes following the record type starting with the length_byte to just before the checksum Then the one s complement is calculated of this sum The least significant byte of the result is the checksum The sum of
202. er Errors set by RTOS EILSEQ 30 Operation canceled ENODEV 31 No such device 2 2 5 fenti h The file ont1 h contains the function open which calls the low level function open and definitions of flags used by the low level function _open This header file is not defined in ISO C99 open Opens a file for reading or writing Calls open FSS implementation 2 3 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 2 2 6 fenv h Contains mechanisms to control the floating point environment The functions in this header file are not implemented fegetenv Stores the current floating point environment Not implemented feholdexept Saves the current floating point environment and installs an environment that ignores all floating point exceptions Not implemented fesetenv Restores a previously saved fegetenv or feholdexcept floating point environment Not implemented feupdateenv Saves the currently raised floating point exceptions restores a previousely saved floating point environ ment and finally raises the saved exceptions Not implemented feclearexcept Clears the current exception status flags corresponding to the flags specified in the argument Not im plemented fegetexceptflag Stores the current setting of the floating point status flags Not implemented feraiseexcept Raises the exceptions represented in the argument As a result other exceptions may be raised as well Not implemented fesetexceptflag Sets the
203. er Using the Linker of the user s manual 4 94 Tool Options Linker Linker library directory L ignore default library path Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Open the Build Options page 3 Add a pathname in the Library files path field If you enter multiple paths separate them with a semicolon Command line syntax library directory dir Loir ignore default library path L Description With this option you can specify the path s where your system libraries specified with the library option are located If you want to specify multiple paths use the option library directory for each separate path The default path is PRODDIR c51 1ib If you specify only L without a pathname or the long option ignore default library path the linker will not search the default path and also not in the paths specified in the environment variable LIBC51 So the linker ignores steps 2 and 3 as listed below The priority order in which the linker searches for system libraries specified with the library option is 1 The path that is specified with the library directory option 2 The path that is specified in the environment variable LIBC51 3 The default directory PRODDIR c51 1ib or a processor specific sub directory Example Suppose you call the linker as follows 1k51 test obj library directory c mylibs library c
204. er generates TSK51A mov 12 setb 14 gjnb 14 clr 14 _2 setb 13 8 136 4 3 4 4 2 4 3 6 3 You can find a list of defined SFRs and defined bits by inspecting the SFR file for a specific core The files are named regcore sfr for example regtks5la sfrinthe Altium Designer 6 System Tasking c51 include directory Defining Special Function Registers With the __sfr memory type qualifier you can define a symbol as an SFR The compiler may assume that special SFR operations can be performed on such symbols The TSK51x TSK52x compiler can decide to use bit instructions for those special function registers that are bit accessible in this case use __bsfr instead of __sfr For example if bits are defined in the SFR definition these bits can be accessed using bit instructions For the TSK51x TSK52x only the SFRs at addresses 0x80 0x88 0x90 0x98 Oxa0 0xa8 Oxb0 Oxb8 OxcO Oxc8 OxdO Oxd8 Oxe0 Oxe8 Oxf0 and Oxf8 are bit addressable A typical definition of a special function register looks as follows typedef _Bo _Bo _Bo _Bo _Bo _Bo _Bo _Bo _ bit define define define define define define define struct ol _ b0 1 ol _bl 1 ol _ b2 1 ol _ b3 1 ol _ b4 1 ol _ b5 1 ol _ b6 1 ol _b7 1 struct_t PO __bsfr unsigned char 0x80 P0 _ 0 __bsfr bitstruct_t 0x80 __ b0 PO_1 __bsfr bitstruct_t 0x80 bl SP __sfr unsigned char 0x81 TCON __bsfr unsigned ch
205. er to generate a register bank independent function that can be called from both threads Example __noregaddr int func int x this function can be called from any function independent of its register bank return xt 1 __registerbank 1 void f1 void func 1 __registerbank 0 void main void func 0 1 12 Section Naming The compiler generates several types of sections depending on the attributes of a section The compiler uses the following section naming convention name L attribute The name is by default the section type for example code or data Section attributes such as clear and init can also be part of the section name The section types and attributes are target dependent See the assembler directive SECTION for a complete list of section types and attributes Example The following C code _ data int i results in the following section declaration with name data section data data clear 1 26 C Language When you compile with Rdata mysection this results in section mysection data clear The following table lists the relation between C type qualifiers assembly section types and the resulting memory spaces Qualifier Section Type Address Range Space _ data data O 0x7f __sfr sfr 0x80 Oxff __idata idata O Oxff __ bit bit O Ox7f __xdata xdata O Oxffff __pdata pdata 0 Oxff _ rom cod
206. er to object and any type other than an integral type another pointer to object type or a pointer to void A cast should not be performed between a pointer type and an integral type A cast should not be performed between a pointer to object type and a different pointer to object type A cast shall not be performed that removes any const or volatile qualification from the type addressed by a pointer Limited dependence should be placed on C s operator precedence rules in expressions The value of an expression shall be the same under any order of evaluation that the standard permits This rule is checked using worst case assumptions This means that a violation will be reported when a possible alias may cause the result of an expression to be evaluation order dependent The sizeof operator shall not be used on expressions that contain side effects The right hand operand of a logical amp amp or operator shall not contain side effects The operands of a logical amp amp or shall be primary expressions The operands of logical operators amp amp and should be effectively Boolean Expressions that are effectively Boolean should not be used as operands to operators other than amp amp and Bitwise operators shall not be applied to operands whose underlying type is signed 8 7 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 12 8 12 9 12 10 12 11 12 12 12 13 R The right hand operand of a shift
207. er tries to achieve a 1 to 1 resemblance between source code and produced code Expressions are evaluated in the order written in the source code associative and commutative properties are not used e Few optimizations O1 Enables optimizations that do not affect the debug ability of the source code Use this level when you encounter problems during debugging your source code with optimization level 2 e Medium optimization O2 Enables more optimizations to reduce code size and or execution time This is the default optimization level 4 36 Tool Options C Compiler e Full optimization O3 This is the highest optimization level Use this level to decrease execution time to meet your real time requirements e Custom optimization 0Ox X you can enable disable specific optimizations With these options you can control the level of optimization The default optimization level is Medium optimization option 02 or O or Oabcefglloprsy You can overrule these settings in your C source file with the pragma pair pragma optimize flag and pragma endoptimize AN In addition to the command line option optimize O you can specify the option tradeoff t With this option you specify whether the used optimizations should optimize for more speed regardless of code size or for smaller code size regardless of speed Example The following invocations are equivalent and result all in the default optimization set c51 tes
208. es an object file which is basically a large sequence of instructions for the linker For example instead of writing the contents of a section as a sequence of bytes at a specific position in the file IEEE 695 defines a load command LR which instructs the linker to load a number of bytes The LR command specifies the number of MAUs minimum addressable unit that will be relocated followed by the actual data This data can be a number of absolute bytes or an expression which must be evaluated by the linker Transforming relocation expressions into new expressions or absolute data and combining sections is the actual linkage process It is possible that one or more of the above MUFOM processes are combined in one tool For instance the linker is built from process 2 3 and 4 above 6 1 2 Notational Conventions The following conventions are used in this appendix l select one of the items listed between literal characters are between optional item repeats one time or more optional item repeats zero times or one time optional item repeats zero times or more can be read as is defined as 6 1 3 Expressions An expression in an IEEE 695 file is a combination of variables operators and absolute data The variable name always starts with a non hexadecimal letter G Z immediately followed by an optional hexadecimal number The first non hexadecimal letter gives the class of the variable Reading an object file y
209. esses of the registers RO R7 Therefore the registerbank qualifier is also possible with normal C functions and their prototype declarations Example Suppose timer from the previous example is calling get_number The function prototype and definition of get_number should contain the correct _registerbank __registerbank 2 int get_number void The compiler checks if a function calls another function using another register bank which is an error d gt C compiler option b Specify default register bank number in section 4 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options 1 11 7 Register Bank Independent Code Generation You can use compiler option noregaddr or keyword __noregaddr to switch to register bank independent code generation In order to generate very efficient code the compiler uses absolute register addresses in its code generation For example a register to register move Since there is no MOV register register instruction the compiler will generate a MOV register direct with the absolute address of the source register as the second operand The absolute address of a register depends on the register bank but sometimes this dependency is undesired For example when a function is called from both the main thread and an interrupt thread If both threads use different register banks they cannot call a function that uses absolute register addresses To overcome this you can instruct the compil
210. ession of integer type shall not be implicitly converted to a different underlying type if a it is not a conversion to a wider integer type of the same signedness or b the expression is complex or c the expression is not constant and is a function argument or d the expression is not constant and is a return expression The value of an expression of floating type shall not be implicitly converted to a different type if a it is not a conversion to a wider floating type or b the expression is complex or c the expression is a function argument or d the expression is a return expression The value of a complex expression of integer type may only be cast to a type that is narrower and of the same signedness as the underlying type of the expression The value of a complex expression of floating type may only be cast to a narrower floating type If the bitwise operators and lt lt are applied to an operand of underlying type unsigned char or unsigned short the result shall be immediately cast to the underlying type of the operand A U suffix shall be applied to all constants of unsigned type Pointer type conversions 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 Expressions 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 R R DES A R 333 2 Conversions shall not be performed between a pointer to a function and any type other than an integral type Conversions shall not be performed between a point
211. f the output section will adapt to the size of its content For example group flash_area run_addr 0x10000 section flash_code blocksize 4k attributes rx i11 0 select flash If the content of the section is 1 mau the size will be 4k if the content is 11k the section will be 12k etc If you use size in combination with blocksize the size value is used as default minimal size for this section If it is omitted the default size will be of blocksize It is not allowed to omit both size and blocksize from the section definition The linker creates two labels to mark the begin and end of the section __1 _ub_name for the start and___ 1c _ue_name for the end of the output section Copy table The keyword copytable tells the linker to select a section that is used as copy table The content of the copy table is created by the linker It contains the start address and length of all sections that should be initialized by the startup code The linker creates two labels to mark the begin and end of the section __1 _ub_table for the start and __lc_ue_table for the end of the copy table The linker generates a copy table when a reference to either of the section labels exists in one of the input object files 7 9 4 Creating Symbols You can tell the linker to create symbols before locating by putting assignments in the section layout definition Symbol names are represented by double quoted strings Any string is
212. fect is undefined Similar to fopen but rather then generating a new value of type FILE the existing value is associated with a new stream If buffer is NULL buffering is turned off for the stream Otherwise setbuf is equivalent to void setvbuf stream buf IOFBF BUFSIZ Controls buffering for the stream this function must be called before reading or writing Mode can have the following values _IOFBF causes full buffering _IOLBF causes line buffering of text files _IONBF causes no buffering If buffer is not NULL it will be used as a buffer otherwise a buffer will be allocated size determines the buffer size Libraries Character input output The format string of printf related functions can contain plain text mixed with conversion specifiers Each conversion specifier should be preceded by a character The conversion specifier should be build in order Flags in any order specifies left adjustment of the converted argument a number is always preceded with a sign character has higher precedence than space space a negative number is preceded with a sign positive numbers with a space 0 specifies padding to the field width with zeros only for numbers specifies an alternate output form For o the first digit will be zero For x or X 0x and 0X will be prefixed to the number For e E f g G the output always contains a decimal point trailing zeros are not removed A
213. file dfile Description A linker script file contains vital information about the core for the locating phase of the linker A linker script file is coded in LSL and contains the following types of information e the architecture and derivative definition describe the core s hardware architecture and its internal memory e the board specification describes the physical memory available in the system e the section layout definition describes how to locate sections in memory With this option you specify a linker script file via the control program to the linker If you do not specify this option the linker does not use a script file You can specify the existing file 51 1s1 or the name of a manually written linker script file You can use this option multiple times The linker processes the LSL files in the order in which they appear on the command line Related information db Section 4 8 Controlling the Linker with a Script in chapter Using the Linker of the user s manual 4 135 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Control Program model M Command line syntax model aux large small M all s Description By default the TSK51x TSK52x compiler uses the small memory model When the compiler uses the small memory model to access data all data objects and the stack used for function parameter passing must fit in the internal RAM Note that the stack length depends upon the nesting depth of the various functions A
214. file starting with the LIST directive itself It is possible to nest the LIST NOLIST directives Example Suppose you assemble the following assembly code with the assembler option list file SECTION code code source line 1 NOLIST source line 2 LIST source line 3 END The assembler generates a list file with the following lines SECTION code code x source line 1 LIST d source line 3 END Related information db Assembler option list file Generate list file in Section 4 2 Assembler Options of Chapter Tool Options 3 29 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference MACRO ENDM Syntax macro_name MACRO argumeni argumenit meee definition_statements ENDM Description With the MACRO directive you define a macro Macros provide a shorthand method for handling a repeated pattern of code or group of instructions You can define the pattern as a macro and then call the macro at the points in the program where the pattern would repeat The definition of a macro consists of three parts e Header which assigns a name to the macro and defines the arguments e Body which contains the code or instructions to be inserted when the macro is called e Terminator which indicates the end of the macro definition ENDM directive The arguments are symbolic names that the macro processor replaces with the literal arguments when the macro is expanded called Each formal argument must
215. fore hide that identifier A typedef name shall be a unique identifier A tag name shall be a unique identifier No object or function identifier with static storage duration should be reused No identifier in one name space should have the same spelling as an identifier in another name space with the exception of structure and union member names No identifier name should be reused The plain char type shall be used only for storage and use of character values signed and unsigned char type shall be used only for the storage and use of numeric values typedefs that indicate size and signedness should be used in place of the basic types bit fields shall only be defined to be of type unsigned int or signed int bit fields of type signed int shall be at least 2 bits long Octal constants other than zero and octal escape sequences shall not be used Declarations and definitions 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 x 8 8 x 8 9 x 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 6 Functions shall have prototype declarations and the prototype shall be visible at both the function definition and call Whenever an object or function is declared or defined its type shall be explicitly stated For each function parameter the type given in the declaration and definition shall be identical and the return types shall also be identical If objects or functions are declared more than once their types shall be compatible There shall be no definitions of obj
216. formation tells the linker which processor has which derivative and enables the linker to distinguish between the present processors aN If you use processors that all have a unique derivative you may omit the processor definitions In this case the linker assumes that for each derivative definition in the LSL file there is one processor The linker uses the derivative name also for the processor With the keyword processor you define a processor You can freely choose the processor name The name is used to refer to it at other places in the LSL file processor proc_name processor definition 7 7 2 Instantiating Derivatives With the keyword derivative you tell the linker that the given processor has a certain derivative The derivative name refers to an existing derivative definition in the same LSL file For examples if you have two processors on your target board called myproc_1 and myproc_2 that have the same derivative called myderiv you must instantiate both processors as follows processor myproc_1 derivative myderiv processor myproc_ 2 derivative myderiv 7 22 Linker Script Language If the derivative definition has parameters you must specify the arguments that correspond with the parameters For example myderiv1 expects two parameters which are used in the derivative definition processor myproc derivative myderivl 2 4 7 7 3 Defining External Memory and Buses It is com
217. formation to obtain knowledge about the relation between the executable code and the origination high level language source files Since the IEEE 695 standard does not describe the representation of debug information working implementations of this standard show vendor specific and microprocessor specific solutions for this area TIOF which stands for Target Independent Object Format is specified as a MUFOM based standard including the representation of symbolic debug information for high level languages without introducing the microprocessor dependent solutions Since TIOF and IEEE 695 both use the MUFOM concept as their basis both formats are very similar to each other 6 1 1 Command Language Concept Most object formats are record oriented there are one or more section headers at a fixed position in the file which describe how many sections are present A section header contains information like start address file offset etc The contents of the section is in some data part which can only be processed after the header has been read So the tool that reads such an object uses implicit assumptions how to process such a file Seeking through the file to get those records which are relevant is usual MUFOM IEEE 695 uses a different approach It is designed as a command language which steers the linker and object reader in the debugger An assembler or compiler may create an object module where most of the data contained in it is relocatable
218. fwscanf 2 15 vprintf 2 15 vscanf 2 15 vsprintf 2 15 vsscanf 2 15 vswprintf 2 15 vswscanf 2 15 vwprintf 2 15 vwscanf 2 15 W warning 1 15 Warnings suppressing 4 35 4 70 4 106 4 140 treat as errors 4 80 wchar_t 2 11 wcrtomb 2 23 wcscat 2 19 weschr 2 20 wescmp 2 20 wcscoll 2 20 wescpy 2 19 wescspn 2 20 wcesncat 2 19 wesncmp 2 20 wesncpy 2 19 wespbrk 2 20 wesrchr 2 20 wcsrtombs 2 23 wesspn 2 20 wesstr 2 20 wcstod 2 18 wcstof 2 18 wcstoimax 2 5 wcstok 2 20 wcstol 2 18 wcstold 2 18 westoll 2 18 wcstombs 2 19 wcstoul 2 18 wcstoull 2 18 wcstoumax 2 5 wesxfrm 2 20 wctob 2 23 wctomb 2 19 wctrans 2 24 wctype 2 24 weak 1 15 3 44 WEOF 2 12 wmemehr 2 20 wmemcmp 2 20 wmemepy 2 19 wmemmove 2 19 wmemset 2 20 wprintf 2 15 write 2 23 wscanf 2 15 wsirftime 2 21 Index 11 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Index 12
219. fy whether the compiler should generate an interrupt frame saving restoring registers for interrupt handlers or not Related information C compiler option vector offset Reset interrupt vector offset C compiler option novector Generate code for interrupt vector Section 1 11 6 nterrupt Functions in chapter C Language 4 31 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler noregaddr Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Code Generation 3 Disable the option Allow absolute register addresses ARO AR7 in generated code Command line syntax noregaddr Description With this option you tell the compiler to generate register bank independent code This creates the possibility to generate functions that can be called from any function independent of its register bank Related information d Section 1 11 7 Register Bank Independent Code Generation in chapter C Language 4 32 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler nostdinc Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option nostdinc to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax nostdinc Description With this option you tell the compiler not to look in the default include directory relativ
220. g command line option optimize O The general syntax for pragmas is pragma pragma spec ON OFF DEFAULT RESTORE TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference or _Pragma pragma spec ON OFF DEFAULT RESTORE Pragmas marked with accept the following special arguments default set the pragma to the initial value restore restore the previous value of the pragma Pragmas marked with are boolean flags and accept the following arguments on switch the flag on same as without argument off switch the flag off The compiler recognizes the following pragmas other pragmas are ignored alias symbol defined_symbol Define symbol as an alias for definined_symbol It corresponds to an equate directive equ at assembly level The symbol should not be defined elsewhere and defined_symbo should be defined with static storage duration not extern or automatic db See assembler directive EQU in section 3 8 2 Assembler Directives in Chapter Assembly Language clear noclear By default uninitialized global or static variables are cleared to zero on startup With pragma noclear this step is skipped Pragma clear resumes normal behavior d See C compiler option noclear in section 4 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options compactmaxmatch value Control the maximum size of a match Gb See C compiler option compact max size in section 4 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options extend s
221. g info g Description With this option you tell the control program to include debug information in the generated object file Related information J 4 120 Tool Options Control Program Control Program define D Command line syntax define macro_name macro_definition Dmacro_name macro_definition Description With this option you can define a macro and specify it to the preprocessor If you only specify a macro name no macro definition the macro expands as 1 You can specify as many macros as you like On the command line use the option define multiple times If the command line exceeds the length limit of the operating system you can define the macros in an option file which you then must specify to the control program with the option option file file f Defining macros with this option instead of in the C source is for example useful to compile or assemble conditional source as shown in the example below The control program passes the option define D to the compiler and the assembler Example Consider the following C program with conditional code to compile a demo program and a real program void main void if DEMO demo_func compile for the demo program else real_func compile for the real program endif You can now use a macro definition to set the DEMO flag With the control program this looks as follows cc51 define DEMO test c c
222. g that was previously defined with the DEFINE directive The substitution string associated with symbol is released and symbol will no longer represent a valid DEFINE substitution The assembler issues a warning if you redefine an existing symbol Example UNDEF LEN Undefines the LEN substitution string that was previously defined with the DEFINE directive Related information Gb DEFINE Define substitution string 3 43 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference WEAK Syntax WEAK symbol symbol Description With the WEAK directive you mark one or more symbols as weak The symbol can be defined in the same module with the GLOBAL directive or the EXTERN directive If the symbol does not already exist it will be created A weak external reference is resolved by the linker when a global or weak definition is found in one of the object files However a weak reference will not cause the extraction of a module from a library to resolve the reference You can overrule a weak definition with a GLOBAL definition in another module The linker will not complain about the duplicate definition and ignore the weak definition Only program labels and symbols defined with EQU can be made weak Example LOOPA EQU 1 definition of symbol LOOPA GLOBAL LOOPA LOOPA will be globally accessible by other modules WEAK LOOPA mark symbol LOOPA as weak se Related information d gt EXTERN Import
223. ger value x Not implemented Remainder after devision math h tgmath h Description fmod fmodl fmodf fmod Returns the remainder r of x ny n is chosen as trunc Xx y r has the same sign as x remainder remainderl remainder Returns the remainder r of x ny n is chosen as trunc Xx y r may not have remainderf the same sign as x Not implemented remquo remquol remquof remquo Same as remainder In addition the argument quo is given a specific value Power and absolute value functions see ISO Not implemented math h tgmath h Description cbrt cbrtl cbrtf ebrt Returns the real cube root of x x1 3 Not implemented fabs fabsl fabsf fabs Returns the absolute value of x x abs labs llabs div ldiv lldiv are defined in stdlib h fma fmal fmaf fma Floating point multiply add Returns x y z Not implemented hypot hypotl hypotf hypot Returns the square root of x2 y2 pow powl powf power Returns x raised to the power y xY sqrt sqrtl sqrtf sqrt Returns the non negative square root of x x0 Manipulation functions copysign nan nextafter nexttoward math h tgmath h Description copysign copysignl copysign Returns the value of x with the sign of y copysignf nan nanl nanf Returns a quiet NaN if available with content indcated through tagp Not implemented nextafter nextafterl nextafter Returns the next representable value in the specified format after x in the nextafterf direction of y Returns y is x
224. global section symbol GLOBAL Declare global section symbol 3 44 Assembly Language 3 9 Macro Operations Macros provide a shorthand method for inserting a repeated pattern of code or group of instructions You can define the pattern as a macro and then call the macro at the points in the program where the pattern would repeat Some patterns contain variable entries which change for each repetition of the pattern Others are subject to conditional assembly When a macro is called the assembler executes the macro and replaces the call by the resulting in line source statements In line means that all replacements act as if they are on the same line as the macro call The generated statements may contain substitutable arguments The statements produced by a macro can be any processor instruction almost any assembler directive or any previously defined macro Source statements resulting from a macro call are subject to the same conditions and restrictions as any other statements Macros can be nested The assembler processes nested macros when the outer macro is expanded 3 9 1 Defining a Macro The first step in using a macro is to define it The definition of a macro consists of three parts e Header which assigns a name to the macro and defines the arguments e Body which contains the code or instructions to be inserted when the macro is called e Terminator which indicates the end of the macro definition ENDM directi
225. gnment that you specify for the address space itself The heap keyword defines a heap in the address space and assigns a name to it The definition of a heap is similar to the definition of a stack See also the heap keyword in section 7 9 3 Creating or Modifying Special Sections db See section 7 9 Semantics of the Section Layout Definition for information on creating and placing stack sections Copy tables The copytable keyword defines a copy table in the address space The content of the copy table is created by the linker and contains the start address and size of all sections that should be initialized by the startup code You must define exactly one copy table in one of the address spaces for a core Optionally you can specify an alignment for the copy table with the argument align This alignment must be equal or larger than the alignment that you specify for the address space itself If smaller the alignment for the address space is used The copy_unit argument specifies the size in MAUs of information chunks that are copied If you do not specify the copy unit the MAU size of the address space itself is used The dest argument specifies the destination address space that the code uses for the copy table The linker uses this information to generate the correct addresses in the copy table The memory into where the sections must be copied at run time must be accessible from this destination space Sections generated for the copy
226. group in one page Instead of specifying a run time address you can specify a page and optional a page number Page numbers start from zero If you omit the page number the linker chooses a page The page keyword refers to pages in the address space as defined in the architecture definition With the page_size keyword you can override the page alignment and size set on the address space When you set the page size to zero the linker removes simple auto generated page restrictions from the selected sections See also the page_size keyword in section 7 5 3 Defining Address Spaces group page group page 3 7 29 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference e With the priority keyword you can change the order in which sections are located This is useful when some sections are considered important for good performance of the application and a small amount of fast memory is available The value is a number for which the default is 1 so higher priorities start at 2 Sections with a higher priority are located before sections with a lower priority unless their relative locate priority is already determined by other restrictions like run_addr and page group priority 2 select importantcodel select importantcode2 7 9 3 Creating or Modifying Special Sections Instead of selecting sections you can also create a reserved section or an output section or modify special sections like a stack or a heap Because y
227. gt ccerrors html Related information ie 4 122 Tool Options Control Program Control Program dry run n Command line syntax dry run n Description With this option you put the control program verbose mode The control program prints the invocations of the tools it would use to process the files without actually performing the steps Related information db Control Program option verbose v Verbose output 4 123 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Control Program error file Command line syntax error file Description With this option the control program tells the compiler assembler and linker to redirect error messages to a file The error file will be named after the input file with extension err for compiler or ers for assembler For the linker the error file is 1k51 e1k Example To write errors to error files instead of stderr enter cc51 error file t test c Related information d Control Program option warnings as errors Treat warnings as errors 4 124 Tool Options Control Program Control Program format Command line syntax format format You can specify the following formats IEEE IEEE 695 ELF ELF DWARF IHEX Intel Hex SREC Motorola S records Description With this option you specify the output format for the resulting absolute object file The default output format is IEEE 695 which can directly be used by the debugger
228. gth_byte gt lt address gt lt checksum_byte gt Object File Formats Example 9030210EA _ checksum _ address _ length The checksum calculation of S9 records is identical to SO 6 15 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 6 3 Intel Hex Record Format Intel Hex records describe the hexadecimal object file format for 8 bit 16 bit and 32 bit microprocessors The hexadecimal object file is an ASCII representation of an absolute binary object file There are six different types of records e Data Record 8 16 or 32 bit formats e End of File Record 8 16 or 32 bit formats e Extended Segment Address Record 16 or 32 bit formats e Start Segment Address Record 16 or 32 bit formats e Extended Linear Address Record 32 bit format only e Start Linear Address Record 32 bit format only By default the linker generates records in the 32 bit format 4 byte addresses General Record Format In the output file the record format is length offset type content Ea Where is the record header length is the record length which specifies the number of bytes of the content field This value occupies one byte two hexadecimal digits The linker outputs records of 255 bytes 32 hexadecimal digits or less that is ength is never greater than FFH offset is the starting load offset specifying an absolute address in memory where the data is to be located when loaded by a tool This field
229. hat no assignment is done for this field Anumber specifying the maximum field width The conversion characters d i n o u and x may be preceded by h if the argument is a pointer to short rather than int or by hh if the argument is a pointer to char or by I letter ell if the argument is a pointer to Long or by I for a pointer to long long j for a pointer to intmax_t or uintmax_t Z for a pointer to size_t or t for a pointer to ptrdiff_t The conversion characters e f and g may be preceded by l if the argument is a pointer to double rather than float and by L for a pointer toa long double A conversion specifier maximum field width and length modifier are optional the conversion character is not The conversion character must be one of the following if a character following is not in the list the behavior is undefined Length specifier and length modifier are optional the conversion character is not The conversion character must be one of the following if a character following is not in the list the behavior is undefined Character Scanned as d int signed decimal i int the integer may be given octal i e a leading 0 is entered or hexadecimal leading 0x or 0X or just decimal int unsigned octal int unsigned decimal int unsigned hexadecimal in lowercase or uppercase single character converted to unsigned char on Oo xX O char
230. he DEFINE directive you define a substitution string that you can use on all following source lines The assembler searches all succeeding lines for an occurrence of symbol and replaces it with string If the symbol occurs in a double quoted string it is also replaced Strings between single quotes are not expanded This directive is useful for providing better documentation in the source program A symbol can consist of letters digits and underscore characters _ and the first character cannot be a digit The assembler issues a warning if you redefine an existing symbol Example Suppose you defined the symbol LEN with the substitution string 32 DEFINE LEN 32 Then you can use the symbol LEN for example as follows DS LEN MESSAGE I The length is LEN The assembler preprocessor replaces LEN with 32 and assembles the following lines DS 32 MESSAGE I The length is 32 Related information UNDEF Undefine a DEFINE symbol or macro MACRO ENDM Define a macro Assembly Language DH Syntax label DH argument argument Description With the DH directive Define Half Word you allocate and initialize a half word of memory for each argument A half word is 8 bits byte so the DH directive is the same as the DB directive An argument is e asingle or multiple character string constant e an expression e NULL indicated by two adjacent commas If you specify label it ge
231. he Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization 3 Set the option Maximum code size increasse caused by to a value default 25 4 Set the option Maximum size for functions to always inline to a value default 10 Command line syntax inline max incr percentage Default 25 inline max size threshold Default 10 Description With these options you can control the function inlining optimization process of the compiler These options have only effect when you have enabled the inlining optimization option Oi Regardless of the optimization process the compiler always inlines all functions that have the function qualifier inline With the option inline max size you can specify the maximum size of functions that the compiler inlines as part of the optimization process The compiler always inlines all functions that are smaller than the specified threshold The threshold is measured in compiler internal units and the compiler uses this measure to decide which functions are small enough to inline The default threshold is 10 After the compiler has inlined all functions that have the function qualifier inline and all functions that are smaller than the specified threshold the compiler looks whether it can inline more functions without increasing the code size too much With the option inline max iner you can specify how much the code size is allowed to
232. he function evaluates to TRUE when the specified processor_type matches the processor type that was specified with the option Cpu cpu This function is useful to create conditional code for several targets as shown in the example 3 6 Assembly Language Example IF CPU tsk5la true if you specified option cpu tsk5la code for the TSK51A ELIF CPU tsk52a true if you specified option cpu tsk52a code for the TSK52A ELSE code for other processor types ENDIF Gls C compiler option cpu Select CPU in section 4 1 C Compiler Options of Chapter Too Options DEFINED symbol symbol Returns 1 if symbol has been defined 0 otherwise If symbol is quoted it is looked up as a DEFINE symbol if it is not quoted it is looked up as an ordinary symbol macro or label Example IF DEFINED ANGLE is symbol ANGLE defined IF DEFINED ANGLE does label ANGLE exist LSB expression Returns the east significant byte of the result of the expression The result of the expression is calculated as 16 bits LSW expression Returns the east significant word bits 0 15 of the result of the expression The result of the expression is calculated as a long 32 bits MSB expression Returns the most significant byte of the result of the expression The result of the expression is calculated as16 bits MSW expression Returns the most significant word bits 16
233. he linker to consider the given symbol as an undefined reference The linker tries to resolve this symbol either the symbol is defined in an object file or the linker extracts the corresponding symbol definition from a library This option is for example useful if the startup code is part of a library Because your own application does not refer to the startup code you can force the startup code to be extracted by specifying the symbol _ start as an unresolved external Example Consider the following invocation 1k51 mylib 1lib Nothing is linked and no output file will be produced because there are no unresolved symbols when the linker searches through mylib lib 1k51 extern _ start mylib lib In this case the linker searches for the symbol __start in the library and if found extracts the object that contains __start the startup code If this module contains new unresolved symbols the linker looks again in mylib lib This process repeats until no new unresolved symbols are found Related information d gt Section 4 4 Linking with Libraries in chapter Using the Linker of the user s manual 4 88 Tool Options Linker Linker first library first Menu entry Command line syntax first library first Description When the linker processes a library it searches for symbols that are referenced by the objects and libraries processed so far If the library contains a definition for an unresolved reference the linke
234. he list of supported pragmas typedefs t Show the list of predefined typedefs Description Displays an overview of all command line options With an argument you can specify which extended information is shown Example The following invocations all display a list of the available command line options c51 c51 help c51 The following invocation displays a list of the available pragmas c51 help pragmas 4 14 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler include directory l Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Select Build Options 3 Add a pathname in the Include files path field If you enter multiple paths separate them with a semicolon Command line syntax include directory path lpath Description With this option you can specify the path where your include files are located A relative path will be relative to the current directory The order in which the compiler searches for include files is 1 The pathname in the C source file and the directory of the C source only for include files that are enclosed in 2 The path that is specified with this option 3 The path that is specified in the environment variable C51 INC when the product was installed 4 The default include directory relative to the installation directory unless you specified option nostdinc Example Suppose that the C source file te
235. he memory by default You can locate sections in such memories using an absolute address or range restriction see subsection Locating a group in section 7 9 2 Creating and Locating Groups of Sections The mau field specifies the MAU size Minimum Addressable Unit of the memory This field is required The size field specifies the size in MAU of the memory This field is required The speed field specifies a symbolic speed for the memory 1 4 1 is the fastest 4 the slowest The linker uses the relative speed of the memories in such a way that optimal speed is achieved The default speed is 1 The map field specifies how this memory maps onto an internal bus Mappings are described in section 7 5 4 Mappings memory mem_name type rom mau 8 size 64k speed 2 map map_description With the bus keyword you define a bus in a derivative definition Buses are described in section 7 5 2 Defining Internal Buses 7 21 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 7 7 Semantics of the Board Specification Keywords in the board specification processor derivative bus mau width map memory type reserved rom ram nvram mau size speed map map dest bus space dest_dbits dest_offset size src_dbits sre offset 7 7 1 Defining a Processor If you have a target board with multiple processors that have the same derivative you need to instantiate each individual processor in a processor definition This in
236. ibiltity reasons _ getbit and__ putbit are implemented as macros __nop void _nop void Generate NOP instructions Returns nothing Example __nop generate NOP instruction __rol unsigned char _ rol unsigned char operand unsigned char count Use the RL instruction to rotate operand left count times Returns the rotated value 1 22 C Language Example unsigned char c int i rotate left using int variable c _rol c i __ror unsigned char _ ror unsigned char operand unsigned char count Use the RR instruction to rotate operand right count times Returns the rotated value Example unsigned char c int i rotate right using constant c _ror c 2 c ror c 3 c _ror c 7 __testclear __bit volatile _ testclear _ bit semaphore Read and clear semaphore using the JBC instruction Returns 0 if semaphore was not cleared by the JBC instruction 1 otherwise Example _ bit b unsigned char c if _ testclear amp b JBC instruction c 1 __vsp _ bit _vsp_ void Virtual stack pointer used Used in library function va_arg Returns 1 if the virtual stack pointer is used O otherwise __get_return_address __codeptr _ _get_return_address void Returns return address of a function 1 11 6 Interrupt Functions The TASKING C compiler supports a number of function qualifiers and keywords to program interrupt service r
237. ibrary directory Additional search path for system libraries Section 4 4 Linking with Libraries in chapter Using the Linker of the user s manual 4 132 Tool Options Control Program Control Program library directory L ignore default library path Command line syntax library directory dir Loir ignore default library path L Description With this option you can specify the path s where your system libraries specified with the library option are located If you want to specify multiple paths use the option library directory for each separate path By default path this is PRODDIR c51 1ib directory If you specify only L without a pathname or the long option ignore default library path the linker will not search the default path and also not in the paths specified in the environment variable LIBC51 So the linker ignores steps 2 and 3 as listed below The priority order in which the linker searches for system libraries specified with the library option is 1 The path that is specified with the library directory option 2 The path that is specified in the environment variable LIBC51 3 The default directory PRODDIR c51 1ib or a processor specific sub directory Example Suppose you call the control program as follows cc51 test c library directory c mylibs library c51ls First the linker looks in the directory c mylibs for library c511s 1ib this option If it does not f
238. if For example include arch 1s1 Preprocess and include the file arch 1s1 at this point in the LSL file 7 3 2 Lexical Syntax The following lexicon is used to describe the syntax of the Linker Script Language A B A is defined as B A BC A is defined as B and C B is followed by C A B C A is defined as B or C lt B gt 0 1 zero or one occurrence of B lt B gt gt 0 zero of more occurrences of B lt B gt gt 1 one of more occurrences of B IDENTIFIER a character sequence starting with a z A Z or _ Following characters may also be digits and dots STRING sequence of characters not starting with n r or t DOSTRING STRING double quoted string OCT_NUM octal number starting with a zero 06 045 DEC_NUM decimal number not starting with a zero 14 1024 HEX NUM hexadecimal number starting with Ox 0x0023 OxFFOO OCT_NUM DEC_NUM and HEX_NUM can be followed by a k kilo M mega or G giga Characters in bold are characters that occur literally Words in italics are higher order terms that are defined in the same or in one of the other sections To write comments in LSL file you can use the C style or C style TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 7 3 3 Identifiers arch_name IDENTIFIER bus_name IDENTIFIER core_name IDENTIFIER derivative_name IDENTIFIER file name DQSTRING group_name
239. ified object module s after the existing module posname b posname Move the specified object module s before the existing module posname Example Suppose the library mylib lib contains the following objects see option t obj1 obj obj2 obj obj3 0bj To move obj1 obj to the end of mylib lib tlb m mylib 1lib objl obj To move obj3 obj just before obj2 obj tlb m b obj3 o0bj mylib lib obj2 obj The library mylib lib after these two invocations now looks like obj3 0bj obj2 obj obj1 obj Related information db Librarian option t Print library contents 4 181 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Librarian p Command line syntax p Description Print the specified object module s in the library to standard output This option is only useful when you redirect or pipe the output to other files or tools that serve your own purposes Normally you do not need this option Example tlb p mylib lib objl obj gt file obj The librarian prints the file obj1 obj to standard output where it is redirected to the file ile obj The effect of this example is very similar to extracting a file from the library but in this case the extracted file gets another name Related information i 4 182 Tool Options Librarian Librarian r Command line syntax r a posname b posname c u v Description You can use the option r for several purposes e Adding new objects to the library
240. ile 1s1 The names are constructed of the derivative name followed by a colon the core name another colon and the space name Memory Part This part of the map file shows the memory usage in totals and percentages for spaces and chips The largest free block of memory per space and per chip is also shown Linker Script File Part This part of the map file shows the processor and memory information of the linker script file By default this part is not shown in the map file You have to turn this part on manually with linker option map file format lsl processor and memory info You can print this information to a separate file with linker option Isl dump 5 6 List File Formats Locate Rule Part This part of the map file shows the rules the linker uses to locate sections Address space The names of the address spaces as defined in the linker script file 1s1 The names are constructed of the derivative name followed by a colon the core name another colon and the space name Type The rule type ordered contiguous clustered unrestricted Specifies how sections are grouped By default a group is unrestricted which means that the linker has total freedom to place the sections of the group in the address space absolute The section must be located at the address shown in the Properties column address range The section must be located in the union of the address ranges shown in the Pro
241. iler to limit the number of matching instructions it considers for code compaction Example To limit the maximum number of instructions in functions that the compiler generates during code compaction c51 optimize compact compact max size 100 test c Related information C compiler option optimize compact Optimization code compaction C compiler option max call depth Maximum call depth for code compaction 4 7 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler debug info g Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Debug Information 3 Enable the option Generate symbolic debug information 4 Enable or disable the suboptions Command line syntax debug info suboption g d a You can set the following suboptions when you specify g without suboption the default is gd default d Generate default debug information all a Generate all debug information Description With this option you tell the compiler to add directives to the output file for including symbolic information This facilitates high level debugging but increases the size of the resulting assembler file and thus the size of the object file For the final application compile your C files without debug information When you specify a high optimization level debug comfort may decrease Therefore the compiler issues a warning if th
242. increase Default this is 25 which means that the compiler continues inlining functions until the resulting code size is 25 larger than the original size Example c51 inline max incr 40 inline max size 15 test c The compiler first inlines all functions with the function qualifier inline and all functions that are smaller than the specified threshold of 15 If the code size has still not increased with 40 the compiler decides which other functions it can inline Related information d gt C compiler option optimize Specify optimization level Section 1 11 4 nlining Functions in chapter C Language Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler integer enumeration Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Language 3 Enable the option Treat enumerated types always as integer Command line syntax integer enumeration Description Normally the compiler treats enumerated types as the smallest data type possible char orevenas __bit instead of int This reduces code size With this option the compiler always treats enum types as int as defined in the ISO C99 standard Related information d gt 4 19 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler iso c Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and
243. ind the requested libraries it looks in the directory that is set with the environment variable LIBC51 Then the linker looks in the default directory PRODDIR c51 1ib for libraries Related information d Linker option library Link system library 4 133 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Control Program list files Command line syntax list files name Description With this option you tell the assembler via the control programma to generate a list file for each specified input file A list file shows the generated object code and the relative addresses Note that the assembler generates a relocatable object file with relative addresses With name you can specify a name for the list file This is only possible if you specify only one input file to the control program If you do not specify name or you specify more than one input files the control program names the generated list file s after the specified input file s with extension 1st Example This example generates the list files 1 1st and 2 1st for 1 c and 2 c If in this example also a name had been specified it would be ignored because two input files are specified cc51 l c 2 c list files Related information Gb Assembler option list file Generate list file Assembler option list format List file formatting options 4 134 Tool Options Control Program Control Program IsI file d Command line syntax Isl file
244. ing is issued The i11 argument sets the default contents of vectors If nothing is specified for a vector this setting is used See below When no default is provided empty vectors may be used to locate large vector handlers and other sections Only one fill argument is allowed The vector field defines the content of vector with the number specified by id If a range is specified for id p q s t all vectors in the ranges inclusive are defined the same way With i111 symbo1_name the vector must jump to this symbol If the section in which the symbol is defined fits in the vector table size may be gt m locate the section at the location of the vector Otherwise insert code to jump to the symbol s value A template handler section name symbol name for the target code must be supplied in the LSL file i11 value s fills the vector with the specified MAU values With i111 1loop the vector jumps to itself With the optional offset you can specify an offset from the vector table entry 7 17 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Reserved address ranges e The reserved keyword specifies to reserve a part of an address space even if not all of the range is covered by memory See also the reserved keyword in section 7 9 3 Creating or Modifying Special Sections Start address e The start_address keyword specifies the start address for the position where the C startup code is located When a processor is reset
245. inker option library I Add library 4 137 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Control Program no map file Command line syntax no map file Description By default the control program tells the linker to generate a linker map file A linker map file is a text file that shows how the linker has mapped the sections and symbols from the various object files obj to the linked object file A locate part shows the absolute position of each section External symbols are listed per space with their absolute address both sorted on symbol and sorted on address With this option you prevent the generation of a map file Related information i 4 138 Tool Options Control Program Control Program no preprocessing only Command line syntax no preprocessing only Description On the command line the control program stops after preprocessing If you also want to compile the C source you can specify the option no preprocessing only In this case the control program calls the compiler twice once with option preprocess and once for a regular compilation Related information db Control program option preprocess E 4 139 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Control Program no warnings w Command line syntax no warnings number w number Description With this option you can suppress all warning messages or specific C compiler warning messages e If you do not specify this option
246. ion Treat warnings as errors Command line syntax warnings as errors Description If the compiler encounters an error it stops compiling When you use this option without arguments you tell the compiler to treat all warnings as errors This means that the exit status of the compiler will be non zero after one or more compiler warnings As a consequence the compiler now also stops after encountering a warning Related information Gls C compiler option no warnings Suppress some or all warnings 4 54 Tool Options Assembler 4 2 Assembler Options Altium Designer uses a makefile to build your entire project This means that in Altium Designer you cannot run the assembler separately If you want assembly results you must compile a single C source file from within Altium Designer the file is then also assembled However you can set options specific for the assembler Options in Altium Designer versus options on the command line Most command line options have an equivalent option in Altium Designer but some options are only available on the command line for example in a Windows Command Prompt If there is no equivalent option in Altium Designer you can specify a command line option in Altium Designer as follows 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Enter one or more command line options in the Additional a
247. ion modifies an object that is not referenced in the loop test Numeric variables being used within a for loop for iteration counting shall not be modified in the body of the loop Boolean operations whose results are invariant shall not be permitted There shall be no unreachable code All non null statements shall either a have at least one side effect however executed or b cause control flow to change Before preprocessing a null statement shall only occur on a line by itself it may be followed by a comment provided that the first character following the null statement is a white space character The goto statement shall not be used The continue statement shall not be used For any iteration statement there shall be at most one break statement used for loop termination A function shall have a single point of exit at the end of the function The statement forming the body of a switch while do while or for statement be a compound statement An if expression construct shall be followed by a compound statement The else keyword shall be followed by either a compound statement or another if statement Allif else if constructs shall be terminated with an else clause Switch statements 15 1 15 2 15 3 15 4 15 5 3333 2 A switch label shall only be used when the most closely enclosing compound statement is the body of a switch statement An unconditional break statement shall terminate every non emp
248. ions you can overrule this option with another file or no file at all The specified include file is included before all other includes This is the same as specifying include file at the very beginning of each of your C source files Example c51 include file stdio h testl c test2 c The file stdio h is included at the beginning of both test1 c and test2 c Related information db C compiler option include directory Add directory to include file search path Section 2 4 How the Compiler Searches Include Files in chapter Using the Compiler of the user s manual Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler inline Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option inline to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax inline Description With this option you instruct the compiler to inline calls to functions without the noinline function qualifier whenever possible This option has the same effect as a pragma inline at the start of the source file This option can be useful to increase the possibilities for code compaction compiler option optimize compact Related information Gb C compiler option optimize compact Code compaction 4 17 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler inline max incr inline max size Menu entry 1 From t
249. is introduced at the first section begin SB command The contents of a section may follow its introduction A section ends at the next SB command with a number different from the current number A section resumes at an SB command with a number that has been introduced before SB Command SB_command SB hex_number The maximum number of sections in an object module is implementation defined ST Command The ST command specifies the type of a section ST_command ST section_number section_type section_name section_type letter section_name char_string A section can be named or unnamed If section_name is omitted a section is unnamed A section can be relocatable or absolute If the section start address is an absolute number the section is called absolute If the section start address is not yet known the section is called relocatable In relocatable sections all addresses are specified relative to the relocation base of that section The relocation phase of the linker may map the relocation base of a section onto a fixed address During linkage edition the section name and the section attributes identify a section and thus the actions to be taken If a section is defined in several modules the linkage editor must determine how to act on sections with the same name This can be either one of the following strategies e several sections are to be joined into a single one e several s
250. is option for the graphical version of the make utility when you create sub projects In this case the make utility calls another instance of the make utility for the sub project With the option c the make utility runs as a child process of the current make The option c overrules the option err Example tmk c The make utility runs its commands as a child processes Related information J 4 155 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility D DD Command line syntax D DD Description With the option D the make utility prints every line of the makefile to standard output as it is read by tmk With the option DD not only the lines of the makefile are printed but also the lines of the tmk mk file implicit rules Example tmk D Each line of the makefile that is read by the make utility is printed to standard output usually your screen Related information i 4 156 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility d dd Command line syntax d dd Description With the option d the make utility shows which files are out of date and thus need to be rebuild The option dd gives more detail than the option d Example tmk d Shows which files are out of date and rebuilds them Related information J 4 157 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility e Command line syntax e Description If you use macro definitions they may overrule the settings of the en
251. is the default memory model Per memory model you can choose to use reentrancy which enables you to call functions recursively Each memory model has a default memory type You can overrule the default memory type with one of the memory type qualifiers see section 1 3 1 Memory Type Qualifiers This allows you to exceed the default maximum RAM size C Language 1 4 1 Compiling for the Small Auxiliary Large or Reentrant Memory Model By default the TSK51x TSK52x compiler uses the small memory model In the small memory model all data objects with the default memory type and the stack used for function parameter passing must fit in the internal RAM Objects with an explicit memory type qualifier can exceed this limitation for example an object qualified as ___xdata or ___pdata Note that the stack length depends upon the nesting depth of the various functions Accessing data in internal RAM is considerably faster than accessing data in external RAM Therefore it is useful to place often used variables in internal data memory and less often referenced data elements in external data memory When the compiler uses the large memory model to access data the produced code is larger and in some cases slower than the code for a similar operation in one of the other memory models The auxiliary page memory model is especially interesting for derivatives with 256 bytes of external RAM on chip All data objects with the default memory type must f
252. it number_of_ MAUs expression Examples LR002000400060 LRT80 0020 LR R2 100 4 The first example shows immediate constants which may be loaded as a part of an LR command The second example shows the use of the relocation base defined in the previous paragraph followed by a constant The third example shows how the value of the expression R2 100 is used to load 4 MAUs The three commands in this example may be combined into one LR command LR002000400060T80 0020 R2 100 4 RE Command The replicate command defines the number of times a LR command must be replicated RE_command RE expression The LR command must immediately follow the RE command Example REO4 LR R2 200 4 The commands above load 16 MAUs 4 times the 4 MAU value of R2 200 6 1 4 7 Linkage Commands RI Command The retain internal symbol command indicates that the symbolic information of an NI command must be retained in the output file Rl_command R _variable level_number level_number i hex_number WX Command The weak external command flags a previously defined external NX_command as weak This means that if the external remains unresolved the value of the expression in the WX command is assigned to the X variable WX_command W X_variable default_value default_value expression TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference LI Command The LI command specifies
253. it in one 256 bytes page Optionally you can choose to enable reentrancy lf you select reentrancy a less efficient virtual dynamic stack is used which allows you to call functions recursively With reentrancy you can call functions at any time even from interrupt functions To select the memory model to compile for 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog appears 2 Make sure you have selected the TASKING TSK51x TSK52x processor class 3 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Memory Model 4 Select the Aux Large or Small memory model 5 Optionally enable the Allow reentrant functions check box Using predefined macro ___MODEL__ to write conditional code With the predfined macro _ MODEL__ you can write conditional C code in one source for different memory models Depending on the memory model for which you compile the macro _ MODEL __ expands to A a auxiliary memory model large memory model s small memory model Example if _ MODEL s this part is only for the small memory model endif 1 5 Using Assembly in the C Source _asm With the __asm keyword you can use assembly instructions in the C source and pass C variables as operands to the assembly code Be aware that C modules that contain assembly are not portable and harder to compile in other environments Furthermore assembly blocks are not interpreted by the compiler they are regarded as
254. ize Specify the maximum amount of internal RAM to be used for automatic variables to be made register variables See section 1 8 1 Automatic Variables in Chapter C Language See C compiler option extend x in section 4 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options extension isuffix Enables a language extension to specify imaginary floating point constants With this extension you can use an i suffix on a floating point constant to make the type Imaginary extern symbol Force an external reference extern assembler directive even when the symbol is not used in the module Gb See assember directive EXTERN in section 3 8 2 Assembler Directives in Chapter Assembly Language inline noinline smartinline Instead of the qualifier inline you can also use pragma inline and pragma noinline to inline a function body int w X Y Z C Language pragma inline int add int a int b int i 4 return a b pragma noinline void main void add 1 2 z add x y Wl If a function has an inline or _noinline function qualifier then this qualifier will overrule the current pragma setting d See section 1 11 4 Inlining Functions inline __noinline By default small fuctions that are not too often called from different locations are inlined This reduces execution speed at the cost of code size C compiler option Oi With the pragma noinline pragma sm
255. k number b Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option bank number number to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax bank number number bnumber Description Select the default register bank number for all functions of the module You can specify register bank 0 1 2 or 3 Notice that no code is generated to switch to this register bank The default register bank is 0 Related information d gt See section 1 11 6 3 Register Bank Switching __registerbank in chapter C Language 4 3 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler bypass Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option bypass value to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax bypass value You can specify the following values 0 No bypasses default 1 Bypass chip erratum for Dallas DS80C390 Description With bypass 1 you can bypass the erratum regarding the DIV AB instruction for the Dallas DS80C390 The DIV AB instruction can return erroneous results if the A register is accessed immediately preceding the DIV AB instruction With this option you tell the compiler to insert a NOP instruction between the Mov and DIV instruction
256. k rights to the same are claimed v8 0 31 3 08 Table of Contents Table of Contents C Language 1 1 1 1 MMOD UCHON wid catego donald aan gdh a M Aine tune a heh ea E eo eae ade 1 1 1 2 Data TY PGS tcc sed scene andwed a ce Seinen aed colt dba teamed E EA E D tam dng Oe 1 2 1 3 Memory Qualifiers 2 0 0 0 0 00 cece cee nent eens 1 3 1 3 1 Memory Type Qualifiers 0 nent eee ees 1 3 1 3 2 Accessing Hardware from __sfr _ bsfr 2 eee eee 1 4 1 3 3 Placing an Object at an Absolute Address at 0 eee eee eee 1 6 1 4 Memory Models for the TSK51x TSK52x 0 tee ees 1 6 1 4 1 Compiling for the Small Auxiliary Large or Reentrant Memory Model 45 1 7 1 5 Using Assembly in the C Source _ASM 0 kee teenies 1 7 1 6 Pragmas to Control the Compiler 0 cc cece eens 1 11 1 7 Predefined Preprocessor Macros 0 cece ete ete 1 15 1 8 NMAMADIOSS croson e a atta nt ame a eaten S amlerandesatte pina naaint doe tiara waves 1 16 1 8 1 Automatic Variables lt isa 2iia we cieavc die ean eau ar hea ae a Os 1 16 1 8 2 initialized Variables v i e esc iecon qnid erei wane ena doles E ERE tae wt eee eae wean 1 16 1 9 SWINGS ped siia eae ars aie ae dans Dia gE ee dibng peed da a iaria naa a bod a wad ealed 1 16 1 10 SWiItCh StateMeNt asii ineen a oes Rag oan e a a i Da a EE 1 18 1 11 FUNCHONS oeie e a veka a a a E aa el aa ded ed E SER 1 19 1 11 1 Reentrant Functions sasachie ss cag bine nit
257. l not be used The time handling functions of library lt time h gt shall not be used Minimization of run time failures shall be ensured by the use of at least one of a static analysis tools techniques b dynamic analysis tools techniques c explicit coding of checks to handle run time faults Index Index Symbols __asm syntax 1 7 __at 1 6 __BIG_ENDIAN __ 1 15 __bsfr 1 5 _ BUILD_ 1 15 _ C51__ 1 15 __CPU_ 1 15 __interrupt 1 24 __MODEL_ 1 15 __noinline 1 20 __noregaddr 1 26 _ reentrant 1 19 __ REVISION __ 1 15 __sfr 1 4 1 5 __SINGLE_FP_ 1 15 _ static 1 19 __TASKING_ 1 15 __ VERSION __ 1 15 _close 2 5 _Exit 2 18 _fss_break 2 4 _fss_init 2 4 _IOFBF 2 12 _IOLBF 2 12 _IONBF 2 12 _lseek 2 5 _open 2 5 _tead 2 5 _tolower 2 2 _unlink 2 5 _write 2 5 A abort 2 18 abs 2 19 Absolute Address 1 6 access 2 22 Accessing Hardware from C 1 4 acos functions 2 6 acosh functions 2 7 Address spaces 7 15 alias 1 12 align 3 10 Alignment gaps 7 28 Architecture definition 7 1 7 14 arg 3 6 asctime 2 21 asin functions 2 6 asinh functions 2 7 Assembler directives align 3 10 break 3 11 bs 3 12 bsb 3 12 bsbit 3 12 bsh 3 12 bsl 3 12 bsw 3 12 calls 3 13 db 3 14 dbit 3 15 define 3 16 dh 3 17 dl 3 18 ds 3 19 dsb 3 19 dsbit 3 19 dsh 3 19 dsl 3 19 dsw 3 19 dw 3 20 end 3 21 equ 3 22 extern 3 2
258. le useful to undefine predefined macros However you cannot undefine predefined ISO C standard macros The control program passes the option undefine U to the compiler Example To undefine the predefined macro _ TASKING_ cc51 undefine _ TASKING test c Related information d gt Control Pogram option define Define preprocessor macro 4 147 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Control Program verbose v Command line syntax verbose V Description With this option you put the control program in verbose mode With the option v the control program performs it tasks while it prints the steps it performs to stdout Related information db Control Program option n dry run Verbose output and suppress execution 4 148 Tool Options Control Program Control Program version V Command line syntax version V Description Display version information The control program ignores all other options or input files Related information J 4 149 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Control Program warnings as errors Command line syntax warnings as errors Description If one of the tools encounters an error it stops processing the file s With this option you tell the tools to treat warnings as errors As a consequence the tools now also stop after encountering a warning Related information d Control Program option no warnings Suppress all warnings
259. level 4 187 Libraries linking 4 89 4 104 Library specifying 4 94 4 95 4 132 4 133 4 134 linear_switch 1 14 Linker macro 4 84 Linker options 4 81 4 90 case insensitive 4 82 chip output 4 83 define 4 84 diag 4 85 error file 4 86 error limit 4 87 extern 4 88 extra verbose 4 112 first library first 4 89 help 4 90 ignore default library path 4 95 include directory 4 91 incremental 4 92 keep output files 4 93 library 4 94 library directory 4 95 link only 4 96 Isl check 4 97 Isl dump 4 98 lsl file 4 99 map file 4 100 map file format 4 101 misra c report 4 102 no rescan 4 104 no rom copy 4 105 no warnings 4 106 non romable 4 103 optimize 4 107 option file 4 108 output 4 109 strip debug 4 110 user provided initialization code 4 111 verbose 4 112 version 4 113 warnings as errors 4 114 C 4 83 D 4 84 d 4 99 Index e 4 88 f 4 108 l 4 91 i 4 111 k 4 93 L 4 95 l 4 94 M 4 100 m 4 101 N 4 105 O 4 107 0 4 109 r 4 92 S 4 110 V 4 113 v 4 112 w 4 112 w 4 106 diagnostics 4 106 4 114 libraries 4 94 4 104 Map File 4 100 miscellaneous 4 82 4 84 4 88 4 98 4 99 optimization 4 107 output format 4 83 Linker script file 4 97 4 98 architecture definition 7 1 board specification 7 2 bus definition 7 2 derivative definition 7 1 memory definition 7 2
260. lity If the erroneous files are not removed the make utility may process corrupt files on a subsequent invocation Use this option when you still want to use the generated file For example when you know that a particular error does not result in a corrupt object file or when you want to inspect the output file or send it to Altium support Related information J 4 93 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Linker library l Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Libraries 3 Enable the option Link default C libraries Command line syntax library name Iname Description With this option you tell the linker to use system library name Lib where name is a string The linker first searches for system libraries in any directories specified with library directory then in the directories specified with the environment variable LIBC51 unless you used the option ignore default library path Example To search in the system library c511s 1ib C library 1k51 test obj mylib lib library c5lls The linker links the file test obj and first looks in mylib 1ib in the current directory only then in the system library c511s 1ib to resolve unresolved symbols Related information d Linker option library directory Additional search path for system libraries Section 4 4 Linking with Libraries in chapt
261. locating sections at the highest addresses in the address space but preserves the order of sections when necessary one processor and core in this example section_layout my_ space direction high_to_low section statements LAN If you do not explicitly tell the linker how to locate a section the linker decides on the basis of the section attributes in the object file and the information in the architecture definition and memory parts where to locate the section 7 9 2 Creating and Locating Groups of Sections Sections are located per group A group can contain one or more sets of input sections as well as other groups Per group you can assign a mutual order to the sets of sections and locate them into a specific memory part group group_specifications section_statements With the section_statements you generally select sets of sections to form the group This is described in subsection Selecting sections for a group Instead of selecting sections you can also modify special sections like stack and heap or create a reserved section This is described in section 7 9 3 Creating or Modifying Special Sections With the group_specifications you actually locate the sections in the group This is described in subsection Locating a group Selecting sections for a group With the select keyword you can select one or more sections for the group You can select a section by name or by attributes If you select a se
262. ly available on the command line for example in a Windows Command Prompt If there is no equivalent option in Altium Designer you can specify a command line option in Altium Designer as follows 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Enter one or more command line options in the Additional C compiler options field Invocation syntax on the command line Windows Command Prompt To call the compiler from the command line use the following syntax c51 option file The input file must be a C source file c or ic 4 1 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Short and long option names Options can have both short and long names Short option names always begin with a single minus character long option names always begin with double minus characters You can abbreviate long option names as long as the name is unique You can mix short and long option names on the command line Options can have flags or sub options To switch a flag on use a lowercase letter or a ongflag To switch a flag off use an uppercase letter or a ongflag Separate longflags with commas The following two invocations are equivalent c51 Oac test c c51 optimize coalesce cse test c When you do not specify an option a default value may become active 4 2 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler ban
263. ly directives you can instruct the macro preprocessor to use a part of the code that matches a certain condition You can specify assembly conditions with arguments in the case of macros or through definition of symbols via the DEFINE SET and EQU directives The built in functions of the assembler provide a versatile means of testing many conditions of the assembly environment You can use conditional directives also within a macro definition to check at expansion time if arguments fall within a range of allowable values In this way macros become self checking and can generate error messages to any desired level of detail The conditional assembly directive IF ENDIF has the following form IF expression ELIF expression the ELIF directive is optional ELSE the ELSE directive is optional ENDIF A section of a program that is to be conditionally assembled must be bounded by an IF ENDIF directive pair If the optional ELSE and or ELIF directives are not present then the source statements following the IF directive and up to the next ENDIF directive will be included as part of the source file being assembled only if the expression had a non zero result If the expression has a value of zero the source file will be assembled as if those statements between the IF and the ENDIF directives were never encountered If the ELSE directive is present and expression has a nonzero result then the statemen
264. m result r a r b 0 corresponds with the first C variable 1 with the second and so on Generated assembly code mov RO _b mov Rl _a MOV A RO ADD A R1 MOV result A Specifying registers for C variables With a constraint character you specify the register type for a parameter In the example above the r is used to force the use of registers Rn for the parameters a and b You can reserve the registers that are already used in the assembly instructions either in the parameter lists or in the reserved register list register_save_list also called clobber list The compiler takes account of these lists so no unnecessary register saving and restoring instructions are placed around the inline assembly instructions C Language Constraint Type Operand Remark character a accumulator A b bit ACC 0 7 B 0 7 C bit registers variables AC FO RS1 RSO OV F1 P _bitvar d direct register PSW SP B ACC DPH direct address of registers DPL AR 0 7 i immediate value data data16 m memory direct label addr11 memory variable or function address addr16 rel p data page pointer DPTR r register R 0 7 R registers R01 R12 R23 R34 R45 word registers R56 R67 Ss register indirect RO R1 register indirect addressing number other operand same as number Input constraint only The number must refer to an output parameter Indicates that number
265. mbers separated by commas of the warnings you want to suppress Command line syntax no warnings number w number Description With this option you can suppresses all warning messages or specific warning messages e If you do not specify this option all warnings are reported e If you specify this option but without numbers all warnings are suppressed e If you specify this option with a number only the specified warning is suppressed You can specify the option no warnings number multiple times Example To suppress warnings 135 and 136 enter 135 136 in the Specific warnings to suppress field or enter the following on the command line 1k51 no warnings 135 136 test obj Related information d gt Linker option warnings as errors Treat warnings as errors 4 106 Tool Options Linker Linker optimize O Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Optimization 3 Select an optimization level in the Optimization level box If you select Custom Optimization 4 Enable the optimizations you want Command line syntax optimize flags Offlags Use the following options for predefined sets of flags optimize 0 O0 No optimization Alias for OCLTXY optimize 1 O1 Default optimization Alias for OCLtxy optimize 2 O2 All optimizations Alias for Ocltxy You ca
266. mbols This is an error when the incremental linking option is disabled The lt message gt indicates the symbol that is unresolved To write an explanation of all errors and warnings in HTML format to file Lerrors htm1 enter 1k51 diag html all gt lerrors html Related information J 4 85 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Linker error file Menu entry Command line syntax error file file Description With this option the linker redirects error messages to a file If you do not specify a filename the error file is 1k51 e1k Example To write errors to errors elk instead of stderr enter 1k51 error file errors elk test obj Related information ie 4 86 Tool Options Linker Linker error limit Menu entry Command line syntax error limit number Description With this option you tell the linker to only emit the specified maximum number of errors When 0 null is specified the linker emits all errors Without this option the maximum number of errors is 42 Related information J 4 87 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Linker extern e Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option extern to the Additional linker options field Command line syntax extern symbol e symbol Description With this option you force t
267. meters shall match the prototype The values returned by void functions shall not be used Void expressions shall not be passed as function parameters const should be used for reference parameters not modified A function should have a single point of exit Every exit point shall have a return of the declared return type For void functions return shall not have an expression Function calls with no parameters should have empty parentheses If a function returns error information it should be tested A violation is reported when the return value of a function is ignored include shall only be preceded by other directives or comments Non standard characters shall not occur in include directives include shall be followed by either lt filename gt or filename Plain macros shall only be used for constants qualifiers specifiers Macros shall not be define d and undef d within a block undef should not be used A function should be used in preference to a function like macro A function like macro shall not be used without all arguments Macro arguments shall not contain pre preprocessing directives A violation is reported when the first token of an actual macro argument is Macro definitions parameters should be enclosed in parentheses Don t use undefined identifiers in pre processing directives A macro definition shall contain at most one or operator All uses of the pragma directive shall be documented
268. ml all gt cerrors html Related information J 4 11 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler error file Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax error file file Description With this option the compiler redirects error messages to a file If you do not specify a filename the error file will be named after the input file with extension err Example To write errors to errors err instead of stderr enter c51 error file errors err test c Related information ie 4 12 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler extend x Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option x to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax extend size xsize Description By default the compiler uses a maximum of four bytes of internal RAM for automatic registers With this option you can change the number of bytes the compiler uses as a maximum Related information Gls Section 1 8 1 Automatic Variables in the chapter C Language 4 13 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler help Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax help item You can specify the following arguments intrinsics i Show the list of intrinsic functions options 0 Show extended option descriptions pragmas p Show t
269. mon to define external memory off chip and external buses at the global scope outside any enclosing definition Internal memory on chip memory is usually defined in the scope of a derivative definition With the keyword memory you define physical memory that is present on the target board The memory name is used to identify the memory and does not conflict with other identifiers If you define memory parts in the LSL file only the memory defined in these parts is used for placing sections If no external memory is defined in the LSL file and if the linker option to allocate memory on demand is set then the linker will assume that all virtual addresses are mapped on physical memory You can override this behavior by specifying one or more memory definitions memory mem_name type rom mau 8 size 64k speed 2 map map_description d gt For a description of the keywords see section 7 6 3 Defining Internal Memory and Buses With the keyword bus you define a bus the combination of data and corresponding address bus The bus name is used to identify a bus and does not conflict with other identifiers Bus descriptions at the global scope outside any definition define external buses These are buses that are present on the target board bus bus_name mau 8 width 8 map map _ description d For a description of the keywords see section 7 5 2 Defining Internal Buses You can connect off
270. n asection sizeof sect asection LN The group and sect arguments only works in assignments The mem argument can be used anywhere in section layouts 7 3 6 LSL Definitions in the Linker Script File description lt definition gt 1 definition architecture_definition derivative _definition board_spec section definition section_setup e Atleast one architecture_definition must be present in the LSL file 7 3 7 Memory and Bus Definitions mem_def memory mem_name lt mem descr gt 7 e Amem def defines a memory with the mem_name as a unique name mem_descr 7 type lt reserved gt 1 mem type mau expr size expr speed number mapping e Amem def contains exactly one type statement e Amem def contains exactly one mau statement non zero size e Amem def contains exactly one size statement e Amem def contains zero or one speed statement default value is 1 e Amem def contains at least one mapping mem_type rom attrs rx ram attrs rw nvram attrs rwx bus_def bus bus_name lt bus_descr gt 7 e Abus_def statement defines a bus with the given bus_name as a unique name within a core architecture bus_descr mau expr width expr bus width nr l of data bits mapping legal destination bus only e The mau and width statements appear exactly once ina bus_descr The default value for width is the mau
271. n body pragma inline unsigned int abs int val unsigned int abs _val val if val lt 0 abs_val val return abs _ val pragma noinline void main void int i i abs 1 If a function has an inline __noinline function qualifier then this qualifier will overrule the current pragma setting With the pragma noinline pragma smartinline you can temporarily disable the default behavior that the C compiler automatically inlines small functions when you turn on the C compiler option optimize inline 1 11 5 Intrinsic Functions Some specific assembly instructions have no equivalence in C ntrinsic functions give the possibility to use these instructions Intrinsic functions are predefined functions that are recognized by the compiler The compiler generates the most efficient assembly code for these functions The compiler always inlines the corresponding assembly instructions in the assembly source rather than calling it as a function This avoids parameter passing and register saving instructions which are normally necessary during function calls Intrinsic functions produce very efficient assembly code Though it is possible to inline assembly code by hand intrinsic functions use registers even more efficiently At the same time your C source remains very readable You can use intrinsic functions in C as if they were ordinary C library functions All intrinsics begin with a double underscore character
272. n other sections the assembler issues a warning and only reserves space just as with DS The BSBIT BSB BSH BSW and BSL directives are variants of the BS directive BSBIT The expression argument specifies the number of bits to reserve You can only use this directive in sections of type bit BSB The expression argument specifies the number of bytes to reserve In a bit type section the BSB directive still initializes 8 bits BSH Same as the BSB directive BSW The expression argument specifies the number of words to reserve one word is 16 bits In a bit type section the BSW directive still initializes 16 bits BSL The expression argument specifies the number of longs to reserve one long is 32 bits In a bit type section the BSL directive still initializes 32 bits Example The BSB directive is for example useful to define and initialize an array that is only partially filled section data data init DB 84 101 115 116 initialize 4 bytes BSB 96 0xFF reserve another 96 bytes initialized with OxFF Related information d gt DS Define Storage 3 12 Assembly Language CALLS Syntax CALLS caller callee Description With this directive you indicate that a function caller calls another function callee Normally CALLS directives are automatically generated by the compiler Use the CALLS directive in hand coded assembly when the assembly code calls a C function If you
273. n set the following flags delete unreferenced sections c C Delete unreferenced sections from the output file first fit decreasing VL Use a first fit decreasing algorithm to locate unrestricted sections in memory copytable compression t T Emit smart restrictions to reduce copy table size delete duplicate code x X Delete duplicate code sections from the output file delete duplicate data y Y Delete duplicate constant data from the output file Description With this option you can control the level of optimization the linker performs If you do not use this option optimize 1 is the default Related information d gt Section 4 7 Linker Optimizations in chapter Using the Linker of the user s manual 4 107 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Linker option file f Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option option file to the Additional linker options field Be aware that the options in the option file are added to the linker options you have set in the other dialogs Only in extraordinary cases you may want to use them in combination Altium Designer automatically saves the options with your project Command line syntax option file file f file Description This option is primarily intended for command line use Instead of typing all options on the comma
274. na 6 5 6 1 4 3 SOCUONS is Eea d Mem a E arpa e a shade dwridaddeaideteedee dod bd eae eae 6 6 6 1 4 4 Symbolic Name Declaration and Type Definition 0 eee ete 6 7 6 1 4 5 Value Assignment 2 ceca pete cya Bek od CAO SE ee oe ate bea edad ad Nav ees 6 8 6 1 4 6 Loading Commands ss eck eee cb ae ead ee dee bod eae boa ed he Od Dea a eat 6 8 6 1 4 7 Linkage Commands sfiscoik area aed Seated ia nana eaa pie a e eee eed 6 9 6 1 5 MUFOMLFUNCHONS secere ieiani erii er Tann aek EE aa inden toda bed bade bee 6 10 6 2 Motorola S Record Format 0 c cece teenies 6 13 6 3 Intel Hex Record Format 2 0 06 cise eee eei Gabe ee ed ee eee eG 6 16 Linker Script Language 7 1 7 1 IMMOCUCHON w asnste cute socio rinon ac Siaoe adaeeha a goatee ew wean Ahab o a a wile abate oes 7 1 7 2 Structure of a Linker Script File 2 0 eects 7 1 7 3 Syntax of the Linker Script Language 0 cece cece 7 3 7 3 1 Preprocessing kosrsdietii taani noi E e aoe A E E he EN T EAA 7 3 7 3 2 Lexical Syntax 2 0 0 a a eio aaaea E Aaa E i E aa aa e a A aaa 7 3 7 3 3 ldentifietS ae eat teenie tira eG A e Ea a aE ei Gia d Oe ol i aE E E eA 7 4 7 3 4 EXpreSSiOnS ocacccconi terene ba Deen E DEE EEE VEE pE RG RET OE ERE E OE NDE EE 7 4 7 3 5 Built in FUACtons iseeesoiricgegdcaroterpe badena in a a A seed arwi 7 5 7 3 6 LSL Definitions in the Linker Script File 00 0 cece cece eee 7 6 7 3 7 Memory and Bus Definitions 0 eens 7 6 7 3
275. name name func must be combined to one section name according to the rules for func obtained from the call graph S separate overlap multiple sections can have the same name and they may relocated at unrelated addresses N now when section is located before normal sections without N or P P postpone when section is located after normal sections without N or P Table 6 1 Section types SA Command SA_command SA section_number MAU_boundary page_size MAU_ boundary expression page_size expression The MAU boundary value forces the relocator to align a section on the number of MAUs specified If page_size is present the relocator checks that the section does not exceed a page boundary limit when it is relocated 6 1 4 4 Symbolic Name Declaration and Type Definition NI Command The NI command defines an internal symbol An internal symbol is visible outside the module Thus it may resolve an undefined external in another module no yo NI_command N _ variable char_string The NI_command must precede any reference to the _ variable in a module There may not be more than one I _ variable with the same name or number NX Command The NX command defines an external symbol which is undefined in the current module The NX command must precede all occurrences of the corresponding X variable NX_command N X_variable char_string Th
276. nce it was started This low level routine is not implemented because it strongly depends on the hardware To determine the time in seconds the result of clock should be divided by the value defined as CLOCKS_PER_SEC 12000000 Returns the difference t1 t0 in seconds Converts the broken down time in the structure pointed to by tp to a value of type time_t The return value has the same encoding as the return value of the time function Returns the current calendar time This value is also assigned to timer g Converts the broken down time in the structure pointed to by tp into a string in the form Mon Jan 21 16 15 14 2004 n 0 Returns a pointer to this string Converts the calender time pointed to by timer to local time in the form of a string This is equivalent to asctime localtime timer Converts the calender time pointed to by timer to the broken down time expressed as UTC Returns a pointer to the broken down time Converts the calendar time pointed to by timer to the broken down time expressed as local time Returns a pointer to the broken down time The next function has a parallel function defined in wchar h stdio h wcehar h strftime s smax fmt tm tp wstrftime s smax fmt tm tp Formats date and time information from struct tm tp into s according to the specified format fmt No more than smax characters are placed into s The formatting of strf time is locale specific using the LC_TIME category see
277. nd line you can create an option file which contains all options and flags you want to specify With this option you specify the option file to the linker Use an option file when the length of the command line would exceed the limits of the operating system or just to store options and save typing You can specify the option option file multiple times Format of an option file e Multiple arguments on one line in the option file are allowed e To include whitespace in an argument surround the argument with single or double quotes e If you want to use single quotes as part of the argument surround the argument by double quotes and vise versa This has a single quote embedded This has a double quote embedded This has a double quote and a single quote embedded e When a text line reaches its length limit use a to continue the line Whitespace between quotes is preserved This is a continuation line gt This is a continuation line e tis possible to nest command line files up to 25 levels Example Suppose the file myoptions contains the following lines Mmymap generate a map file test obj input file Lc mylibs additional search path for system libraries Specify the option file to the linker 1k51 option file myoptions This is equivalent to the following command line 1k51 Mmymap test obj Lc mylibs Related information de 4 108 Tool Options Linker
278. ndicators for stream Returns a non zero value if the error indicator for stream is set Returns a non zero value if the end of file indicator for stream is set Prints s and the error message belonging to the integer errno See section 2 2 4 errno h 2 2 23 Stdlib h and wchar h The header file std1ib h contains general utility functions which fall into the following categories Some have parallel wide character declared in wchar h e Numeric conversions e Random number generation e Memory management e Envirnoment communication e Searching and sorting e Integer arithmetic e Multibyte wide character and string conversions Macros EXIT_SUCCES 0 EXIT_FAILURE 1 RAND_MAX 32767 MB_CUR_MAX 1 Predefined exit codes that can be used in the exit function Highest number that can be returned by the rand srand function Maximum number of bytes in a multibyte character for the extended character set specified by the current locale category LC_CTYPE see section 2 2 13 ocale h 2 17 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Numeric conversions The following functions convert the intial portion of a string s to a double int long int andlong long int value respectively double atof s int atoi s long atol s long long atoll s The following functions convert the initial portion of the string s to a float double and long double value respectively endp will point to the first character not used by the
279. ned as the load time start address of the section The symbol __1e_ce_section_name is defined as the load time end address of the section C or assembly code may be used to copy the overlaid sections If sections in the overlay group contain references between groups the linker reports an error The keyword allow_cross_references tells the linker to accept cross references Normally it does not make sense to have references between sections that are overlaid group ovl overlay group a select my_ovl_p1 select my_ovl_p2 group b select my_ovl_ql1 aN It may be possible that one of the sections in the overlay group already has been defined in another group where it received a load time address In this case the linker does not overrule this load time address and excludes the section from the overlay group 7 28 Linker Script Language 3 Restrict the possible addresses for the sections in a group The load time address specifies where the group s elements are loaded in memory at download time The run time address specifies where sections are located at run time that is when the program is executing If you do not explicitly restrict the address in the LSL file the linker assigns addresses to the sections based on the restrictions relative to other sections in the LSL file and section alignments The program is responsible for copying overlay sections at appropriate moment from its load time location
280. ng symbol expression binary_operator expression unary_operator expression expression function call All types of expressions are explained in separate sections 3 3 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 3 6 1 Numeric Constants Numeric constants can be used in expressions If there is no prefix by default the assembler assumes the number is a decimal number Base Description Example Binary A 0b prefix followed by binary digits 0 1 Or use a b suffix eee 0x12FF Hexadecimal A 0x prefix followed by a hexadecimal digits 0 9 A F a f Or use a h suffix 0x45 Ofal0h Decimal ve 12 integer Decimal digits 0 9 1245 Table 3 1 Numeric constants 3 6 2 Strings ASCII characters enclosed in single or double quotes constitue an ASCII string Strings between double quotes allow symbol substitution by a DEFINE directive whereas strings between single quotes are always literal strings Both types of strings can contain escape characters Strings constants in expressions are evaluated to a number each character is replaced by its ASCII value Strings in expressions can have a size of up to 4 characters or less depending on the operand of an instruction or directive any subsequent characters in the string are ignored In this case the assembler issues a warning An exception to this rule is when a string is used in a DB DH DW or DL assembler directive in that case
281. nker writes to all unused space in the output section When all input sections have an image code data you must specify a fill pattern If you do not specify a fill pattern all input sections must be scratch sections The fill pattern is aligned at the start of the output section As with a reserved section you can use the attributes field to set the access type of the output section group section myoutput size 4k attributes rw fill 0Oxaa select myinputl1 select myinput2 The available room for input sections is determined by the size blocksize and overflow fields With the keyword size you specify the fixed size of the output section Input sections are placed from output section start towards higher addresses offsets When the end of the output section is reached and one or more input sections are not yet placed an error is emitted If however the overflow field is set to another output section remaining sections are located as if they were selected for the overflow output section 7 31 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference group section tskl_ data size 4k attributes rw f1i11 0 overflow overflow_data select data tsk1 section tsk2 data size 4k attributes rw f1i11 0 overflow overflow_data select data tsk2 section overflow data size 4k attributes rx i11 0 With the keyword blocksize the size o
282. ns misrac version 4 28 Compiling 1 7 Conditional assembly 3 49 Conditional make rules 4 152 Control program passing options 4 143 Control program options 4 115 4 127 adress size 4 116 check 4 117 cpu 4 118 create 4 119 debug info 4 120 define 4 121 diag 4 122 dry run 4 123 error file 4 124 format 4 125 fp trap 4 126 help 4 127 ignore default library path 4 133 include directory 4 128 iso 4 129 keep output files 4 130 keep temporary files 4 131 library 4 132 library directory 4 133 IsI file 4 135 model 4 136 no default libraries 4 137 no map file 4 138 Index 3 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference no preprocessing only 4 139 no warnings 4 140 option file 4 141 output 4 142 pass 4 143 preprocess 4 144 reentrant 4 145 static 4 146 undefine 4 147 verbose 4 148 version 4 149 warnings as errors 4 150 C 4 118 c 4 119 D 4 121 d 4 135 E 4 144 f 4 141 g 4 120 l 4 128 k 4 130 L 4 133 l 4 132 I library 4 134 M 4 136 n 4 123 0 4 142 t 4 131 U 4 147 V 4 149 V 4 148 W 4 143 w 4 140 preprocessing 4 121 Copy table 7 16 7 32 copysign functions 2 8 cos functions 2 6 cosh functions 2 7 cpu 3 6 ctime 2 21 D Data types 1 2 Bit 1 2 db 3 14 dbit 3 15 Debug info 4 120 Debug information 4 62 define 3
283. ntinuation line e Itis possible to nest command line files up to 25 levels Example Suppose the file myoptions contains the following lines DDEMO 1 test c Specify the option file to the control program cc51 option file myoptions This is equivalent to the following command line cc51 DDEMO 1 test c Related information i 4 141 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Control Program output o Command line syntax output file 0 file Description Default the control program generates a file with the same basename as the first specified input file With this option you specify another name for the resulting absolute object file Example cc51 test c prog c The control program generates an IEEE 695 object file default with the name test abs To generate the file result abs cc51 output result abs test c prog c Related information i 4 142 Tool Options Control Program Control Program pass W Command line syntax pass assembler option Waoption Pass option directly to the assembler pass c option Wcoption Pass option directly to the C compiler pass linker option Wloption Pass option directly to the linker Description With this option you tell the control program to call a tool with the specified option The control program does not use or interpret the option itself but specifies it directly to the tool which it calls Related information J 4 143
284. number of arguments as the macro definition the assembler issues a warning e fan argument has an embedded comma or space you must surround the argument by single quotes e You can declare a macro call argument as null in three ways enter delimiting commas in succession with no intervening spaces macroname ARG1 ARG3 the second argument is a null argument terminate the argument list with a comma the arguments that normally would follow are now considered null macroname ARG1 the second and all following arguments are null declare the argument as a null string e No character is substituted in the generated statements that reference a null argument 3 9 3 Using Operators for Macro Arguments The assembler recognizes certain text operators within macro definitions which allow text substitution of arguments during macro expansion You can use these operators for text concatenation numeric conversion and string handling Operator Name Description Macro argument Concatenates a macro argument with adjacent alphanumeric characters concatenation Return decimal Substitutes the symbo sequence with a character string that represents the decimal value value of symbol of the symbol Return hex Substitutes the symbo sequence with a character string that represents the hexadecimal value of symbol value of the symbol Macro string Allows the use of macro arguments as literal strings delimiter Macro l
285. number specifying a minimum field width The converted argument is printed in a field with at least the length specified here If the converted argument has fewer characters than specified it will be padded at the left side or at the right when the flag was specified with spaces Padding to numeric fields will be done with zeros when the flag 0 is also specified only when padding left Instead of a numeric value also may be specified the value is then taken from the next argument which is assumed to be of type int A period This separates the minimum field width from the precision A number specifying the maximum length of a string to be printed Or the number of digits printed after the decimal point only for floating point conversions Or the minimum number of digits to be printed for an integer conversion Instead of a numeric value also may be specified the value is then taken from the next argument which is assumed to be of type int A length modifier h hh P ll L F z ort h indicates that the argument is to be treated as a short or unsigned short hh indicates that the argument is to be treated as a char or unsigned char l should be used if the argument is a long integer ll fora long long L indicates that the argument is a long double indicates a pointer to intmax_t or uintmax_t 2 indicates a pointer to size_t and t indicates a pointer to ptrdiff
286. o facilitate use of the toolset from the command line Therefore you can only call the control program from the command line The invocation syntax is cc51 option file Options The control program processes command line options either by itself or when the option is unknown to the control program it looks whether it can pass the option to one of the other tools However for directly passing an option to the C compiler assembler or linker it is recommended to use the control program options pass c pass assembler pass linker Short and long option names Options can have both short and long names Short option names always begin with a single minus character long option names always begin with double minus characters You can abbreviate long option names as long as the name is unique You can mix short and long option names on the command line Options can have flags or sub options To switch a flag on use a lowercase letter or a ongflag To switch a flag off use an uppercase letter or a ongflag Separate longflags with commas The following two invocations are equivalent cc51 Wc Oac test c cc51 pass c optimize coalescer cse test c When you do not specify an option a default value may become active 4 115 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Control Program address size Command line syntax address size adar_size Description If you specify IHEX or SREC with the con
287. ocal label Prevents name mangling on labels in macros override Example Argument Concatenation Operator Consider the following macro definition SWAP_REG MACRO REG1 REG2 swap registers XCH A R REG1 XCH A R REG2 XCH A R REG1 ENDM The macro is called as follows SWAP_REG 0 1 The macro expands as follows XCH A RO XCH A R1 XCH A RO The macro preprocessor substitutes the character 0 for the argument REG1 and the character 1 for the argument REG2 The concatenation operator indicates to the macro preprocessor that the substitution characters for the arguments are to be concatenated with the character R 3 46 Assembly Language Without the operator the macro would expand as XCH A RREG1 XCH A RREG2 XCH A RREG1 which results in an assembler error invalid operand Example Decimal Value Operator Instead of substituting the formal arguments with the actual macro call arguments you can also use the value of the macro call arguments Consider the following source code that calls the macro SWAP_ SYM after the argument AREG has been set to 0 and BREG has been set to 1 AREG SET 0 BREG SET 1 SWAP_SYM AREG BREG If you want to replace the arguments with the value of AREG and BREG rather than with the literal strings AREG and BREG you can use the operator and modify the macro as follows SWAP_SYM MACRO REG1 REG2 Swap REG1 REG2 XCH A R REG1 XC
288. ogram iso Command line syntax iso 90 99 Description With this option you specify to the control program against which ISO standard it should check your C source C90 is also referred to as the ANSI C standard C99 refers to the newer ISO IEC 9899 1999 E standard and is the default AN Independant of the chosen ISO standard the control program always links libraries with C99 support Example To compile the file test c conform the ISO C90 standard cc51 iso 90 test c Related information db C compiler option iso ISO C standard 4 129 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Control Program keep output files k Command line syntax keep output files k Description If an error occurs during the compilation assembling or linking process the resulting output file may be incomplete or incorrect With this option you keep the generated output files when an error occurs By default the control program removes generated output files when an error occurs This is useful when you use the make utility If the erroneous files are not removed the make utility may process corrupt files on a subsequent invocation Use this option when you still want to use the generated files For example when you know that a particular error does not result in a corrupt file or when you want to inspect the output file or send it to Altium support Related information J 4 130 Tool Options Control Program
289. oject menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Language 3 Enable or disable the following options e Allow C style comments in C source code only available when ISO C 90 is selected e Relax const check for string literals Command line syntax language flags Afflags You can set the following flags gcc g G Enable a number of gcc extensions comments p P Allow C style comments in C source code strings x X Relaxed const check for string literals The option language A is the equivalent of AGPX which disables all language extensions The default is Agpx Description With this option you control the language extensions the compiler accepts Default the C compiler allows all language extensions With Allow C style comments in C source code Ap you tell the compiler to allow C style comments in ISO C90 mode option c90 In ISO C99 mode this style of comments is always accepted With Relax const check for string literals Ax you tell the compiler not to check for assignments of a constant string to a non constant string pointer With this option the following example produces no warning char p void main void p hello With option language gcc Ag command line only you tell the compiler to enable the following gcc languages extensions e The identifier FUNCTION __ expands to the current
290. ompiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option rename sections to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax rename sections type name f m fm R type name f m fm Description In case a module must be loaded at a fixed address or a data section needs a special place in memory you can use this option to generate different section names You can then use this unique section name in the linker script file for locating With the section type you select which sections are renamed With name you specify a new name for these sections The following name values have special meaning With the suboption f the compiler uses the function name only for code With the suboption m the compiler uses the name of the current module With the suboption fm or mf the compiler uses the name of the current module for data sections and the function name for code sections If you do not specify a section type all sections are renamed AN It is not possible to rename overlay sections Instead of the option R you can use the pragma pair pragma section endsection in the source pragma section type name rename section pragma endsection restore default naming convention db See the assembler directive SECTION for a list of section types and attributes Example The following C code _ data int i results after compilation in the following section declaration with name data and type
291. ons 2 8 remove 2 17 remquo functions 2 8 rename 2 17 Renaming sections 4 41 repeat endrep 3 36 Reserved address ranges 7 18 Reset vector 7 18 Index 9 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference resume 3 37 Return decimal value operator 3 47 Return hex value operator 3 47 Reverse inlining 4 24 rewind 2 17 rint functions 2 8 romstring 1 13 round functions 2 8 S scalbln functions 2 7 scalbn functions 2 7 scanf 2 13 2 15 conversion characters 2 14 scanf versions 1 27 Section 3 38 section endsection 1 14 Section attributes 3 38 Section information 4 76 Section layout definition 7 2 7 25 Section names 1 26 Section renaming 4 41 Section setup definition 7 24 Section types 3 38 Sections 1 26 3 38 grouping 7 26 SEEK_CUR 2 12 2 16 SEEK_END 2 12 2 16 SEEK_SET 2 12 2 16 Service request 1 23 set 3 40 setbuf 2 12 setjmp 2 10 setlocale 2 6 setvbuf 2 12 SFR 1 4 SIGABRT 2 10 SIGFPE 2 10 SIGILL 2 10 SIGINT 2 10 signal 2 10 signbit 2 9 SIGSEGV 2 10 SIGTERM 2 10 sin functions 2 6 sinh functions 2 7 size_t 2 11 Small memory model 1 7 smart_switch 1 14 smartinline 1 13 snprintf 2 15 source nosource 1 14 Special function register file including 4 6 4 58 Special Function Registers 1 4 Define 1 5 sprintf 2 15 sqrt functions 2 8 srand 2 18 Index 10 sscanf 2 15 Stack 7 16 Start address 7 18 st
292. operator shall lie between zero and one less than the width in bits of the underlying type of the left hand operand This violation will only be checked when the shift count evaluates to a constant value at compile time The unary minus operator shall not be applied to an expression whose underlying type is unsigned The comma operator shall not be used Evaluation of constant unsigned integer expressions should not lead to wrap around The underlying bit representations of floating point values shall not be used A violation is reported when a pointer to a floating point type is converted to a pointer to an integer type The increment and decrement operators should not be mixed with other operators in an expression Control statement expressions Control flow 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 13 6 13 7 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 7 14 8 14 9 14 10 2z 3 3332393 2 233333 2 R R Assignment operators shall not be used in expressions that yield a Boolean value Tests of a value against zero should be made explicit unless the operand is effectively Boolean Floating point expressions shall not be tested for equality or inequality The controlling expression of a for statement shall not contain any objects of floating type The three expressions of a for statement shall be concerned only with loop control A violation is reported when the loop initialization or loop update express
293. ormation about the architecture of the target processor and locating information The language for the script is called the Linker Script Language LSL This chapter first describes the structure of an LSL file The next section contains a summary of the LSL syntax Finally in the remaining sections the semantics of the Linker Script Language is explained The TASKING linker is a target independent linker locator that can simultaneously link and locate all programs for all cores available on a target board The target board may be of arbitrary complexity A simple target board may contain one standard processor with some external memory that executes one task A complex target board may contain multiple standard processors and DSPs combined with configurable IP cores loaded in an FPGA Each core may execute a different program and external memory may be shared by multiple cores LSL serves two purposes First it enables you to specify the characteristics that are of interest to the linker of your specific target board and of the cores installed on the board Second it enables you to specify how sections should be located in memory 7 2 Structure of a Linker Script File A script file consists of several definitions The definitions can appear in any order The architecture definition required In essence an architecture definition describes how the linker should convert logical addresses into physical addresses for a given type of core If th
294. ort 16 8 0 216 1 unsigned int ong 32 8 231 231 1 signed long unsigned long 32 8 0 232 1 zong sang 32 8 231 931_4 signed long long unsigned long long 32 8 0 232 1 Pointer pointer to __sfr __bsfr __data __bdata __idata 8 8 0 28 4 __pdataor _ bit K pointer to function __xdata or __rom 16 8 o 216 1 Floating Point 3 402E 38 1 175E 38 float Se 1 175E 38 3 402E 38 double 32 8 3 402E 38 1 175E 38 long double 1 175E 38 3 402E 38 Table 1 1 Data Types for the TSK51x TSK52x AN The long long types are treated as long The double and long double types are always treated as float When you use the enum type the compiler will use the smallest sufficient type __bit char int unless you use C compiler option integer enumeration always use 16 bit integers for enumeration Bit data type You can use the __bit type to define scalars in the bit addressable area and for the return type of functions A struct containing bit fields cannot be used for this purpose for example because the struct is aligned at a byte boundary Unlike the _Bool type the _ bit type is aligned on a bit boundary The following rules apply to __bit type variables e A __ bit type variable is always unsigned e A __ bit type variable can be exchanged with all other type variables The compiler generates the correct conversion A ___bit type variable is like a boolean Therefore if you convert an int type variable toa __ bit
295. ou can list detailed option descriptions Example The following invocations all display a list of the available command line options as51 as51 help as51 To see a detailed description of the available options enter as51 help options 4 64 Tool Options Assembler Assembler include directory l Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Select Build Options 3 Add a pathname in the Include Files Path field If you enter multiple paths separate them with a semicolon Command line syntax include directory path lpath Description With this option you can specify the path where your include files are located A relative path will be relative to the current directory The order in which the assembler searches for include files is 1 The pathname in the assembly file and the directory of the assembly source 2 The path that is specified with this option 3 The path that is specified in the environment variable AS51INC when the product was installed 4 The default include directory relative to the installation directory Example Suppose that your assembly source file test src contains the following line INCLUDE myinc inc You can call the assembler as follows as51 include directory c proj include test src First the assembler looks in the directory where test src is located for the file myinc inc
296. ou cannot define these sections in the input files you must use the linker to create them Stack e The keyword stack tells the linker to reserve memory for the stack The name for the stack section refers to the stack as defined in the architecture definition If no name was specified in the architecture definition the default name is stack With the keyword size you can specify the size for the stack If the size is not specified the linker uses the size given by the min_size argument as defined for the stack in the architecture definition Normally the linker automatically tries to maximize the size unless you specified the keyword fixed group stack mystack size 2k The linker creates two labels to mark the begin and end of the stack __ 1c _ub_stack_name for the begin of the stack and __1ce_ue_stack_name for the end of the stack The linker allocates space for the stack when there is a reference to either of the labels See also the stack keyword in section 7 5 3 Defining Address Spaces Heap e The keyword heap tells the linker to reserve a dynamic memory range for the malloc function Optionally you can assign a name to the heap section With the keyword size you can change the size for the heap If the size is not specified the linker uses the size given by the min_size argument as defined for the heap in the architecture definition Normally the linker automatically tries to maximize the size unless
297. ou encounter the following variables G Start address of a program If not assigned this address defaults to the address of low level symbol _ start l An I variable represents a global symbol in an object module The I variable is assigned an expression which is to be made available to other modules for the purpose of linkage edition The name of an I variable is always composed of the letter l followed by a hexadecimal number An variable is created only by an NI command L Start address of a section This variable is only used for absolute sections The L is followed by a section index which is an hexadecimal number L variables are created by an assignment command but the section index must have been been defined by an ST command N Name of internal symbol This variable is used to assign values of local symbols or to build complex types for use by a high level language debugger or for inter modular type checking during linkage The N variable is created with a NN command P Program pointer per section This variable always contains the current address of the target memory location The P variable is followed by a section index which is a hexadecimal number The section index must have been defined with an ST command section type command The variable is created after its first assignment R The R type variable is a relocation reference for a particular section All references to addresses in this section must be m
298. outines ISR An interrupt service routine or interrupt function interrupt handler is called when an interrupt event or service request occurs db The different type of interrupts are explained in detail in the Core Processor reference manuals delivered with the product You can find them in the Help system under FPGA Design Core References Processors 1 23 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 1 11 6 1 Defining an Interrupt Service Routine _interrupt With the function type qualifier interrupt you can declare a function as an interrupt service routine The function type qualifier interrupt takes one or more vector addresses as argument s All supplied vector addresses will be initialized to point to the interrupt function Interrupt functions cannot return anything and must have a void argument type list void _ interrupt vector_address vector_address isr void LN If you want to use interrupt numbers instead of vector addresses for the TSK51A core you can use the _ INTNO macro which is defined in the delivered special function register file rcegtsk51a sfr as define _ INTNO nr 8 nr 3 Example include lt regtsk5la sfr gt void _interrupt 0x23 serial_receive void void _interrupt __INTNO 4 serial_transmit void Suppress generation of interrupt vectors When you define an interupt service routine the compiler generates the appropriate interrupt ve
299. pace Table 3 3 TSK51x TSK52x section types Sections of a specified type are located by the linker in a memory space that has the same name as the section type The space names are defined in a so called linker script file files with the extension 1s1 delivered with the product in the directory Program Files Altium Designer System Tasking include 1sl You can specify the following section attributes Attribute Description Allowed on at address Locate the section at the specified address all clear Clear the DATA section at program startup all except code sfr sfrbit bsfr noclear Do not clear the DATA section at program startup default all init Copies the data from the section from ROM to RAM at program setup all except code sfr sfrbit bsfr noinit Do not initialize section default all inpage Indicates that the section must fit within a 256 byte page xdata pdata inblock Indicates that the section must fit within a 2K page code max When sections with the same name occur in different object modules with the MAX all except attribute the linker generates a section of which the size is the maximum of the sizes code in the individual object modules romdata Indicates that the section contains data to be placed in ROM code xdata pdata 3 38 Assembly Language Attribute Description Allowed on overlay overlay Generated by the C compiler to create o
300. perties column end addresses are not included in the range address range size The sections must be located in some address range with size not larger than shown in the Properties column the second number in that field is the alignment requirement for the address range ballooned After locating all sections the largest remaining gap in the space is used completely for the stack and or heap Properties The contents depends on the Type column Sections The sections to which the rule applies restrictions between sections are shown in this column lt ordered contiguous clustered For contiguous sections the linker uses the section order as shown here Clustered sections can be located in any relative order Related information Section 4 10 Generating a Map File in Chapter Using the Linker of the user s manual Linker option map file Generate map file 5 7 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 5 8 6 Object File Formats Sum mary This chapter describes the formats of several object files 6 1 IEEE 695 Format The IEEE 695 standard describes MUFOM Microprocessor Universal Format for Object Modules It defines a target independent storage standard for object files However this standard does not describe how symbolic debug information should be encoded according to that standard Symbolic debug information can be a part of an object file A debugger which reads an object file uses the symbolic debug in
301. phase has mapped the sections from the various object files obj to output sections in File The name of an input object file in Section A section name from the input object file in Size The size of the input section out Offset The offset relative to the start of the output section out Section The resulting output section name out Size The size of the output section 5 5 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Module Local Symbols Part This part of the map file shows a table for each local scope within an object file Each table has three columns 1 the symbol name 2 the address of the symbol and 3 the space where the symbol resides in The table is sorted on symbol name within each space By default this part is not shown in the map file You have to turn this part on manually with linker option map file format statics module local symbols Cross Reference Part This part of the map file lists all symbols defined in the object modules and for each symbol the object modules that contain a reference to the symbol are shown Also symbols that remain undefined are shown Call Graph Part This part of the map file contains a schematic overview that shows how library functions call each other Overlay Part This part of the map file shows how the static stack is organized This part also shows the locate overlay information if you used overlay groups in the linker script file Locate Part Se
302. ppears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Enable the option Merge C source code with assembly in output file src Command line syntax source S Description With this option you tell the compiler to merge C source code with generated assembly code in the output file The C source lines are included as comments Related information i 4 46 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler static Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option static to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax static Description With this option the compiler treats external definitions at file scope except for main as if they were declared static Asa result unused functions will be eliminated and the alias checking algorithm assumes that objects with static storage cannot be referenced from functions outside the current module On the command line this option only makes sense when you specify all modules of an application on the command line Example c51 static modulel c module2 c module3 c Related information J 4 47 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler stdout n Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax stdout n Description With this option you tell the compiler to send the output to stdo
303. ppings Stacks and heaps The stack keyword defines a stack in the address space and assigns a name to it The architecture definition must contain at least one stack definition Each stack of a core architecture must have a unique name See also the stack keyword in section 7 9 3 Creating or Modifying Special Sections The stack is described in terms of a minimum size min_size and the direction in which the stack grows grows This can be either from low_to_high addresses stack grows upwards this is the default or from high_to_low addresses stack grows downwards The min_size is required By default the linker tries to maximize the size of the stacks and heaps After locating all sections the largest remaining gap in the space is used completely for the stacks and heaps If you specify the keyword fixed you can disable this so called balloon behavior The size is also fixed if you used a stack or heap in the software layout definition in a restricted way For example when you override a stack with another size or select a stack in an ordered group with other sections The id keyword matches stack information generated by the compiler with a stack name specified in LSL This value assigned to this keyword is strongly related to the compiler s output so users are not supposed to change this configuration Optionally you can specify an alignment for the stack with the argument align This alignment must be equal or larger than the ali
304. prior to calculation In this ISO C99 version parallel sets of functions are defined for double float and long double They are respectively named function function function1 All long type functions though declared in math h are implemented as the double type variant which nearly always meets the requirement in embedded applications The header file tgmath h contains parallel type generic math macros whose expansion depends on the used type tgmath h includes math h and the effect of expansion is that the correct math h functions are called The type generic macro if available is listed in the second column of the tables below Trigonometric and hyperbolic functions math h tgmath h Description sin sinf sinl sin Returns the sine of x cos cosf cosl cos Returns the cosine of x tan tanf tanl tan Returns the tangent of x asin asinf asinl asin Returns the arc sine sin x of x acos acosf acosl acos Returns the arc cosine cos 1 x of x atan atanf atanl atan Returns the arc tangent tan x of x 2 6 Libraries math h tgmath h Description atan2 atan2f atan2l atan2 Returns the result of tan y x sinh sinhf sinhl sinh Returns the hyperbolic sine of x cosh coshf coshl cosh Returns the hyperbolic cosine of x tanh tanhf tanhl tanh Returns the hyperbolic tangent of x asinh asinhf asinhl asinh Returns the arc hyperbolic sinus of x acosh acoshf acoshl acosh Returns the non negative arc hyperbolic cosinus of x
305. program the special functions of the TSK51x TSK52x In addition to the standard C language the compiler supports the following extra datatype bit intrinsic built in functions that result in target specific assembly instructions pragmas to control the compiler from within the C source predefined macros the possibility to use assembly instructions in the C source keywords to specify memory types for data and functions attribute to specify absolute addresses keywords for inlining functions and programming interrupt routines libraries All non standard keywords have two leading underscores _ This chapter describes the target specific features of the C language including language extensions that are not standard in ISO C For example pragmas are a way to control the compiler from within the C source In this chapter the target specific characteristics of the C language are described including the above mentioned extensions 1 1 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 1 2 Data Types The TASKING C compiler for the TSK51x TSK52x architecture c51 supports the following data types Size Align nas Type C Type bit bit Limits Bit _ bit 1 1 Oor1 Boolean _Bool 1 8 Oor 1 h Character p 8 8 27 27 1 signed char unsigned char 8 8 0 28 1 Integral short igned short aaa 16 8 215 215 4 int signed int enum 1 1 Oor 1 8 8 27 27 4 16 8 215 215_4 ee sh
306. ption no preprocessing only 4 144 Tool Options Control Program Control Program reentrant Command line syntax reentrant Description If you select reentrancy a less efficient virtual dynamic stack is used which allows you to call functions recursively With reentrancy you can call functions at any time even from interrupt functions Related information d Control Program option model Memory model Section 1 4 Memory Models in chapter C Language Section 1 11 1 Reentrant Functions in chapter C Language 4 145 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Control Program static Command line syntax static Description This option is directly passed to the compiler With this option the compiler treats external definitions at file scope except for main as if they were declared static Asa result unused functions will be eliminated and the alias checking algorithm assumes that objects with static storage cannot be referenced from functions outside the current module This option only makes sense when you specify all modules of an application on the command line Example cc51 static modulel c module2 c module3 c Related information i 4 146 Tool Options Control Program Control Program undefine U Command line syntax undefine macro_name Umacro_name Description With this option you can undefine an earlier defined macro as with undef This option is for examp
307. ptions dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option preprocessor type to the Additional assembler options field Command line syntax preprocessor type none tasking m n t Default mt Description With this option you select the preprocessor that the assembler will use By default the assembler uses the TASKING preprocessor When the assembly source file does not contain any preprocessor symbols you can specify to the assembler not to use a preprocessor Related information i 4 74 Tool Options Assembler Assembler rom monitor nops Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax rom monitor nops Description With this option you generate 2 extra NOP instructions before any code label for TSK51x TSK52x ROM monitor support This is to prevent errors when breakpoints are set just before a label Related information J 4 75 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Assembler section info t Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select List File 3 Enable Generate list file 4 Enable the option Display section information Command line syntax section info flags t flags You can set the following flags console c C Display section information on stdout list I L Write section information to the list file De
308. quotient of the division of the first operand by the second With integers the divide operation produces a truncated integer modulo Integer only yields the remainder from a division of the first operand by the second addition Yields the sum of its operands subtraction Yields the difference of its operands Shift lt lt shift left Integer only shifts the left operand to the left zero filled by the number of bits specified by the right operand gt gt shift right Integer only shifts the left operand to the right sign bit extended by the number of bits specified by the right operand Relational lt less than lt less or equal Returns gt greater than an integer 1 if the indicated condition is TRUE gt greater or equal an integer 0 if the indicated condition is FALSE E equal not equal Bitwise amp AND Integer only yields bitwise AND OR Integer only yields bitwise OR A exclusive OR Integer only yields bitwise exlusive OR Logical amp amp logical AND Returns an integer 1 if both operands are non zero otherwise it returns an integer 0 logical OR Returns an integer 1 if either of the operands is non zero otherwise it returns an integer 1 Dot Dot Singles out a bit number using the syntax byte bitpos Table 3 2 Assembly expression operators 3 7 Built in Assembly Functions The TASKING assemblers have several built in functions to support data conversion string comparison and math computations You
309. r date and time and the process time Time can be represented as an integer value or can be broken down in components Two arithmetic data types are defined which are capable of holding the integer representation of times clock_t time _t 2 20 unsigned long long unsigned long Fills the first n bytes of s with character c and returns s Typically the values for errno come from int errno This function re turns a pointer to the associated error message See also section 2 2 4 errno h Returns the length of string s Libraries The type struct tm below is defined according to ISO IEC9899 with one exception this implementation does not support leap seconds The struct tm type is defines as follows struct tm int tm_sec int tm_min int tm_hour int tm_mday int tm_mon int tm_year int tm_wday int tm_yday int tm_isdst he Time manipulation clock difftime t1 t0 mktime tm tp time timer Time conversion asctime tm tp ctime timer gmtime timer localtime timer Formatted time seconds after the minute 0 59 minutes after the hour 0 59 hours since midnight 0 23 day of the month 1 31 months since January 0 11 year since 1900 days since Sunday 0 6 days since January 1 0 365 Daylight Saving Time flag Returns the application s best approximation to the processor time used by the program si
310. r always removes the object file when errors occur during assembling Command line syntax keep output files k Description If an error occurs during assembling the resulting object file obj may be incomplete or incorrect With this option you keep the generated object file when an error occurs By default the assembler removes the generated object file when an error occurs This is useful when you use the make utility If the erroneous files are not removed the make utility may process corrupt files on a subsequent invocation Use this option when you still want to use the generated object For example when you know that a particular error does not result in a corrupt object file Related information J 4 67 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Assembler list file l Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select List File 3 Enable Generate list file 4 Inthe List file format section enable or disable the types of information to be included Command line syntax list file file I file Description With this option you tell the assembler to generate a list file A list file snows the generated object code and the relative addresses Note that the assembler generates a relocatable object file with relative addresses With the optional file you can specify an alternative name for the list file By
311. r extracts the object that contains the definition from the library By default the linker processes object files and libraries in the order in which they appear on the command line If you specify the option first library first the linker always tries to take the symbol definition from the library that appears first on the command line before scanning subsequent libraries This is for example useful when you are working with a newer version of a library that partially overlaps the older version Because they do not contain exactly the same functions you have to link them both However when a function is present in both libraries you may want the linker to extract the most recent function Example Consider the following example 1k51 first library first a lib test obj b lib If the file test obj calls a function which is both present in a 1ib and b 1ib normally the function in b 1ib would be extracted With this option the linker first tries to extract the symbol from the first library a Lib Note that routines in b lib that call other routines that are present in both a lib and b 1ib are now also resolved from a lib Related information d gt Linker option no rescan Rescan libraries to solve unresolved externals 4 89 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Linker help Menu entry Command line syntax help options Description Displays an overview of all command line options When you specify the
312. racter set Defined in wchar h Number of files that can be opened simultaneously 4 NOTE According to ISO C99 this value must be at least 8 Maximum length of a filename 100 Expand to an integer expression suitable for use as argument to the setvbuf function Size of the string used to hold temporary file names 8 tmpxxxxx Maximum number of unique temporary filenames that can be generated 0x8000 Expand to an integer expression suitable for use as the third argument to the fseek function Expressions of type pointer to FILE that point to the FILE objects associated with standard error input and output streams fopen name mode fclose name fflush name freopen name mode stream setbuf stream buffer setvbuf stream buffer mode size 2 12 Description Opens a file for a given mode Available modes are a read open text file for reading w write create text file for writing if the file already exists its contents is discarded a append open existing text file or create new text file for writing at end of file re open text file for update reading and writing w create text file for update previous contents if any is discarded at append open or create text file for update writes at end of file Flushes the data stream and closes the specified file that was previously opened with fopen If stream is an output stream any buffered but unwritten date is written Else the ef
313. rd 0 for the first byte Example 0200000400FFFB _ checksum _ upper address _ type _ offset _ length Data Record The Data Record specifies the actual program code and data length offset 00 data checksum The length byte specifies the number of data bytes The linker has an option that controls the length of the output buffer for generating Data records The default buffer length is 32 bytes The offset is the 16 bit starting load offset Together with the address specified in the Extended Address Record it specifies an absolute address in memory where the data is to be located when loaded by a tool Example _ checksum _ data _ type _ offset 0F00200000232222754E00754F04AF4FAE4E22C3 _ length Start Linear Address Record The Start Linear Address Record contains the 32 bit program execution start address Layout 04 0000 05 address checksum Example 0400000500FF0003F5 _ checksum _ address _ type _ offset length 6 17 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference End of File Record The hexadecimal file always ends with the following end of file record 00000001FF _ checksum _ type _ offset _ length 7 Linker Script Language Summary This chapter describes the syntax of the linker script language LSL 7 1 Introduction To make full use of the linker you can write a script with inf
314. regcpu sfr You choose one of the following CPU s TSK51A TSK52A or TSK52B Example To compile the file test c for the TSK51x TSK52x processor and use the SFR file for the TSK51A processor type enter the following on the command line c51 cpu tsk5la test c The compiler includes the SFR file regtsk51a sfr and compiles for the chosen processor type When you call the compiler from the command line make sure you specify the same core type to the assembler to avoid conflicts Related information ie 4 6 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler compact max size Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option compact max size to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax compact max size value Default 200 Description This option is related to the compiler optimization optimize compact Code compaction or reverse inlining Code compaction is the opposite of inlining functions large sequences of code that occur more than once are transformed into a function This reduces code size possibly at the cost of execution speed However in the process of finding sequences of matching instructions compile time and compiler memory usage increase quadratically with the number of instructions considered for code compaction With this option you tell the comp
315. repeated 16 times With the DL directive you allocate and initialize four bytes of memory for each repetition of the loop Effectively the preprocessor duplicates the DL directive16 times in the assembled file and substitutes VAR2 with the subsequent numbers FOR VAR2 IN 1 to 0x10 DL VAR1 VAR1 ENDFOR Related information d REPEAT ENDREP Repeat sequence of source lines 3 24 Assembly Language GLOBAL Syntax GLOBAL symbol symbol Description All symbols or labels defined in the current section or module are local to the module by default You can change this default behavior with assembler option ig With the GLOBAL directive you declare one of more symbols as global It means that the specified symbols are defined within the current section or module and that those definitions should be accessible by all modules The type of the global defined symbol is determined by its definition To access a symbol defined with GLOBAL from another module use the EXTERN directive Only program labels and symbols defined with EQU can be made global Example LOOPA EQU 1 definition of symbol LOOPA GLOBAL LOOPA LOOPA will be globally accessible by other modules Related information Gb EXTERN Import global section symbol 3 25 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference IF ELIF ELSE ENDIF Syntax IF expression ELIF expression the ELIF directive is optional ELSE the
316. res n scalbn scalbnl scalbnf scalbn Computes the result of x FLT_RADIX efficiently not normally by computing scalblnscalblnlscalblnf scalblin FLT RADIX explicitly Same as scalbn but with argument n as long int 2 7 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Rounding functions math h tgmath h Description ceil ceilf ceill ceil Returns the smallest integer not less than x as a double floor floorf floorl floor Returns the largest integer not greater than x as a double rint rintl rintf rint Returns the rounded integer value as an int according to the current rounding direction See fenv h Not implemented lrint lrintf Ilrintl lrint Returns the rounded integer value as a long int according to the current rounding direction See fenv h Not implemented llrint lrintf lrintl llrint Returns the rounded integer value as a Long long int according to the current rounding direction See fenv h Not implemented nearbyint nearbyintf nearbyint Returns the rounded integer value as a floating point according to the current nearbyintl rounding direction See fenv h Not implemented round roundl roundf round Returns the nearest integer value of x as int Not implemented lround lroundl lroundf lround Returns the nearest integer value of x as long int Not implemented llround1llroundlllroundf 1lround Returns the nearest integer value of x as long long int Not implemented trunc truncl truncf trunc Returns the truncated inte
317. ress specific warningsn If you select Suppress specific warnings 4 Enter the numbers separated by commas of the warnings you want to suppress Command line syntax no warnings number w number Description With this option you can suppress all warning messages or specific warning messages On the command line this option works as follows e If you do not specify this option all warnings are reported e If you specify this option but without numbers all warnings are suppressed e If you specify this option with a number only the specified warning is suppressed You can specify the option no warnings number multiple times Example To suppress warnings 135 and 136 enter 135 136 in the Specific warnings to suppress field or enter the following on the command line c51 test c no warnings 135 136 Related information d gt C compiler option warnings as errors Treat warnings as errors 4 35 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler optimize O Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization Select an optimization level in the Optimization level box 2 3 4 If you select Custom Optimization enable or disable the optimizations you want 5 In addition in the Size speed trade off field select a level between fully optimize for size or fully optimize for spe
318. riable Display int i _ at 0x1000 1 The variable i is placed at address 0x1000 and is initialized at 1 void f void _at OxfO0ff 1 The function f is placed at address Oxf100 Restrictions Take note of the following restrictions if you place a variable at an absolute address e The argument ofthe at attribute must be a constant address expression e You can place only global variables at absolute addresses Parameters of functions or automatic variables within functions cannot be placed at absolute addresses e A variable that is declared extern is not allocated by the compiler in the current module Hence it is not possible to use the keyword __at on an external variable Use __at at the definition of the variable e You cannot place structure members at an absolute address e Absolute variables cannot overlap each other If you declare two absolute variables at the same address the assembler and or linker issues an error The compiler does not check this 1 4 Memory Models for the TSK51x TSK52x The TASKING C compiler for the TSK51x TSK52x architecture c51 supports the following memory models Memory Model Description Max RAM size Default memory type small direct addressable internal RAM 128 bytes __data auxiliary page one page of external RAM 256 bytes __pdata large external RAM 64 kB __xdata Table 1 3 Memory models and default memory types The small memory model
319. rintf expects the address of the format string the first argument to have memory type __ xdata Therefore the C startup code of the large memory model copies all strings from ROM to XDATA So the statement printf Hello world n is executed correctly because the TSK51x TSK52x compiler passes the address of the allocated XDATA area filled at C startup time to printf With the S option specified the string is put in ROM only and the standard printf scanf like library routines will fail You will need to create your own __rom qualified versions All library sources are delivered For example you can use the source of print in module _printf c tocreatea__rom_printf The prototype could be int _ rom_printf _ rom char format Modifying string literals The TSK51x TSK52x accepts that string literals are modifiable when strings are in both ROM and RAM You can do this with pointers or even with a construct like st ing 2 A Of course when you use the S option this statement is not allowed 1 17 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 1 10 Switch Statement The TASKING C compiler supports three ways of code generation for a switch statement a jump chain linear switch a jump table or a binary search table A jump chain is comparable with an if else if else if else construction A jump table is a table filled with jump instructions for each possible switch value The switch argument is used a
320. rsion number in 3 digits Table 1 5 Predefined preprocessor macros Example ifdef C51 _ this part is only compiled for the TSK51x TSK52x target endif 1 15 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 1 8 Variables 1 8 1 Automatic Variables In non reentrant functions recursion is not possible In non reentrant functions automatic variables are not allocated on a stack but in a static area In a reentrant function automatic variables are treated the conventional way passed via the stack The automatics in the static area are still overlayable with automatics of other functions Automatics are subject to the memory model selected In a static function this means static allocation in one of the RAM memory spaces In a reentrant function this means dynamic allocation on the stack Although automatic variables are allocated in a static area with non reentrant functions they are not the same as local variables within a function which are declared to be static by means of the C keyword static The difference is that it is not guaranteed that an automatic variable still has the same value as the previous time the function returned because it may have been overlaid with another automatic variable of another module Whereas the values of variables declared with the keyword static are the same as the previous time the function returned static variables are new overlaid To generate code which is as fast as possible the
321. rsion information when not all the bytes of a particular multibyte character have been read from the source In this implementation multi byte characters are 1 byte long MB_CUR_MAX and MB_LEN_MAX are defined as 1 and this will never occur mbsinit ps mbsrtowcs pwces src n ps wesrtombs s srce n ps mbrtowc pwc s n ps wertomb s wc ps btowc c wctob c mbrlen s n ps Determines whether the object pointed to by ps is an initial conversion state Returns a non zero value if so Restartable version of mbstowcs See section 2 2 23 stdlib h and wchar h The initial conversion state is specified by ps The input sequence of multibyte charactersis specified indirectly by src Restartable version of westombs See section 2 2 23 stdlib h and wchar h The initial conversion state is specified by ps The input wide string is specified indirectly by src Converts a multibyte character s to a wide character pwc according to conversion state ps See also mbtowc in section 2 2 23 stdlib h and wchar h Converts a wide character wc to a multi byte character according to conversion state ps and stores the multi byte character in s Returns the wide character corresponding to character c Returns WEOF on error Returns the multi byte character corresponding to the wide character c The returned multi byte character is represented as one byte Returns EOF on error Inspects up to n bytes from the string s to se
322. s This header file is not defined in ISO IEC9899 _close fd Used by the functions close and fclose FSS implementation _lseek fd offset whence Used by all file positioning functions fgetpos fseek fsetpos ftell rewind FSS imple mentation _open fd flags Used by the functions fopen and freopen FSS implementation _read fd buff cnt Reads a sequence of characters from a file FSS implementation _unlink name Used by the function remove FSS implementation _write fd buffer cnt Writes a sequence of characters to a file FSS implementation 2 2 11 iso646 h The header file iso646 h adds tokens that can be used instead of regular operator tokens define and amp amp define and_eq amp define bitand amp define bitor define compl define not define not_eq define or define or_eq define xor define xor_eq 2 5 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 2 2 12 limits h Contains the sizes of integral types defined as macros 2 2 13 locale h To keep C code reasonable portable accross different languages and cultures a number of facilities are provided in the header file local h char setlocale int category const char locale The function above changes locale specific features of the run time library as specified by the category to change and the name of the locale The following categories are defined and can be used as input for this function LC_ALL 0
323. s an index to jump within this table A binary search table is a table filled with a value to compare the switch argument with and a target address to jump to pragma smart_switch is the default of the compiler The compiler tries to use the switch method which uses the least space in ROM table size in ROMDATA plus code to do the indexing For a switch with a long type argument only binary search table code is used For an int type argument a jump table switch is only possible when all case values are in the same 256 value range the high byte value of all programmed cases are the same Especially for large switch statements the jump table approach executes faster than the binary search table approach Also the jump table has a predictable behavior in execution speed independent of the switch argument every case is reached in the same execution time With a small number of cases the jump chain method can be faster in execution and shorter in size You can overrule the compiler chosen switch method by using a pragma pragma linear_switch force jump chain code pragma jump switch force jump table code pragma binary switch force binary search table code pragma smart_switch let the compiler decide the switch method used Using a pragma cannot overrule the restrictions as described earlier The switch pragmas must be placed before the function body containing the switch statement Nested switch statements use the same switch metho
324. s of that type and may allocate them in different memories if that declaration is in the same scope The following example illustrates this constraint struct S _ xdata int i referring to storage not correct __idata char p used to specify target memory correct i In the example above the TSK51x TSK52x compiler ignores the erroneous __xdata memory type qualifier without displaying a warning message Typedef with memory type qualifiers Typedef declarations follow the same scope rules as any declared object Typedef names may be re declared in inner blocks but not at the parameter level However in typedef declarations memory type qualifiers are allowed A typedef declaration should at least contain one type qualifier Example using memory types with typedefs typedef _idata int IDATINT memory type _ idata OK typedef int _ data DATAPTR logical type _ data memory type default 1 3 2 Accessing Hardware from C _ sfr __bsfr Using Special Function Registers It is easy to access Special Function Registers SFRs that relate to peripherals from C The SFRs are defined in a special function register file sfr as symbol names for use with the compiler An SFR file contains the names of the SFRs and the bits in the SFRs C Language Example use in C PO 0x88 use port name P13 1 use of bit name if P14 1 Pl 3 0 IEl 1 use of bit name The compil
325. s sections with a certain ID in the address space with the same ID This field is required In IEEE this ID is specified explicitly for sections and symbols ELF sections map by default to the address space with ID 1 Sections with one of the special names defined in the ABI Application Binary Interface may map to different address spaces The mau field specifies the MAU size Minimum Addressable Unit of the space This field is required The align value must be a power of two The linker uses this value to compute the start addresses when sections are concatenated An align value of n means that objects in the address space have to be aligned on n MAUs The page_size field sets the page alignment and page size in MAUs for the address space It must be a power of 2 The default value is 1 If one or more page ranges are supplied the supplied value only sets the page alignment The ranges specify the available space in each page as offsets to the page start which is aligned at the page alignment See also the page keyword in subsection Locating a group in section 7 9 2 Creating and Locating Groups of Sections With the optional direction field you can specify how all sections in this space should be located This can be either from low_to_high addresses this is the default or from high_to_low addresses The map keyword specifies how this address space maps onto an internal bus or onto another address space Mappings are described in section 7 5 4 Ma
326. save typing You can specify the option option file multiple times Format of an option file e Multiple arguments on one line in the option file are allowed e To include whitespace in an argument surround the argument with single or double quotes e If you want to use single quotes as part of the argument surround the argument by double quotes and vise versa This has a single quote embedded This has a double quote embedded This has a double quote and a single quote embedded e When a text line reaches its length limit use a to continue the line Whitespace between quotes is preserved This is a continuation line gt This is a continuation line e Itis possible to nest command line files up to 25 levels Example Suppose the file myoptions contains the following lines 9g DDEMO 1 test c Specify the option file to the C compiler c51 option file myoptions This is equivalent to the following command line c51 g DDEMO 1 test c Related information do 4 38 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler output o Menu entry Altium Designer names the output file always after the C source file Command line syntax output file 0 file Description With this option you can specify another filename for the output file of the compiler Without this option the basename of the C source file is used with extension src Example To create the file output src inst
327. scription With this option you tell the assembler to display section information For each section its memory space size total cycle counts and name is listed on stdout and or in the list file The cycle count consists of two parts the total accumulated count for the section and the total accumulated count for all repeated instructions In the case of nested loops it is possible that the total supersedes the section total Without arguments this option is the same as section info cl With section info l the assembler writes the section information to the list file You must specify this option in combination with the option list file generate list file Example as51 list file section info console list test srce The assembler generates a list file and writes the section information to this file The section information is also displayed on stdout Related information d gt Assembler option list file generate list file 4 76 Tool Options Assembler Assembler symbol scope i Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Select the default label mode Local or Global Command line syntax symbol scope global local i g l Default il Description With this option you tell the assembler how to treat symbols that you have not specified explicitly as global or local By
328. section External symbols are listed per space with their absolute address both sorted on symbol and sorted on address Related information db With the option map file format map file formatting you can specify which parts you want to place in the map file Section 5 2 Linker Map File Format in Chapter List File Formats 4 100 Tool Options Linker Linker map file format m Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Map File 3 Enable the option Generate a map file map 4 Inthe Map file format section enable or disable the information you want to be included in the map file Command line syntax map file format flags mflags You can specify the following formats 0 Same as mefikLMNoQrSU link information 1 Same as mCfiKIMNoQRSU locate information 2 Same as mefiklmNoQrSu most information callgraph c C Call graph information files f F Processed files information invocation i I Invocation and tool information link k K Link result information locate I L Locate result information memory m M Memory usage information nonalloc n N Non alloc information overlay 0 0 Overlay information statics q Q Module local symbols crossref r R Cross references information Isl s S Processor and memory information rules u U Locate rules Description With
329. section 2 2 13 locale h You can use the next conversion specifiers a abbreviated weekday name A full weekday name b abbreviated month name B full month name c local date and time representation Same as a b e T Y C last two of the year d day of the month 01 31 2 21 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference D e F g G h H l j m M n p r R S t T u U V W W X X y Y Z Z 2 2 26 same as m d y day of the month 1 31 with single digits preceded by a space ISO 8601 date format Y m d last two digits of the week based year 00 99 week based year 0000 9999 same as b hour 24 hour clock 00 23 hour 12 hour clock 01 12 day of the year 001 366 month 01 12 minute 00 59 replaced by the newline character local equivalent of AM or PM locale s 12 hour clock time same as I M S p same as H M second 00 59 replaced by horizontal tab character ISO 8601 time format H M S ISO 8601 weekday number 1 7 Monday as first day of the week week number of the year Sunday as first day of the week 00 53 ISO 8601 week number 01 53 in the week based year weekday 0 6 Sunday is 0 week number of the year 00 53 week 1 has the first Monday local date representation local time representation year without century 00 99 year with century ISO 8601 offset of time zone from UTC or nothing time zone name if any
330. see a detailed description of the available options enter cc51 help options 4 127 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Control Program include directory l Command line syntax include directory path Ipath Description With this option you can specify the path where your include files are located A relative path will be relative to the current directory Example Suppose that the C source file test c contains the following lines include lt stdio h gt include myinc h You can call the control program as follows cc51 include directory myinclude test c First the compiler looks for the file stdio h in the directory myinc lude relative to the current directory If it was not found the compiler searches in the environment variable and then in the default include directory The compiler now looks for the file myinc h in the directory where test c is located If the file is not there the compiler searches in the directory myinclude If it was still not found the compiler searches in the environment variable and then in the default include directory Related information C compiler option include directory Add directory to include file search path C compiler option include file Include file at the start of a compilation Section 2 4 How the Compiler Searches Include Files in chapter Using the Compiler of the user s manual 4 128 Tool Options Control Program Control Pr
331. select Language 3 Select the ISO C standard C90 or C99 Command line syntax iso 90 99 c 90 99 Description With this option you select the ISO C standard The compiler checks the C source against this standard and may generate warnings or errors if you use C language that is not defined in the standard C90 is also referred to as the ANSI C standard C99 refers to the newer ISO IEC 9899 1999 E standard C99 is the default c51 iso 90 test c Related information db C compiler option language Language extensions 4 20 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler keep output files k Menu entry Altium Designer always removes the src file when errors occur during compilation Command line syntax keep output files k Description If an error occurs during compilation the resulting src file may be incomplete or incorrect With this option you keep the generated output file src when an error occurs By default the compiler removes the generated output file src when an error occurs This is useful when you use the make utility If the erroneous files are not removed the make utility may process corrupt files on a subsequent invocation Use this option when you still want to inspect the generated assembly source Even if it is incomplete or incorrect Related information f 4 21 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler language A Menu entry 1 From the Pr
332. should not be used 45 R Type casting from any type to or from pointers shall not be used 46 R The value of an expression shall be evaluation order independent This rule is checked using worst case assumptions This means that a violation will be reported when a possible alias may cause the result of an expression to be evaluation order dependent 47 A No dependence should be placed on operator precedence rules 48 A Mixed arithmetic should use explicit casting 49 A Tests of a non Boolean value against 0 should be made explicit 50 R F P variables shall not be tested for exact equality or inequality 51 A Constant unsigned integer expressions should not wrap around 52 R There shall be no unreachable code 53 R All non null statements shall have a side effect 54 R Anull statement shall only occur on a line by itself 55 A Labels should not be used 56 R The goto statement shall not be used 57 R The continue statement shall not be used 58 R The break statement shall not be used except in a switch 59 R An if or loop body shall always be enclosed in braces 60 A All if else if constructs should contain a final else 61 R Every non empty case clause shall be terminated with a break 62 R All switch statements should contain a final default case 8 2 MISRA C Rules 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75
333. siders upper and lower case characters as different characters AN Disabling the option Assemble case sensitive in Altium Designer is the same as specifying the option case insensitive on the command line Assembly source files that are generated by the compiler must always be assembled case sensitive When you are writing your own assembly code you may want to specify the case insensitive mode Example When assembling case insensitive the label Labe1Name is the same label as labelname Related information de 4 56 Tool Options Assembler Assembler check Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option check to the Additional assembler options field Command line syntax check Description With this option you can check the source code for syntax errors without generating code This saves time in developing your application The assembler reports any warnings and or errors Related information d gt C compiler option check Check syntax 4 57 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Assembler cpu C Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Processor entry and select Processor Definition 3 Select a processor from the Select processor box Command line syntax Cpu cpu Ccpu
334. sing two adjacent commas If the remaining arguments after an argument are all empty you can omit them A label is not allowed with this directive Example PAGE PAGE 96 PAGE 5 formfeed the next source line is printed on the next page in the list file set pagewidth to 96 Note that you can omit the last four arguments insert five blank lines at the top Note that you can omit the last two arguments Related information dE TITLE Set program title in header of assembler list file Assembler option list file Generate list file in Section 4 2 Assembler Options of Chapter Tool Options 3 34 Assembly Language REGISTERBANK Syntax REGISTERBANK expression Description This directive notifies the assembler of the register bank that is used by the subsequent code The expression is the number 0 1 2 or 3 which refers to one of four register banks With the REGISTERBANK directive you can predefine symbolic register addresses ARO through AR7 instead of their absolute addresses In addition this directive causes the assembler to generate an external bank nr The run time library will contain modules resolving this external and reserving the required data space If you equate a symbol for example with the EQU directive to an AR symbol the user defined symbol will not change its value as a result of the subsequent REGISTERBANK directive Example REGISTERBANK 3 PUSH AR2
335. sion if_else_expr condition IF expression ELSE expression END 6 4 Object File Formats 6 1 4 MUFOM Commands 6 1 4 1 Module Level Commands At module level there are four commands one command to start and one to end a module one command to set the date and time of creation of the module and one command to specify address formats MB Command The MB command is the first command in a module It specifies the target machine configuration and an optional command with the module name MB_command MB machine_identifier module_name Example MB c51 ME Command The module end command is the last command in an object file It defines the end of the object module ME_command ME DT Command The DT command sets the date and time of creation of an object module DT_command DT digit Example DT19930120120432 The format of display of the date and time is YYYYMMDDHHMMSS 4 digits for the year 2 digits for the month 2 digits for the day 2 digits for the hour 2 digits for the minutes and 2 digits for the seconds AD Command The AD command specifies the address format of the target execution environment AD_command AD bits_per_MAU MAU_per_address order MAU_per_address hex_number bits_per_MAU hex_number order z DP PM MAU stands for minimum addressable unit This is
336. sion x X Macro expansions cycle count y Y Cycle counts Default LDEGiIMnPqrsVWXy Description With this option you specify which information you want to include in the list file aN On the command line you must use this option in combination with the option list file l Related information db Assembler option list file Generate list file Assembler option section info list Display section information in list file 4 69 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Assembler no warnings w Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Diagnostics 3 Enable one of the options e Report all warnings e Suppress all warnings e Suppress specific warnings If you select Suppress specific warnings 4 Enter the numbers separated by commas of the warnings you want to suppress Command line syntax no warnings number w number Description With this option you can suppresses all warning messages or specific warning messages e If you do not specify this option all warnings are reported e If you specify this option but without numbers all warnings are suppressed e If you specify this option with a number only the specified warning is suppressed You can specify the option no warnings number multiple times Example To suppress warnings 135 and 136 enter 135 136 in the Specific w
337. size e The bus width must be an integer times the bus MAU size 7 6 Linker Script Language e The MAU size must be non zero e Abus can only have a mapping ona destination bus through dest bus mapping map map_descr lt map _descr gt map descr dest destination dest_dbits range dest_offset expr size expr sre_dbits range src_offset expr e A mapping requires at least the size and dest statements e Each map_descr can occur only once e You can define multiple mappings from a single source e Overlap between source ranges or destination ranges is not allowed e Ifthe src_dbits or dest_dbits statement is not present its value defaults to the width value if the source destination is a bus and to the mau size otherwise destination space space name bus lt proc_name core name gt ll bus_name e Aspace_name refers to a defined address space e Aproc_name refers to a defined processor e Acore_name refers to a defined core e Abus_name refers to a defined bus e The following mappings are allowed source to destination space gt space space gt bus bus gt bus memory gt bus range expr ee expr 7 3 8 Architecture Definition architecture_definition architecture arch_name lt parameter list gt 9 1 lt extends arch_name lt argument_list gt 0 1 gt 0 1 arch_spec e Anarchitecture_definition defines a core archi
338. sl1 s2 n Appends not more than n characters from s2 to s7 and returns s7 If s1 and s2 overlap the result is undefined 2 19 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Comparison functions stdio h wchar h Description memcmp sl s2 n stremp sl1 s2 strncemp sl s2 n strcoll sl1 s2 strxfrm sl1 s2 n Search functions stdio h wmemcmp sl1 s2 n wescmp sl1 s2 wesncemp sl1 s2 n wescoll sl s2 wesxfrm sl s2 n wcehar h Compares the first n characters of s7 to the first n characters of s2 Returns lt 0 if s1 lt s2 0 if s1 s2 or gt Oif s7 gt s2 Compares string s7 to string s2 Returns lt 0 if s7 lt s2 0 if s s2 or gt O if s7 gt s2 Compares the first n characters of s7 to the first n characters of s2 Returns lt 0 if s1 lt s2 0 if s1 s2 or gt Oif s7 gt s2 Performs a local specific comparison between string s7 and string s2 according to the LC_COLLATE category of the current locale Returns lt 0 if s1 lt s2 0 if s1 s2 or gt 0 if s1 gt s2 See section 2 2 13 locale h Transforms a local string s2 so that a comparison between transformed strings with strcmp gives the same result as a comparison between non transformed strings with strcol11 Returns the transformed string s7 Description memchr s c n strchr s c strrchr s c strspn s set strespn s set
339. so prints the filenames and it shows which objects are extracted from libraries With this option you can monitor the current status of the linker Related information J 4 112 Tool Options Linker Linker version V Menu entry Command line syntax version V Description Display version information The linker ignores all other options or input files Related information J 4 113 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Linker warnings as errors Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Diagnostics 3 Enable the option Treat warnings as errors Command line syntax warnings as errors Description When the linker detects an error or warning it tries to continue the link process and reports other errors and warnings When you use this option without arguments you tell the linker to treat all warnings as errors This means that the exit status of the linker will be non zero after the detection of one or more linker warnings As a consequence the linker will not produce any output files You can also limit this option to specific warnings by specifying a comma separated list of warning numbers Related information db Linker option no warnings Suppress some or all warnings 4 114 Tool Options Control Program 4 4 Control Program Options The control program is a tool t
340. ssembler options field Invocation syntax on the command line Windows Command Prompt To call the assembler from the command line use the following syntax as51 option file The input file must be an assembly source file asm or src Short and long option names Options can have both short and long names Short option names always begin with a single minus character long option names always begin with double minus characters You can abbreviate long option names as long as the name is unique You can mix short and long option names on the command line Options can have flags or sub options To switch a flag on use a lowercase letter or a ongflag To switch a flag off use an uppercase letter or a ongflag Separate longflags with commas The following two invocations are equivalent as51 Ogs test src as51 optimize generics instr size test src When you do not specify an option a default value may become active 4 55 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Assembler case insensitive c Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Disable the option Assemble case sensitive Command line syntax case insensitive C Description With this option you tell the assembler not to distinguish between upper and lower case characters By default the assembler con
341. ssembler source line information Pass HLL debug information or None 5 Enable or disable the option Assembler local symbols information Command line syntax debug info flag g flag you can set the following flags asm a A Assembly source line information hll h H Pass high level language debug information HLL local VL Assembler local symbols debug information smart s S Smart debug information Description With this option you tell the assembler which kind of debug information to emit in the object file If you do not use this option the default is debug info hll If you specify debug info without any flags the default is debug info smart You cannot specify debug info asm hll Either the assembler generates assembly source line information or it passes HLL debug information When you specify debug info smart the assembler selects which flags to use If high level language information is available in the source file the assembler passes this information same as debug info asm thll local If not the assembler generates assembly source line information Same as debug info asm hll local With debug info AHLS the assembler does not generate any debug information Related information J 4 59 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Assembler define D Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears
342. st c contains the following lines include lt stdio h gt include myinc h You can specify the include directory myinclude to the C compiler c51 include directory myinclude test c First the compiler looks for the file stdio h in the directory myinc lude relative to the current directory If it was not found the compiler searches in the environment variable and then in the default include directory The compiler now looks for the file myinc h in the directory where test c is located If the file is not there the compiler searches in the directory myinclude If it was still not found the compiler searches in the environment variable and then in the default include directory Related information C compiler option include file Include file at the start of a compilation C compiler option nostdine Skip standard include files directory 4 15 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler include file H Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Preprocessing 3 Enter the name of the file in the Include this file before source field or click and select a file Command line syntax include file file Hfile Description With this option set at project level you include one extra file at the beginning of each C source file in your project On a document level Project Document Opt
343. statement2 gt gt 0 section_specs section_spec lt section_spec gt gt 0 section_spec attributes fill_spec size expr blocksize expr overflow section_name section_statement2 select_section_statement group_descr2 lt section_statement2 gt gt 0 7 12 Linker Script Language group _descr2 group lt group_name gt 1 group_specs2 section_statement2 group_specs2 group_spec2 lt group _spec2 gt 0 group_spec2 group_alignment attributes load_addr section_setup section_setup space ref lt section_setup_item gt gt section_setup_item vector _table_ statement stack_def reserved_range heap def 7 4 Expression Evaluation Only constant expressions are allowed including sizes but not addresses of sections in object files All expressions are evaluated with 64 bit precision integer arithmetic The result of an expression can be absolute or relocatable A symbol you assign is created as an absolute symbol 7 13 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 7 5 Semantics of the Architecture Definition Keywords in the architecture definition architecture extends endianness big little bus mau width map space id mau align page_size page direction low_to_high high _to_low stack min_size grows low_to_high high _to_low align fixed id heap min_size grows low_to_high high _to_low align fixed id copytable align
344. sting architecture definition in the same LSL file For example if you have two cores called mycore_1 and mycore_2 that have the same architecture called mycorearch you must instantiate both cores as follows core mycore_1 architecture mycorearch core mycore 2 architecture mycorearch If the architecture definition has parameters you must specify the arguments that correspond with the parameters For example mycorearch1 expects two parameters which are used in the architecture definition core mycore architecture mycorearchl 1 2 7 6 3 Defining Internal Memory and Buses With the memory keyword you define physical memory that is present on the target board The memory name is used to identify the memory and does not conflict with other identifiers It is common to define internal memory on chip in the derivative definition External memory off chip memory is usually defined in the board specification See section 7 7 3 Defining External Memory and Buses The type field specifies a memory type rom read only memory it can only be written at load time ram random access volatile writable memory writing at run time is possible while writing at load time has no use since the data is not retained after a power down nvram non volatile ram writing is possible both at load time and run time The optional reserved qualifier before the memory type tells the linker not to locate any section in t
345. strpbrk s set strstr s sub strtok s delim wmemchr s c n weschr s Cc wesrchr s c wesspn s set wescspn s set wespbrk s set wesstr s sub westok s delim Miscellaneous functions stdio h wchar h Checks the first n characters of s on the occurence of character c Returns a pointer to the found character Returns a pointer to the first occurence of character c in string s or the null pointer if not found Returns a pointer to the last occurence of character c in string s or the null pointer if not found Searches s for a sequence of characters specified in set Returns the length of the first sequence found Searches s for a sequence of characters not specified in set Returns the length of the first sequence found Same as strspn wcsspn but returns a pointer to the first character in s that also is specified in set Searches for a substring sub in s Returns a pointer to the first occurence of sub in s A sequence of calls to this function breaks the string s into a sequence of tokens delimited by a character specified in delim The token found in s is terminated with a null character The function returns a pointer to the first position in s of the token Description memset s c n strerror errno strlen s wmemset s cC N weslen s 2 2 25 time h and wehar h The header file time h provides facilities to retrieve and use the calenda
346. t 4 27 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler misrac version Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select MISRA C 3 Select the MISRA C standard MISRA C 1998 or MISRA C 2004 Command line syntax misrac version 1998 2004 Description MISRA C rules exist in two versions MISRA C 1998 and MISRA C 2004 By default the C source is checked against the MISRA C 2004 rules With this option you can specify to check against the MISRA C 1998 rules Related information d See Chapter 8 MISRA C Rules for a list of all supported MISRA C rules C compiler option misrac 4 28 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler model M Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Memory Model 3 Select the Small Aux or Large memory model 4 Optionally enable the Allow reentrant functions check box Command line syntax model aux large small M all s Description By default the TSK51x TSK52x compiler uses the small memory model When the compiler uses the small memory model to access data all data objects and the stack used for function parameter passing must fit in the internal RAM Note that the stack length depends upon the nesting depth of the various functions Accessing data in internal RAM is considerably
347. t 9 1 space name e If more than one processor is present the proc_name must be given for a global section layout e Ifthe section layout refers to a processor that has more than one core the core_name must be given in the space_ref e Aproc_name refers to a defined processor e Acore_name refers to a defined core e A space_name refers to a defined address space locate_direction direction direction direction low_to_high high_to_low e A section layout contains at most one direction statement e If you do not specify the direction statement the locate direction of the section layout is low to high section_statement simple _section_statement aggregate_section_statement simple_section_statement assignment select_section_statement special_section_statement assignment symbol name assign_op expr assign _op 2 Linker Script Language select_section_statement select lt ref_tree gt 9 1 lt section_name gt 1 lt section_selections gt 9 1 e Either a section_name or at least one section_selection must be defined section_selections section_selection lt section_selection gt section_selection attributes lt lt gt attribute gt e attribute means select all sections that have this attribute e attribute means select all sections that do not have this attribute special _section_statement heap stack _name lt size_spec gt 1 stack s
348. t c c51 02 test c c51 optimize 2 test c c51 O test c c51 optimize test c c51 Oabcefglloprsy test c c51 optimize coalesce ipro cse expression tflow glo inline loop forward propagate compact subscript peephole test c Related information d gt Section 2 6 Compiler Optimizations in chapter Using the Compiler of the user s manual C compiler option tradeoff t Trade off between speed t0 and size t4 4 37 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler option file f Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option option file to the Additional C compiler options field Be aware that the options in the option file are added to the C compiler options you have set in the other dialogs Only in extraordinary cases you may want to use them in combination Altium Designer automatically saves the options with your project Command line syntax option file file f file Description This option is primarily intended for command line use Instead of typing all options on the command line you can create an option file which contains all options and flags you want to specify With this option you specify the option file to the compiler Use an option file when the command line would exceed the limits of the operating system or just to store options and
349. t functions 1 23 __frame 1 25 __interrupt 1 24 Interrupt service routine 1 23 __registerbank 1 25 bank switching 1 25 defining 1 24 Interrupt vector 4 34 4 52 Intrinsic functions 1 21 isalnum 2 2 isalpha 2 2 Index 5 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference isblank 2 2 iscntrl 2 2 isdigit 2 2 isfinite 2 9 isgraph 2 2 isgreater 2 9 isgreaterequal 2 9 isinf 2 9 isless 2 9 islessequal 2 9 islessgreater 2 9 islower 2 2 isnan 2 9 isnormal 2 9 ISO C standard selecting 4 20 4 129 isprint 2 2 ispunct 2 2 isspace 2 2 isunordered 2 9 isupper 2 2 iswalnum 2 2 2 24 iswalpha 2 2 2 24 iswblank 2 2 iswentrl 2 2 2 24 iswctype 2 24 iswdigit 2 2 2 24 iswgraph 2 2 2 24 iswlower 2 2 2 24 iswprint 2 2 2 24 iswpunct 2 2 2 24 iswspace 2 2 2 24 iswupper 2 2 2 24 iswxdigit 2 2 iswxditig 2 24 isxdigit 2 2 J Jump chain 1 18 Jump table 1 18 jump_switch 1 14 L L_tmpnam 2 12 Label 3 2 label 3 28 Labels 3 1 labs 2 19 Large memory model 1 7 Idexp functions 2 7 Idiv 2 19 Igamma functions 2 9 Librarian options 4 178 d 4 179 f 4 180 m 4 181 p 4 182 r 4 183 Index 6 t 4 185 V 4 186 w 4 187 x 4 188 add module 4 183 create library 4 183 delete module 4 179 extract module 4 188 move module 4 181 print list of objects 4 185 print list of symbols 4 185 print module 4 182 replace module 4 183 warning
350. table may get a page restriction with the address space s page size by adding the page argument Linker Script Language Vector table The vector_table keyword defines a vector table with n vectors of size m This is an internal LSL object similar to an LSL group The run_addr argument specifies the location of the first vector id 0 This can be a simple address or an offset in memory see the description of the run time address in subsection Locating a group in section 7 9 2 Creating and Locating Groups of Sections A vector table defines symbols _1c_ub_ fooand_1c_ue_foo pointing to start and end of the table vector table vtable vector _size m size n run_addr x See the following example of a vector table definition vector table vtable vector_size 4 size 256 run_addr 0 template text vector template template _symbol _lc vector_target vector prefix _vector_ id_symbol_prefix foo no_inline default empty or fill foo or fill 1 2 3 4 or i1l1 loop vector id 0 fill _ START vector id 12 fill 0Oxab 0x21 0x32 0x43 vector id 1 11 fill 0 vector id 18 23 fill loop The template argument defines the name of the section that holds the code to jump to a handler function from the vector table This template section does not get located and is removed when the locate phase is completed This argument is required The template_symbol
351. tack again 1 11 6 3 Register Bank Switching _ registerbank For the TSK51x TSK52x it is possible to assign a new register bank to an interrupt function which can be used on the processor to minimize the interrupt latency because registers do not need to be pushed on stack You can switch register banks with the __registerbank function qualifier void _ interrupt vector_address vector_address __registerbank bank isr void When you specify the _ registerbank qualifier the registers RO R7 are implicitly saved when the register bank is being switched by using the predefined symbolic register addresses ARO AR7 The default register bank used is bank 0 You can change this default with the compiler option b bank number Example define INTNO nr 8 nr 3 __interrupt __INTNO 1 __registerbank 2 void timer void The TSK51x TSK52x compiler places a long jump instruction on the vector address 11 of interrupt number 1 to the timer routine which switches the register bank to bank 2 and saves some more registers When timer is completed the extra registers are popped the bank is switched back to the original value and a RETI instruction is executed 1 25 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference You can call another C function from the interrupt C function However this function must be compiled with the same __registerbank bank nr qualifier because the compiler generates code which uses the addr
352. tack name lt size_spec gt 1 copytable reserved section name lt reserved_specs gt 1 e Special sections cannot be selected in load time groups size_spec 2 size expr reserved_specs reserved_spec lt reserved_spec gt reserved_spec 3 attributes fi11_ spec size expr alloc_allowed absolute e Ifa reserved section has attributes r rw x rx or rwx and no fill pattern is defined the section is filled with zeros If no attributes are set the section is created as a scratch section attributes ws no image fill_spec fill fill_values fill_values 3 expr expr lt expr gt 9 aggregate _section_statement lt section_statement gt 9 group_descr if_statement section_creation_statement group_descr group lt group_name gt lt group specs gt 9 1 section statement e No two groups for an address space can have the same group_name group_specs group_spec lt group_spec gt 0 group_alignment attributes copy nocopy group_load_address fill lt fill_values gt 1 group_page group_run_address group_type allow_cross_references group_spec priority number e The allow cross references property is only allowed for overlay groups e Sub groups inherit all properties from a parent group 7 11 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference group_alignment align expr attributes lt attribute gt 1 attributes attri
353. target processor dependant L means least significant byte at lowest address little endian M means most significant byte at lowest address big endian Example AD8 2 L Specifies a 2 byte addressable 8 bit processor running in little endian mode 6 1 4 2 Comment and Checksum Command The comment command offers the possibility to store information in an object module about the object module and the translators that created it The comment may be used to record the file name of the source file of the object module or the version number of the translator that created it Because the standard supports several layers each of which has its own revision number an object module may contain several comment commands which specify which revision of the standard has been used to create the module The contents of a comment is not prescribed by the standard and thus it is implementation defined how a MUFOM process handles a comment command CO_command CO comment_level comment_text comment_level hex_number TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference comment_text char_string The comment levels 0 6 are reserved to pass information about the revision number of the layers in this standard The checksum command starts and checks the checksum calculation of an object module 6 1 4 3 Sections A section is the smallest unit of code or data that can be controlled separately Each section has a unique number which
354. tecture with the given arch_name as a unique name e Atleast one space_def and at least one bus_def have to be present in an architecture_definition e Anarchitecture_definition that uses the extends construct defines an architecture that inherits all elements of the architecture defined by the second arch_name The parent architecture must be defined in the LSL file as well parameter list parameter lt parameter gt 9 parameter IDENTIFIER lt expr gt l 1 argument_list expr lt expr gt 0 arch_spec bus_def space def endianness_ def space _def space space_name lt space_descr gt e Aspace_def defines an address space with the given space_name as a unique name within an architecture 7 7 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference space_descr space property section_definition no space ref vector table statement reserved_range space property id number as used in object mau expr align expr page_size expr lt range lt range gt 0 gt 0 1 page direction direction stack_def heap_def copy_table def start_address mapping e Aspace_def contains exactly one id and one mau statement e Aspace_def contains at most one align statement e Aspace_def contains at most one page_size statement e Aspace_def contains at least one mapping stack_def stack stack_name stack_heap_descr lt stack_heap descr gt gt e Astack_def defines a stack wi
355. ted information J 4 188 5 List File Formats Summary This chapter describes the format of the assembler list file and the linker map file 5 1 Assembler List File Format The assembler list file is an additional output file of the assembler that contains information about the generated code The list file consists of a page header and a source listing Page header The page header is repeated on every page TASKING target Assembler vx yrz Build nnn SN 00000000 Title Page 1 ADDR CODE CYCLES LINE SOURCE LINE The first line contains version information The second line can contain a title which you can specify with the assembler directive TITLE and always contains a page number With the assembler directives LIST NOLIST and PAGE and with the assembler option Lflag list format you can format the list file See Section 3 8 2 Assembler Directives in Chapter Assembly Language and Section 4 2 Assembler Options in Chapter Tools Options The fourth line contains the headings of the columns for the source listing Source listing The following is a sample part of a listing An explanation of the different columns follows below ADDR CODE CYCLES LINE SOURCE LINE 1 Module start 0010 7Err 2 24 32 mov R6 msb __ 2_ini 0012 7Frr 2 26 33 mov R7 lsb __2_ ini 0014 12rrrr 6 32 34 gcall _printf 0000 38 ds 2 RESERVED 0001 The meaning of the different columns is ADDR This column contains the memory
356. ter 1k51 test obj otest abs d51 1sl D__STACK 32 or using the long option names 1k51 test obj otest abs 1lsl file 51 1sl define _ STACK 32 Related information d Linker option option file Read options from file 4 84 Tool Options Linker Linker diag Menu entry 1 From the View menu select Workspace Panels System Messages The Messages panel appears 2 In the Messages panel right click on the message you want more information on A popup menu appears 3 Select More Info A Message Info box appears with additional information Command line syntax diag format all nr Description With this option you can ask for an extended description of error messages in the format you choose The output is directed to stdout normally your screen and in the format you specify You can specify the following formats html rtf or text default To create a file with the descriptions you must redirect the output With the suboption all the descriptions of all error messages are given If you want the description of one or more selected error messages you can specify the error message numbers separated by commas With this option the linker does not link locate any files Example To display an explanation of message number 106 enter 1k51 diag 106 This results in the following message and explanation E106 unresolved external lt message gt The linker could not resolve all external sy
357. th an option to generate a list file while with the directives NOLIST and LIST you overrule this option for a part of the code that you do not want to appear in the list file Directives of this kind sometimes are called controls Each assembler directive has its own syntax Some assembler directives can be preceded with a label If you do not precede an assembler directive with a label you must use white space instead spaces or tabs You can use assembler directives in the assembly code as pseudo instructions 3 8 1 Overview of Assembler Directives The following tables provide an overview of all assembler directives For a detailed description of these directives refer to section 3 8 2 Detailed Description of Assembler Directives Overview of assembly control directives Directive Description END Indicates the end of an assembly module INCLUDE Include file MESSAGE Programmer generated message 3 8 Assembly Language Overview of symbol definition directives Directive Description EQU Set permanent value to a symbol EXTERN Import global section symbol GLOBAL Declare global section symbol LABEL Define a label of specified type RESUME Resume a previously defined section SECTION Start a new section SET Set temporary value to a symbol WEAK Mark a symbol as weak Overview of data definition storage allocation directives Directive Description ALIGN
358. th the stack_name as a unique name heap_def heap heap name stack_heap_descr lt stack_heap_descr gt gt 0 e A heap def defines a heap with the heap_name as a unique name stack_heap_descr min_size expr grows direction align expr fixed id expr e The min_size statement must be present e You can specify at most one align statement and one grows statement e Each stack definition has its own unique id the number specified corresponds to the index in the CALLS directive as generated by the compiler If the id is omitted the id is O zero direction low_to_high high_to_low e If you do not specify the grows statement the stack and grow low to high copy_table def copytable lt copy table descr lt copy_table_descr gt gt 0 gt 0 1 e Aspace_def contains at most one copytable statement e If the architecture definition contains more than one address space exactly one copy table must be defined in one of the spaces If the architecture definition contains only one address space a copy table definition is optional it will be generated in the space copy_table_ descr align expr copy_unit expr dest lt space_name gt 1 space_name page e The copy_unit is defined by the size in MAUs in which the startup code moves data e The dest statement is only required when the startup code initializes memory used by another processor that has no access to ROM e Aspace_n
359. the application is started that data and BSS sections are re initialized Related information d 4 103 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Linker no rescan Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Libraries 3 Disable the option Rescan libraries to solve unresolved externals Command line syntax no rescan Description When the linker processes a library it searches for symbol definitions that are referenced by the objects and libraries processed so far If the library contains a definition for an unresolved reference the linker extracts the object that contains the definition from the library The linker processes object files and libraries in the order in which they appear on the command line When all objects and libraries are processed the linker checks if there are unresolved symbols left If so the default behavior of the linker is to rescan all libraries in the order given at the command line The linker stops rescanning the libraries when all symbols are resolved or when the linker could not resolve any symbol s during the rescan of all libraries Notice that resolving one symbol may introduce new unresolved symbols With this option you tell the linker to scan the object files and libraries only once When the linker has not resolved all symbols after the first scan it reports which symbols are still
360. the option define D multiple times If the command line exceeds the length limit of the operating system you can define the macros in an option file which you then must specify to the compiler with the option option file file f Defining macros with this option instead of in the C source is for example useful to compile conditional C source as shown in the example below Example Consider the following C program with conditional code to compile a demo program and a real program void main void if DEMO demo_func compile for the demo program else real func compile for the real program endif You can now use a macro definition to set the DEMO flag Macro Value DEMO 1 or empty On the command line use the option as follows c51 define DEMO test c c51 define DEMO 1 test c Note that both invocations have the same effect The next example shows how to specify a macro with arguments Macro definitions follow exactly the same rules as the define statement in the C language Macro Value MAX A B A gt B A B On the command line use the option D as follows c51 D MAX A B A gt B A B test c 4 9 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Note that the macro name and definition are placed between double quotes because otherwise the spaces would indicate a new option Related information C compiler option undefine Undefine preprocessor ma
361. this option you specify which information you want to include in the map file Use this option in combination with the option map file M If you do not specify this option the linker uses the default map file format 2 Related information d Linker option map file Generate map file 4 101 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Linker misra c report Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select MISRA C 3 Select a MISRA C configuration 4 Enable the option Produce a MISRA C report Command line syntax misra c report file Description With this option you tell the linker to create a MISRA C Quality Assurance report This report lists the various modules in the project with the respective MISRA C settings at the time of compilation If you do not specify a filename the file name mcr is used Related information d gt Compiler option misrac 4 102 Tool Options Linker Linker non romable Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option non romable to the Additional linker options field Command line syntax non romable Description With this option the linker will locate all ROM sections in RAM A copy table is generated and is located in RAM When
362. tive still reserves 32 bits Example RES DS 5 3 allocate 8 bytes Related information d BS Block Storage DBIT Define Bit DB_ Define Byte DH Define Half Word DW Define Word DL Define Long 3 19 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference DW Syntax label DW argument argumeni Description With the Dw directive Define Word you allocate and initialize one word of memory for each argument One word is 16 bits An argument is e asingle or multiple character string constant e an expression e NULL indicated by two adjacent commas If you specify label it gets the value of the location counter at the start of the directive processing Multiple arguments are stored in sets of two bytes If an argument is NULL its corresponding address locations are flled with zeros Word arguments are stored as is Floating point values are not allowed If the evaluated argument is too large to be represented in a word the assembler issues a warning and truncates the value In case of character strings each character is stored in the least significant byte of a word which represents the ASCII value of the character DW AB D gt 0x0041 0x0042 0x0000 second argument is empty 0x0044 When you use the DW directive in a bit type section each argument initializes 16 bits and the location counter of the current section is incremented with the same number of bits Example TABLE DW 14
363. to its run time location this is typically done by the startup code The run_addr keyword defines the run time address If the run time location of a group is set explicitly the given order between groups specify whether the run time address propagates to the parent group or not The location of the sections a group can be restricted either to a single absolute address or to a number of address ranges With an expression you can specify that the group should be located at the absolute address specified by the expression group run_addr 0xa00f0000 You can use the offset variant to locate the group at the given absolute offset in memory group run_addr mem A 0x1000 A range can be an absolute space address range written as expr expr acomplete memory device written as mem mem_name Or a memory address range mem mem name expr expr group run_addr mem my dram You can use the to specify an address range of more than one physical memory device group run_addr mem A mem B The load_addr keyword changes the meaning of the section selection in the group the linker selects the load time ROM copy of the named section s instead of the regular sections Just like run_addr you can specify an absolute address or an address range The load_addr keyword itself without an assignment specifies that the group s position in the LSL file defines its load time address group load_addr select mydata
364. to the va_list src argument list After this call va_arg may be used on src and dest independently va_end va_list ap This macro must be called after the arguments have been processed It should be called before the function using the macro va_start is terminated ANSI specification va_start va_list ap This macro initializes ap After this call each call to va_arg will return the value of the next lastarg argument In our implementation va_list cannot contain any bit type variables Also the given argument lastarg must be the last non bit type argument in the list 2 2 19 stdbool h This header file contains the following macro definitions These names for boolean type and values are consistent with C You are allowed to undefine or redefine the macros below define bool _Bool define true 1 define false 0 define bool true false are defined 1 Libraries 2 2 20 stddef h This header file defines the types for common use ptrdiff t signed integer type of the result of subtracting two pointers size_t unsigned integral type of the result of the sizeof operator wchar_t integer type to represent character codes in large character sets Besides these types the following macros are defined NULL expands to the null pointer constant offsetof _type _member expands to an integer constant expression with type size_t that is the offset in bytes of _member within structure type type 2 2 21 stdint h Gb Se
365. tring STRPOS strl1 str2 start Return position of sir7 in str2 3 7 2 Detailed Description of Built in Assembly Functions ARG symbol expression Returns integer 1 if the macro argument represented by symbol or expression is present 0 otherwise You can specify the argument with a symbo name the name of a macro argument enclosed in single quotes or with expression the ordinal number of the argument in the macro formal argument list If you use this function when macro expansion is not active the assembler issues a warning Example IF ARG TWIDDLE is argument twiddle present IF ARG 1 is first argument present CAST type expression Returns the result of expression but with the specified type This function can be useful when you assemble with expression type checking enabled option type checking and the assembler reports a type conflict You can then cast the expression to the correct type The following types are allowed data sfr idata bit bdata xdata pdata code sfrbit bsfr byte word dword CNT Returns the number of macro arguments of the current macro expansion as an integer If you use this function when macro expansion is not active the assembler issues a warning Example ARGCOUNT SET CNT reserve argument count CPU processor_type With the cPu function you can check whether the source code is being assembled for a certain processor type T
366. trol option format you can additionally specify the record length to be emitted in the output files With this option you can specify the size of addresses in bytes record length For Intel Hex you can use the values 1 2 and 4 default For Motorola S records you can specify 2 S1 records 3 S2 records or 4 bytes S3 records default If you do not specify addr_size the default address size is generated Example To create the SREC file test sre with S1 records type cc51 format SREC address size 2 test c Related information d gt Control program option format Set linker output format Linker option output Specify an output object file 4 116 Tool Options Control Program Control Program check Command line syntax check Description With this option you can check the source code for syntax errors without generating code This saves time in developing your application The compiler assembler reports any warnings and or errors Related information db C compiler option check Check syntax Assembler option check Check syntax 4 117 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Control Program cpu C Command line syntax Cpu cpu Ccpu Description With this option you define the CPU core for which you create your application The TSK51x TSK52x target has more than one processor type and therefore you need to specify for which processor type you want to create your appli
367. ts between the IF and ELSE directives will be assembled and the statement between the ELSE and ENDIF directives will be skipped Alternatively if expression has a value of zero then the statements between the IF and ELSE directives will be skipped and the statements between the ELSE and ENDIF directives will be assembled 3 49 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 3 10 Generic Instructions The assembler supports so called generic instructions Generic instructions are pseudo instructions no instructions from the instruction set Depending on the situation in which a generic instruction is used the assembler replaces the generic instruction with appropriate real assembly instruction s The TSK51x TSK52x assembler recognizes the following generic instructions Instruction Replacement 1 Replacement 2 Replacement 3 GCALL abel ACALL abel LCALL label GJMP label SJMP label AJMP label LJMP label GJC label JC label JNC 1 JNC 1 AJMP label LUMP label 1 1 GJNC label JNC label JC 1 JC 1 AJMP label LUMP label 1 1 GJZ label JZ label JNZ 1 JNZ 1 AJMP label LUMP label 1 1 GJNZ label JNZ label JZ 1 JZ 1 AJMP label LUMP label 1 1 GJB bit label JB bit Jabel JNB bit 1 JNB bit 1 AJMP label LJMP label 1 1 GJNB bit label JNB bit label JB bit 1 JNB bit 1 AJMP label LJMP label 1 1 GJBC bit label JBC bit label JBC bit 1 JBC bit 1 SJMP 2 SJMP 2 1 AJMP lab
368. ts the value of the location counter at the start of the directive processing Multiple arguments are stored in successive half word address locations If an argument is NULL its corresponding address location is filled with zeros Integer arguments are stored as is but must be byte values within the range 0 255 floating point numbers are not allowed If the evaluated expression is out of the range 256 255 the assembler issues an error For negative values within that range the assembler adds 256 to the specified value for example 254 is stored as 2 In case of single and multiple character strings each character is stored in consecutive bytes whose lower seven bits represent the ASCII value of the character The standard C escape sequences are allowed DH AB D gt 0x41 0x42 0x00 second argument is empty 0x44 When you use the DH directive in a bit type section each argument initializes 8 bits and the location counter of the current section is incremented with the same number of bits Example TABLE DH 14 253 0x62 ABCD CHARS DH A B C D Related information db BS DS Block Storage Define Storage DBIT Define Bit DB_ Define Byte DW Define Word DL Define Long 3 17 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference DL Syntax label DL argument argument Description With the DL directive Define Long you allocate and initialize four bytes
369. turns error information then that error information shall be tested A violation is reported when the return value of a function is ignored Pointers and arrays x 17 1 x 17 2 17 3 17 4 17 5 17 6 BBs SB Pointer arithmetic shall only be applied to pointers that address an array or array element Pointer subtraction shall only be applied to pointers that address elements of the same array gt gt lt lt shall not be applied to pointer types except where they point to the same array In general checking whether two pointers point to the same object is impossible The compiler will only report a violation for a relational operation with incompatible pointer types Array indexing shall be the only allowed form of pointer arithmetic The declaration of objects should contain no more than 2 levels of pointer indirection A violation is reported when a pointer with three or more levels of indirection is declared The address of an object with automatic storage shall not be assigned to another object that may persist after the first object has ceased to exist Structures and unions 18 1 18 2 x 18 3 18 4 R R R R All structure or union types shall be complete at the end of a translation unit An object shall not be assigned to an overlapping object An area of memory shall not be reused for unrelated purposes Unions shall not be used Preprocessing directives 19 1 19 2 x 19 3 19 4 19 5 19 6
370. ty switch clause The final clause of a switch statement shall be the default clause A switch expression shall not represent a value that is effectively Boolean Every switch statement shall have at least one case clause MISRA C Rules Functions 16 1 16 2 16 3 16 4 16 5 16 6 16 7 16 8 16 9 16 10 3 aoaaa a D D 2 gt 2 R R Functions shall not be defined with variable numbers of arguments Functions shall not call themselves either directly or indirectly A violation will be reported for direct or indirect recursive function calls in the source file being checked Recursion via functions in other source files or recursion via function pointers is not detected Identifiers shall be given for all of the parameters in a function prototype declaration The identifiers used in the declaration and definition of a function shall be identical Functions with no parameters shall be declared with parameter type void The number of arguments passed to a function shall match the number of parameters A pointer parameter in a function prototype should be declared as pointer to const if the pointer is not used to modify the addressed object All exit paths from a function with non void return type shall have an explicit return statement with an expression A function identifier shall only be used with either a preceding amp or with a parenthesized parameter list which may be empty If a function re
371. ue the line Whitespace between quotes is preserved This is a continuation line gt This is a continuation line It is possible to nest command line files up to 25 levels Example Suppose the file myoptions contains the following lines k err errors txt test abs Specify the option file to the make utility tmk m myoptions This is equivalent to the following command line tmk k err errors txt test abs Related information de 4 165 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility n Command line syntax n Description With this option you tell the make utility to perform a dry run The make utility shows what it would do but does not actually perform these tasks This option is for example useful to quickly inspect what would happen if you call the make utility Example tmk n The make utility does not perform any tasks but displays what it would do if called without the option n Related information d gt Make utility option s Do not print commands before execution 4 166 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility p Command line syntax P Description Normally if a command in a target rule in a makefile returns an error or when the target construction is interrupted the make utility removes that target file With this option you tell the make utility to make all target files precious This means that dependency files are never removed Example tmk p
372. unresolved This option is useful if you are building your own libraries The libraries are most efficiently organized if the linker needs only one pass to resolve all symbols Related information d gt Linker option first library first Scan libraries in given order 4 104 Tool Options Linker Linker no rom copy N Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option no rom copy to the Additional linker options field Command line syntax no rom copy N Description With this option the linker will not generate a ROM copy for data sections A copy table is generated and contains entries to clear BSS section However no entries to copy data sections from ROM to RAM are placed in the copy table The data sections are initialized when the application is downloaded The data sections are not re initialized when the application is restarted Related information i 4 105 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Linker no warnings w Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Diagnostics 3 Set Error reporting to one of the following values e Report all warnings e Suppress all warnings e Suppress specific warnings If you select Suppress specific warnings 4 Enter the nu
373. uotes e If you want to use single quotes as part of the argument surround the argument by double quotes and vise versa This has a single quote embedded This has a double quote embedded This has a double quote and a single quote embedded e When atext line reaches its length limit use a to continue the line Whitespace between quotes is preserved This is a continuation line gt This is a continuation line e tis possible to nest command line files up to 25 levels Example Suppose the file myoptions contains the following lines gaL test src Specify the option file to the assembler as51 option file myoptions This is equivalent to the following command line as51 gaL test srce Related information 4 72 Tool Options Assembler Assembler output 0 Menu entry Altium Designer names the output file always after the source file Command line syntax output file 0 file Description With this option you can specify another filename for the output file of the assembler Without this option the basename of the assembly source file is used with extension obj Example To create the file relobj obj instead of asm obj enter as51 output relobj obj asm src Related information J 4 73 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Assembler preprocessor type m Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project O
374. user s manual explain how to use the compiler assembler linker and the various utilities Once you are familiar with these tools you can use this reference manual to lookup specific options and details to make full use of the TASKING toolset The reference manual describes the C language implementation and the assembly language vii TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Short Table of Contents Chapter 1 C Language The TASKING C compilers are fully compatible with ISO C This chapter describes the specific target features of the C language including language extensions that are not standard in ISO C For example pragmas are a way to control the compiler from within the C source The following language extensions are described e Data types e Keywords e Function qualifiers e Intrinsic functions e Pragmas e Predefined macros Chapter 2 Libraries Contains overviews of all library functions you can use in your C source First libraries are listed per header file that contains the prototypes These tables also show the level of implementation per function Second all library functions are listed and discussed into detail Chapter 3 Assembly Language Describes the specific features of the assembly language as well as directives which are pseudo instructions that are interpreted by the assembler Chapter 4 Tool Options Contains a description of all tool options e C compiler options e Assembler options e
375. ut usually your screen No files are created This option is for example useful to quickly inspect the output or to redirect the output to other tools Related information i 4 48 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler tradeoff t Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization 3 Inthe Size speed trade off field select a level between fully optimize for size or fully optimize for speed Command line syntax tradeoff 0 1 2 3 4 t 0 1 2 3 4 Description If the compiler uses certain optimizations option optimize you can use this option to specify whether the used optimizations should optimize for more speed regardless of code size or for smaller code size regardless of speed By default the compiler optimizes for more speed tradeoff 0 AN If you have not used the option optimize the compiler uses the default optimization In this case it is still useful to specify a trade off level Related information d C compiler option optimize Specify optimization level 4 49 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler uchar u Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Language 3 Enable the option Treat char variables as unsigned Command line syntax
376. ve A macro definition takes the following form macro_name MACRO arg arg comment source statements ENDM If the macro name is the same as an existing assembler directive or mnemonic opcode the assembler replaces the directive or mnemonic opcode with the macro and issues a warning The arguments are symbolic names that the macro preprocessor replaces with the literal arguments when the macro is expanded called Each argument must follow the same rules as global symbol names Argument names cannot start with a percent sign Example Consider the following macro definition RESERV MACRO val reserve space DS val ENDM After the following macro call section code code RESERV 8 The macro expands to DS 8 3 9 2 Calling a Macro To invoke a macro construct a source statement with the following format label macro_name arg arg 7 comment where label An optional label that corresponds to the value of the location counter at the start of the macro expansion 3 45 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference macro_name The name of the macro This may not start in the first column arg One or more optional substitutable arguments Multiple arguments must be separated by commas comment An optional comment The following applies to macro arguments e Each argument must correspond one to one with the formal arguments of the macro definition If the macro call does not contain the same
377. ve definitions at all There are however two situations where derivative definitions are useful 1 When you re use an FPGA design for several board designs it may be practical to write a derivative definition for the FPGA design and include it in the project LSL file 2 When you want to use multiple cores of the same type you must instantiate the cores in a derivative definition since the linker automatically instantiates only a single core for an unused architecture TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference db See section 7 6 Semantics of the Derivative Definition for a detailed description of LSL in the derivative definition The processor definition The processor definition describes an instance of a derivative Typically the processor definition instantiates one derivative only single core processor A processor that contains multiple cores having the same homogeneous or different heterogeneous architecture can also be described by instantiating multiple derivatives of the same or different types in separate processor definitions If for a derivative A no processor is defined in the LSL file the linker automatically creates a processor named A of derivative A This is why for single processor applications it is enough to specify the derivative in the LSL file db See section 7 7 Semantics of the Board Specification for a detailed description of LSL in the processor definition The memory and bus definitions
378. verlaid sections in the static model all except TSK51x TSK52x only sfr sfrbit bsfr group group Used to group sections for example for placing in the same page all except sfr sfrbit bsfr Table 3 4 TSK51x TSK52x section attributes Example SECTION data data init Declare section of type data and initialize it by copying its data from ROM SECTION data data clear Declare a data section cleared at program startup SECTION data data init Declare a second data init section db RESUME Resume a previously defined section 3 39 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference SET Syntax symbol SET expression SET symbol expression Description With the SET directive you assign the value of expression to symbol temporarily If a symbol was defined with the SET directive you can redefine that symbol in another part of the assembly source using the SET directive again Symbols that you define with the SET directive are always local you cannot define the symbol global with the GLOBAL directive The SET directive is useful in establishing temporary or reusable counters within macros expression must be absolute and cannot include a symbol that is not yet defined no forward references are allowed Normally the defined symbol gets the same type as the result of the expression However when the resulting expression has type none the symbol gets no type Example COUNT
379. versions of these routines int long and long long versions If you use floating point the formatter function for floating point _dof1t or _dowf1t is called Depending on the formatting arguments you use the correct routine is used from the library Of course the larger the version of the routine the larger your produced code will be Note that when you call any of the printf scanf routines indirect the arguments are not known and always the long long version with floating point support is used from the library Example include lt stdio h gt long L void main void printf This is a long ld n L The linker extracts the long version without floating point support from the library 1 27 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference db See also the description of pragma weak in section 1 6 Pragmas to Control the Compiler in the user s manual 1 28 2 Libraries Summary This chapter lists all library functions that you can call in your C source 2 1 Introduction This chapter contains an overview of all library functions that you can call in your C source This includes all functions of the standard C library ISO C99 and some functions of the floating point library A number of standard operations within C are too complex to generate inline code for too much code These operations are implemented as run time library functions to save code Section 2 2 Library Functions gives an overvie
380. viate long option names as long as the name is unique You can mix short and long option names on the command line Options can have flags or sub options To switch a flag on use a lowercase letter or a ongflag To switch a flag off use an uppercase letter or a ongflag Separate longflags with commas The following two invocations are equivalent 1k51 mfk test obj 1k51 map file format files link test obj When you do not specify an option a default value may become active 4 81 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Linker case insensitive Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Disable the option Link case sensitive Command line syntax case insensitive Description With this option you tell the linker not to distinguish between upper and lower case characters in symbols By default the linker considers upper and lower case characters as different characters Disabling the option Link case sensitive in Altium Designer is the same as specifying the option case insensitive on the command line Assembly source files that are generated by the compiler must always be assembled and thus linked case sensitive When you have written your own assembly code and specified to assemble it case insensitive you must also link the obj file case insensitive Related information ie 4 82
381. vironment variables With the option e the settings of the environment variables are used even if macros define otherwise Example tmk e The make utility uses the settings of the environment variables regardless of macro definitions Related information i 4 158 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility err Command line syntax err file Description With this option the make utility redirects error messages and verbose messages to a specified file With the option s the make utility only displays error messages Example tmk err error txt The make utility writes messages to the file error txt Related information d gt Make utility option s Do not print commands before execution 4 159 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility f Command line syntax f my_makefile Description Default the make utility uses the file makefile to build your files With this option you tell the make utility to use the specified file instead of the file makefile Multiple f options act as if all the makefiles were concatenated in a left to right order Example tmk f mymake The make utility uses the file mymake to build your files Related information J 4 160 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility G Command line syntax G path Description Normally you must call the make utility tmk from the directory where your makefile and other files are stored With the option G you
382. w library file add an object file and specify a library that does not yet exist tlb r objl obj newlib lib The librarian creates the library newlib 1ib and adds the object obj1 obj to it To create a new library file and overwrite an existing library add an object file and specify an existing library with the supoption C tlb r c objl obj mylib lib 4 183 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference The librarian overwrites the library mylib 1ib and adds the object obj1 obj to it The new library mylib 1ib only contains obj1 obj Related information d gt Librarian option t Print library contents 4 184 Tool Options Librarian Librarian t Command line syntax t s0 s1 Description Print a table of contents of the library to standard out With the suboption s the librarian displays all symbols per object file s0 Displays per object the library in which it resides the name of the object itself and all symbols in the object s1 Displays only the symbols of all object files in the library Example tlb t mylib lib The librarian prints a list of all object modules in the libary mylib lib tlb t s0 mylib lib The librarian prints per object all symbols in the library This looks like prolog obj symbols mylib lib prolog obj Qabi_callee_save mylib lib prolog obj Qabi_callee restore divl16 obj symbols mylib lib divl6 obj udivl6 mylib lib divl6 obj divl6 mylib lib divl6 obj _urem16 m
383. w of all library functions you can use grouped per header file A number of functions declared in wchar h are parallel to functions in other header files These are discussed together Each library is available in six variants for the large I medium m and small memory s model and all three with all functions default reentrant r or static s The following libraries are available Altium Designer automatically selects the appropriate libraries depending on the specified options Libraries Description c51as lib Single precision C library static functions c51Is lib some functions also need the floating point library c51ss lib c51ar lib Single precision C library reentrant functions c51lr lib some functions also need the floating point library c51sr lib fp51as lib Floating point library non trapping fp51Is lib fp51ss lib fp51ar lib Floating point library with reentrancy non trapping fp51Ir lib fp51sr lib fp51ast lib Floating point library trapping fp51Ist lib fp51sst lib fp51art lib Floating point library with reentrancy trapping fp51Irt lib fp51srt lib rt51 lib Run time library Table 2 1 Overview of libraries aN All libraries are compiled for the auxiliary page a large I and small s memory model 2 1 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference 2 2 Library Functions The following sections list all library functions grouped per header file in which they
384. wag oni rE reu ee dans ESE EEE Radda ace ee EEEE 1 19 1 11 2 Parameter Passing t cc 20 4700 ctadaderos antea a nea a neoe adwdae done 1 19 1 11 3 Function Return Types 2 205 ceeek pa cee Cae cuie dekeki pam e Od Be pe od AE Bee Oe 1 20 1 11 4 Inlining Functions inline __noinline 0 0000 eee eee eee 1 20 1 11 5 Intrinsic FUNCIONS w i coviet ote tila c aan Hokie ial ue ata hy TEN 1 21 1 11 6 Interrupt FUNCHONS ss saii ia Sak owl hn aoa ea dole mee een eee awa ahead Galen see aoe 1 23 1 11 6 1 Defining an Interrupt Service Routine __interrupt 00 cee eee eee 1 24 1 11 6 2 Interrupt Frame frame 2 0 6 2 i ee eee ene ed 1 25 1 11 6 3 Register Bank Switching __registerbank 0 eee eee eens 1 25 1 11 7 Register Bank Independent Code Generation 00 cece cece eee eee 1 26 1 12 SECON NAMING ici ce bith wad oe Dae Coda ddeie yaa dada eka dene eden ata aed 1 26 1 13 FIDFaANiOS 2 occ cide napen Qi ened nue ban biu ee sameaude dead Caen ea deus rei RE en aee ey ses 1 27 1 13 1 Printf and Scanf Routines 000 c cece eee eee e eens 1 27 Libraries 2 1 2 1 Introduction soc cedar nceie cay edad ead cas each a ea detec EE DEUDE Cee ae ee ees ems 2 1 2 2 Library FUNCHONS 266 026 cule ete ced Fda aide hag ade E due DA we ewa ad E EA 2 2 2 2 1 ASSEN cided ede ors Seek odee nay meee EEE ayaa ee Gaeaneeeda yeas kameee hae aw eas 2 2 2 2 2 COMPEX N iinet enediws deat iedaduddgonlanhduddebs oh Gd dewa
385. wctype wc wctype xdigit wctrans property towctrans wc desc Constructs a value of type wctype_t that describes a mapping between wide characters identi fied by the string property If property identifies a valid mapping of wide characters according to the LC_TYPE category see section 2 2 13 ocale h of the current locale a non zero value is returned that can be used as an argument in the towctrans function Transforms wide character wc into another wide character described by desc Function Equivalent to locale specific transformation towlower wc towctrans wc wctrans tolower towupper wc towctrans wc wctrans toupper 2 24 3 Assembly Language Summ ary This chapter describes the most important aspects of the TASKING assembly language and contains a detailed description of all built in assembly functions and assembler directives For a complete overview of the architecture you are using and a description of the assembly instruction set refer to the target s Core Reference Manual 3 1 Assembly Syntax An assembly program consists of zero or more statements A statement may optionally be followed by a comment Any source statement can be extended to more lines by including the line continuation character as the last character on the line The length of a source statement first line and continuation lines is only limited by the amount of available memory Mnemonics and directives are
386. which causes the linker to generate ROM copies for the sections 7 27 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference e The effect of the nocopy field is the opposite of the copy field It prevents the linker from generating ROM copies of the selected sections 2 Define the mutual order of the sections in the group By default a group is unrestricted which means that the linker has total freedom to place the sections of the group in the address space e The ordered keyword tells the linker to locate the sections in the same order in the address space as they appear in the group but not necessarily adjacent Suppose you have an ordered group that contains the sections A B and C By default the linker places the sections in the address space like A B C where section A gets the lowest possible address With direction high_to_lowin the section_layout space properties the linker places the sections in the address space like C B A where section A gets the highest possible address e The contiguous keyword tells the linker to locate the sections in the group in a single address range Within a contiguous group the input sections are located in arbitrary order however the group occupies one contigous range of memory Due to alignment of sections there can be alignment gaps between the sections When you define a group that is both ordered and contiguous this is called
387. y Not implemented nexttoward nexttowardl nexttoward Same as nextafter except that the second argument in all three variants is nexttowardf of type long double Returns y if x y Not implemented 2 8 Libraries Positive difference maximum minimum math h tgmath h Description fdim fdiml fdimf fdim Returns the positive difference between x y Not implemented fmax fmaxl fmaxf fmax Returns the maximum value of their arguments Not implemented fmin fminl fminf fmin Returns the minimum value of their arguments Not implemented Error and gamma Not implemented math h tgmath h Description erf erfl erff erf Computes the error function of x Not implemented erfc erfcl erfcf erc Computes the complementary error function of x Not implemented lgamma lgammal lgammaf lgamma Computes the loge I x Not implemented tgamma tgammal tgammaf tgamma Computes T x Not implemented Comparison macros The next are implemented as macros For any ordered pair of numeric values exactly one of the relationships less greater and equal is true These macros are type generic and therefor do not have a parallel function in tgmath h All arguments must be expressions of real floating type math h tgmath h Description isgreater Returns the value of x gt y isgreaterequal Returns the value of x gt y isless Returns the value of x lt y islessequal Returns the value of x lt y
388. y a number The following signals are defined SIGINT 1 Receipt of an interactive attention signal SIGILL 2 Detection of an invalid function message SIGFPE 3 Anerrouneous arithmetic operation for example zero devide overflow SIGSEGV 4 An invalid access to storage SIGTERM 5 A termination request sent to the program SIGABRT 6 Abnormal terminiation such as is initiated by the abort function The next function sends the signal sig to the program int raise int sig The next function determines how subsequent signals will be handled signalfunction signal int signalfunction The first argument specifies the signal the second argument points to the signal handler function or has one of the following values SIG _DFL Default behaviour is used SIG_IGN The signal is ignored The function returns the previous value of signalfunction for the specific signal or SIG_ERR if an error occurs 2 2 18 stdarg h The facilities in this header file gives you a portable way to access variable arguments lists such as needed for as fprintf and vfprintf va_copy is new in ISO C99 This header file contains the following macros va_arg ap type Returns the value of the next argument in the variable argument list It s return type has the type of the given argument type A next call to this macro will return the value of the next argument va_copy va_list dest This macro duplicates the current state of src in dest creating a second pointer in
389. ylib lib divl6 obj rem16 Related information J 4 185 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Librarian V Command line syntax V Description Display version information The librarian ignores all other options or input files Example tlb V The librarian displays version information but does not perform any tasks Related information i 4 186 Tool Options Librarian Librarian w Command line syntax wilevel Description With this suboption you tell the librarian to suppress all warnings above the specified level The level is a number between 0 9 The level of a message is printed between parentheses after the warning number If you do not use the w option the default warning level is 8 Example To suppresses warnings above level 5 tlb x w5 mylib lib objl obj Related information i 4 187 TSK51x TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference Librarian x Command line syntax x 0 v Description Extract an existing module from the library 0 Give the extracted object module the same date as the last modified date that was recorded in the library Without this suboption it receives the last modified date of the moment it is extracted V Verbose the librarian shows which files are extracted Examples To extract the file obj1 obj from the library mylib lib tlb x mylib lib objl obj If you do not specify an object module all object modules are extracted tlb x mylib lib Rela
390. you do not specify the function qualifier ___frame the C compiler determines which registers must be pushed and popped The syntax is void _interrupt vector_address vector_address __frame reg reg isr void where reg can be any register defined as an SFR The compiler generates a warning if some registers are missing which are normally required to be pushed and popped in an interrupt function prolog and epilog to avoid run time problems AN Refer to the special function register files sfr in the target include directory for an overview of all defined special function registers See also section 1 3 2 Accessing Hardware from C _ sir Example __interrupt 0x10 _ frame A RO R1 void alarm void When you do not want the interrupt frame saving restoring registers to be generated you can use the compiler option noframe In that case you will have to specify your own interrupt frame For this you can use the inline capabilities of the compiler C compiler option noframe Do not generate frame for interrupt handler in section 4 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options of the reference manual Normally when an interrupt function is called all registers in the default register bank that are or could be used in the interrupt function are saved on the stack so the registers are available for the interrupt routine After returning from the interrupt routine the original values are restored from the s
391. ypes h and stdint h The header files stdint h and inttypes h provide additional declarations for integer types and have various characteristics The stdint h header file contains basic definitions of integer types of certain sizes and corresponding sets of macros This header file clearly refers to the corresponding sections in the ISO C99 standard The inttypes h header file includes stdint h and adds portable formatting and conversion functions Below the conversion functions from inttypes h are listed intmax_t imaxabs intmax_t j Returns the absolute value of j imaxdiv_t imaxdiv intmax_t numer Computes numer denom and numer denom The result is stored in the quot intmax_t denom and rem components of the imaxdiv_t structure type intmax_t strtoimax const char Convert string to maximum sized integer Compare strtol restrict nptr char restrict endptr int base uintmax_t strtoumax const char Convert string to maximum sized unsigned integer Compare strtoul restrict nptr char restrict endptr int base intmax_t westoimax const wchar_t Convert wide string to maximum sized integer Compare wctol restrict nptr wchar_t re strict endptr int base uintmax_t westoumax const wchar_t Convert wide string to maximem sized unsigned integer Compare wctoul restrict nptr wchar_t re strict endptr int base 2 2 10 io h The header file io h contains definitions and prototypes for low level I O function

TR0105 TSK51x/TSK52x Embedded Tools Reference

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents